Snap XMP Desktop inc. Scanning Archives | SnapSurveys Support documentation for Snap Surveys products Wed, 27 Nov 2024 17:33:23 +0000 en-GB hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.5 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/favicon-32x32-1.png Snap XMP Desktop inc. Scanning Archives | SnapSurveys 32 32 Changing the proportions or balance of a sample group https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-proportions-or-balance-of-a-sample-group/ Wed, 27 Nov 2024 17:33:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12658 Balancing the sample of data responses allows you to adjust the proportion of respondents in your sample to match more closely the proportion in the target population. This target may align the demographics of the respondents to those in a census or an industry benchmark. For example, you can also set the proportions to show […]

The post Changing the proportions or balance of a sample group appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Balancing the sample of data responses allows you to adjust the proportion of respondents in your sample to match more closely the proportion in the target population. This target may align the demographics of the respondents to those in a census or an industry benchmark. For example, you can also set the proportions to show an even distribution for each age range.

Calculate the weighting factors

In the example used, there are more female respondents than male respondents, and the instructions show how to change the sample proportions to represent half the respondents as female and half as male, without changing the current base.

  1. Click AnalysisTblIcon.png to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a table.
  2. In Analysis, enter the variable that you want to weight. Build the table and note the totals for each code.
Weights5.PNG
  1. Calculate the Weighting Factors for each code. To calculate the value, divide the target figure (384÷2=192) by the actual figure.
    • Code 1, Male = 192 ÷ 152 = 1.263
    • Code 2, Female = 192 ÷ 232 = 0.828

Create the weight

  1. Click WeightsIcon.png to display the Weights window.
  2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png to add a new weight and specify the Weight Details as follows:
    • Name: WT1
    • Label: Weight male/female
    • Decimal places: 3
    • Number of codes: 2
Weights6.PNG
  1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the weight.

Use the weight in an analysis

  1. Click VariablePropsIcon.png to redefine the table or AnalysisTblIcon.png to display a new Analysis Definition dialog.
  2. In Analysis, enter the variable that you want to weight.
  3. Specify the Weight as WT1 (Q12), which tells Snap to use weight WT1 based on the results for Q12.
  4. Select the Cells tab. In the Accuracy section set the Calculations d.p. to 3 decimal places to avoid rounding errors.
  5. Click OK to build the table. Check that the table shows the Weighted Values correctly, in this example there should be 103 males and 103 females. Any errors are due to rounding errors or the incorrectly calculated weighting factors.
Weights7.PNG

The table shows the Unweighted Base and the Weighted Base. You can exclude the Unweighted Base in the Tailor | Analysis option.

The weighting can be applied to any other tables and charts. However, there are 2 limitations that multiple-response variables cannot be weighted and you can only use one weight in an analysis.

The post Changing the proportions or balance of a sample group appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Designing accessible surveys https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/designing-accessible-surveys/ Mon, 28 Oct 2024 14:25:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12531 Watch this 30-minute pre-recorded webinar to understand how WCAG 2.2 guidelines can make your surveys accessible to everyone.

The post Designing accessible surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>

Watch this 30-minute pre-recorded webinar to understand how WCAG 2.2 guidelines can make your surveys accessible to everyone. Dive into accessibility essentials, from visual and auditory to cognitive and mobility support. See how implementing these standards extends your reach and improves usability on all devices. By adhering to WCAG 2.2 and aligning with US Section 508 and EN 301-549 standards, you’re not just meeting compliance—you’re committing to inclusivity, ensuring every voice is heard.

Related help

Creating an accessible version of your questionnaire

The post Designing accessible surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Show as Buttons https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/show-as-buttons/ Thu, 10 Oct 2024 12:49:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12172 This feature lets you show closed question choices as clickable buttons. This includes using images instead of labels. You also have the option to show or remove the check box. This is available for Single Choice, Multi Choice and Grid questions. Showing the labels as buttons The As Buttons option is available in the Show […]

The post Show as Buttons appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This feature lets you show closed question choices as clickable buttons. This includes using images instead of labels. You also have the option to show or remove the check box. This is available for Single Choice, Multi Choice and Grid questions.

Showing the labels as buttons

The As Buttons option is available in the Show toolbar topic.

  1. Select the Single Choice, Multi Choice or Grid question.
  2. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
  3. Select As Buttons from the next drop-down.
  1. Select the Show checkbox. This enables the Options button.
  2. Click on the Options button. This opens the Code labels as buttons dialog where you can customise the appearance of the question.

Choose the colours

You can change the text and background colours displayed for both the unselected and selected labels.

  1. Click the colour drop down to select the text or background colour.
  2. Select the colour or click More Colours to create custom colours.
  3. Click OK to save the changes.

Check that the colours are correct by previewing the questionnaire.

Choose the border

You can choose whether to show a border around the active code label, and set the properties of the border style.

  1. Select the Use border check box. This enables the border options.
  2. There are 4 border style options
    • Rounded border gives a round shape at the each end of the border.
    • Add margins adds space around the code label text.
    • Text only changes the border width to the width of each code label text.
    • Reduce width decreases the code label size to the largest text width of the code labels.
  3. Choose the border colour that is shown when labels are selected or unselected.
  4. Click OK to save the changes.

Check that the border appearance is correct by previewing the questionnaire.

Default border

When you select Use border, this will show the default border options.

This displays the code labels with a square border, no margins at the top and bottom. If the question has multiple columns, the labels are equally spaced across the page.

Rounded border

Selecting the Rounded border option, shows the buttons with rounded ends.

Add margins

Selecting the Add Margins option, adds a margin at the top and bottom of the text and/or image.

Text only

Selecting the Text Only option, shows the border around the code label text without spacing.

Reduce width

Selecting the Reduce width option, moves the labels closer together and does not use the full page. The label border reduces to the width of the code label border to the width of the longest text.

If both Reduce width and Text only options are selected then the label border widths are defined by the Text only option.

Append box image

You can display a checkbox using either the Off image or the On image, which shows when the code label is selected.

For example, when the On image is selected, this is shown after the code label text on the selected codes.

Displaying with no columns

You can also display the code labels adjacent to each other, without any columns. This uses the Columns settings.

  1. Select Columns in the topic drop-down.
  2. Select the None button.

During the interview each code label displays adjacent to the next across the full width of the page.

Examples

Image only

Label only

Image and Label

The post Show as Buttons appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using the Single Edition Template https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-the-single-edition-template/ Mon, 30 Sep 2024 14:24:07 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12359 There are a wide range of different screen sizes that respondents can use to complete your questionnaire. These vary from larger widescreen monitors to small mobile phones. When designing a questionnaire or form, it’s important to consider which devices a respondent might use. Traditional approach Snap Surveys traditional approach is to create a survey that […]

The post Using the Single Edition Template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
There are a wide range of different screen sizes that respondents can use to complete your questionnaire. These vary from larger widescreen monitors to small mobile phones. When designing a questionnaire or form, it’s important to consider which devices a respondent might use.

Traditional approach

Snap Surveys traditional approach is to create a survey that makes use of different editions. The edition presented to the respondent is based upon the screen size of the device they are using. This allows the designer to specify how questions are formatted, and which images and logos are displayed. For example a respondent using a larger device sees a wide banner, whereas someone using a smaller device, sees a smaller image which fits the screen without the need to zoom in or out.

This approach provides the respondent with a more tailored view, but involves greater design work. It involves the designer deciding how the project will appear on multiple devices, such as, phones, tablets and monitors. In addition, some features must be added to each edition individually. For example, if all screen sizes require a page break then the designer must add this to each edition.

Single Edition Template

In many scenarios, there are minimal differences between the editions. This leads to the extra effort required to consider all the editions giving little perceived benefit. For this reason, Snap XMP now offers a Single Edition Template with just one online edition that can fit multiple screen sizes. As with all our supplied templates, there is also a Paper Edition.

Single Edition vs Multiple Editions

As with any ‘one size fits all’ approach, there are times when you may require a more custom fit. Here are some considerations to help you decide whether to use the Single Edition Template or a multiple edition template.

Logos and Images

The size of the images and logos affects which option may be best for your project. Typically we would recommend a maximum image size of 600px, scaled (zoomed down) to 50%.

In a Single Edition Template, the width of the questionnaire or form will be the widest image on the page. Using the Single Edition Template works best when your images and logo’s fit on a smaller phone screen (in portrait mode), without the need to zoom out. If they are wider than this, a respondent using a phone will have to either zoom out to see everything on the screen, or scroll left and right to view the full question text.

If you have wider images and logo’s, a multiple edition questionnaire or form displays different images on different sized devices. For example, a larger banner would be shown on a PC, Laptop or Tablet device, and a different smaller image would be viewed on a smaller phone sized device.

Grid Questions (Rating Scales)

Grid question and answer formats can affect which option to choose.

These can include:

  • Long questions
  • Long answer labels
  • Large number of answer labels

With a multiple edition template, a grid question displays as an individual drop-down menu on a phone sized device. This makes it easier to see all the answers on a smaller screen.

In the Single Edition Template, the question remains in a grid format. On a smaller screen, the question rows and answers are moved closer together to try and fit the screen. This means that longer question and answer text, or a larger number of possible answers can become too close together and difficult to read. If this is the case, it is preferable to use the ‘Carousel’ question style, which makes better use of a smaller screen when there are larger amounts of question and answer text.

If your grid question has a smaller answer set, such as, a simple Yes | No, then the standard grid question style within the Single Edition Template works well on both larger and smaller devices.

The post Using the Single Edition Template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using the Page paradata variable for a Tabbed Questionnaire design https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-tabbed-pages/ Thu, 11 Jul 2024 11:40:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12050 You can use the Page paradata variable to handle page navigation as an alternative or additional to Next and Back buttons. You control the content that is displayed by setting page breaks and the respondent selects the page by selecting a code in the Page paradata variable. Enable the Page paradata variable For surveys created […]

The post Using the Page paradata variable for a Tabbed Questionnaire design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>

You can use the Page paradata variable to handle page navigation as an alternative or additional to Next and Back buttons. You control the content that is displayed by setting page breaks and the respondent selects the page by selecting a code in the Page paradata variable.

Enable the Page paradata variable

For surveys created using the latest survey templates, the Page paradata variable is already included in the questionnaire as a hidden system variable.

  1. Select the question and use the mouse right-click to display the pop-up menu
  2. Click Show Variables to show the Page variable

For existing surveys, enable the Page system setting using Questionnaire Properties.

  1. In the Questionnaire window, click on Questionnaire Properties.
  2. In Section, select the Paradata option.
  3. In System Variables, select Page then select Display in questionnaire. This adds a question at the start of the questionnaire. Click OK to save the settings.

The Page paradata variable is a single choice question which you can use to define the number of pages. Questions are automatically assigned to a page based on the page breaks. You can choose how to display the Page paradata variable using the ‘Show’ menu option. When a respondent selects a code in the Page question the questions assigned to that page will show. 

When there are a large number of pages to be displayed on a small screen, such as a smartphone, the Page question can be shown, for example, as a drop down. Where you have larger screens, it can be useful to show as a Tab control 

You can use different show options for each edition of the questionnaire. 

The Page paradata variable is only available in online editions and will show as unavailable in a paper edition.

Using show as tab control with the Page paradata

A tabbed view of your questionnaire allows you to group together questions on the same page and enables your respondents to navigate quickly from one tab to another without the need to go through the pages one by one. This is especially useful where different respondents complete sections of the same questionnaire, or where a respondent needs to move between sections such as in a conference questionnaire.

Set the Page paradata variable to display in the questionnaire prior to setting it to show as a tab control. The codes in the Page paradata variable question will define the number of tabs and the tab names when shown as a tab control. Questions are automatically assigned to a tab based on the page breaks. 

Add the tabs

The new Page question created is a single choice question, where each choice will define a tab. The code label will be used as the name of the tab.

The tab control is only available in online editions. In a paper edition, the Page system setting is shown as unavailable.

Add an entry for each tab that you want on the tab control. Enter the first tab name in the first answer choice, labelled “Code Label”, then press Tab to create and move to the next code label. 

We recommend displaying the question text above the tabs although you can hide the question text, by selecting Show and Text, then clearing the Show checkbox.

Add the Page Breaks for each tab

When you have entered the tab names, use page breaks to group the questions that appear on each tab. 

The questions between the Page question and the first page break will appear on the first tab, the questions between the first and second page break will appear on the second tab. Repeat this until you have created page breaks for all the tabs. 

To add a page break above the selected question, select the Break option in the Toolbar Topics list then select or clear the Page Break checkbox.

Topics toolbar showing page break settings

Show as a Tab Control

  1. Select the Page question.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topic list.
  3. Select As Tab Control in the next list and select Show.
  1. Repeat this for each online edition that you want to show a tabbed page.

The Page question will not change appearance in the Questionnaire design window.

Using the tabs in an interview

You can select the tab to show the questions for that page or use the Next and Back buttons to move between tabs. You can go to any tab and you do not need to complete the questions in the tab order shown. The Next and Back buttons can be removed so navigation is only possible with the tabs.

If there are a large number of tabs, or you are using a smaller display, such as a smartphone, the tabs will wrap around to form multiple rows of tabs that you can select.

Page randomisation of groups of questions is not available on tab controls.

Editing a tab

You can edit a tab by

  • Changing the code label in the Page question to update the tab name
  • Changing the position of the page breaks to include different questions on a tab

Removing a tab

Deleting a code label from the Page question removes the tab.

This does not remove the questions associated with that tab. You will need to remove the questions separately or reposition the page breaks, depending on your survey design. 

Removing the tabbed page

If you wish to stop using a tabbed page, you need to hide the Page system setting.

  1. Click on Questionnaire Properties.
  2. In Section, select the Paradata option.
  3. In System Variables, select Page then clear Display in questionnaire.

You may wish to reposition your page breaks, depending on your survey design.

The post Using the Page paradata variable for a Tabbed Questionnaire design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using logos for Retina and high density devices https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-logos-for-retina-and-high-density-devices/ Mon, 17 Jun 2024 16:30:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=12025 What is a high density screen? Over the past few years, computer, smartphone and now TV screens have more than doubled in pixel resolution. This means the individual pixels that make up the screen have become so tiny they are virtually imperceptible to the human eye at a typical viewing distance. Apple first named these […]

The post Using logos for Retina and high density devices appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
What is a high density screen?

Over the past few years, computer, smartphone and now TV screens have more than doubled in pixel resolution. This means the individual pixels that make up the screen have become so tiny they are virtually imperceptible to the human eye at a typical viewing distance. Apple first named these high resolution screens Retina displays, though the generic industry-wide names are HDPI (high dots per inch), high density, and more recently 4K or UHD though these are usually just TVs.

Diagram showing higher pixel density on modern devices compared to traditional standard definition desktop displays.

In this guide we’re focusing on smartphones as these are the most common high density devices.

Logos on high density screens

Due to high density screens having such tiny pixels, logos created for traditional low density screens would be displayed much too small on modern devices. To correct this, high density devices typically double the size of these images to make them look the same physical size as seen on low density screens. Unfortunately, the result of this re-sizing is images that appear blocky or blurry on high density screens.

Diagram showing the effects of standard definition and high definition logos on HDPI displays.

But there is a solution…

Creating images for both low and high density screens

If you want your company or brand logo to look its best on both low and high density screens, use an image that is double the pixel resolution required on a standard low density display, then set the dimensions to 50%. This way it will look its best on both low density desktop screens, as well as modern high density screens like smartphones and tablets.

Using high density logos in Snap XMP

For this worksheet, our example survey logo on a standard definition screen is a 300px wide image, but we want it to look sharp on high density devices.

  1. First, obtain or create a 600px wide version of the normal 300px logo. Your graphics or branding department may need to help out.
  1. Using Insert › Image, choose the 600px logo to insert into the survey.
  1. Using the Zoom input, change the value to 50%.
  1. Click OK to insert the image.

Note: The logo may look a little blocky at this point. Don’t worry, that’s just how Snap XMP Desktop previews scaled images to prevent slowing down your computer.

Publish your survey to test on various device screens. It should look good on low density screens and sharp on high density devices.

Dos and Don’ts

  • Do create high-resolution logos and graphics from original artwork files. Your branding, graphic design or marketing department may need to help out.
  • Do consider the maximum width of your logo or graphic on the smallest devices. We recommend high definition logos being no larger than 600 pixels wide.
  • Don’t use this method with photos as this could cause surveys to load slowly on poorer internet and data connections. Only create high definition logos, icons or diagrams.

The post Using logos for Retina and high density devices appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Page setup for printing reports https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/page-setup-for-printing-reports/ Thu, 06 Jun 2024 11:53:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11980 The Page Setup dialog allows you to set the report page margins, headers, footers and printer options. You can also set default fonts for each area of the report. The setup covers all reports within the survey, including smart reports listed in the Reports window, or a print report on details of the survey, such as, variables or weights. Page […]

The post Page setup for printing reports appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Page Setup dialog allows you to set the report page margins, headers, footers and printer options. You can also set default fonts for each area of the report. The setup covers all reports within the survey, including smart reports listed in the Reports window, or a print report on details of the survey, such as, variables or weights.

Page Setup dialog

You can open this dialog from the menu File|Page Setup or click Setup on any Print Report dialog . You can also click the Page Details on the Tailoring|Reports dialog.

Set the printer or print to file

The available options are:

  • Printer setup to change printer settings such as type of printer and page orientation
  • Margins and border to change the distances between the edge of the page, the drawn border and the analyses.
  • Header and footer to change the contents of the headers and footers.
  • Fonts to set the default font used in the title, details, header and thumb.

Click the relevant button to change the settings. Select Page Numbers Omitted to print the report without page numbers, even if they are in the headers or footers.

When you have completed the setup, click OK to save the changes.

Printer setup

Printer Setup allows you to change printer settings such as type of printer and page orientation (portrait or landscape). The Printer Setup dialog depends on the currently installed printer. You can choose to print to a printer or create a PDF file.

  1. Click Printer Setup to open the Print Setup dialog.
Windows Printer setup dialog showing PDF creator selected
  1. Select the printer in the Name drop-down list. Click Properties to set the properties and advanced options for the selected printer. The options available are dependent on the selected printer. Click Network to add a network printer.
  2. Choose the paper size and orientation.
  3. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Page Setup dialog.

Setting margins and borders

Margins and border change the distances between the edge of the page, the drawn border and the analyses.

  1. Select Margins and Borders and click the Margin/Border button to open the Report Borders dialog
Set the page margins and borders margins
  1. Change the margin dimensions to the values you need.
Printer layout dialog with header and footer highlighted
  1. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Page Setup dialog.

Adding headers and footers

You can add additional text and graphics to the header and footer of the first page and/or the subsequent pages.

  1. Click the Header/Footer button to display the Headers/Footers dialog.
Inserting headers and footers for the questionnaire pages
  1. Select the boxes to display the headers and footers on the first page and/or subsequent pages.
  2. The header and footer each consist of the three areas (left, centre and right). The header/footer may contain:
    • free format text
    • images
    • variable fields
    • survey fields
    • date and time of printing or publication
  3. To insert a field click Insert and choose from Image, Variable Field, Survey Field or Date/Time Field from the menu. You can also select a Survey Field from the drop-down list in the top left corner in the dialog toolbar.
  4. Use the format buttons and fields at the top of the dialog to set the font name, size, style and colour. You cannot change the justification in each area.
  5. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Page Setup dialog.

Default fonts

The fonts section sets the default font used in the title, details, header and thumb.

ButtonDescription
TitleThe default font style of the report title.
DetailsThe default font style of text that is in the report.
HeaderThe default font used for the header and footer text.
ThumbThe default font of the text running in the margins of the report.

Print report

The behaviour of the Print Report command is different for each active window. The layout of the printed report is controlled via a Page Setup dialog and depends on the type of report being printed.

WindowPrint description
Data entry windowCreate a data report listing the contents of the specified cases or variables.
Variables windowPrint a summary or detailed list of the variables and the case counts in the survey. You can select which variables are included in a detailed list.
Weights windowPrint a detailed list or summary of all weights in the survey.
Reports windowPrint a detailed list or summary of all reports in the survey.
Analyses windowPrint a detailed list or summary of all analyses in the survey.
Analysis window (table, chart, map, list)Print the specified analysis using the appropriate analysis and break details.
Analysis variables windowPrint a summary of the specified analysis variable.

The post Page setup for printing reports appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the legend labels https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-legend-labels/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:16:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11926 You can specify the labels shown in the legend. By default, the labels display the value of each data point. You can add your own text instead or a combination of the value and your own text. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in the analysis Map Control Editor. Select the drop down to insert […]

The post Changing the legend labels appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can specify the labels shown in the legend. By default, the labels display the value of each data point. You can add your own text instead or a combination of the value and your own text.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

Select the drop down to insert the {value} field at the current cursor position.

Set the number of decimal places for the calculated values displayed in the legend.

The post Changing the legend labels appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the legend font https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-legend-font/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:16:28 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11924 You can specify the font used for the legend text by selecting the typeface, font style, font size, and font colour. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in the analysis Map Control Editor.

The post Changing the legend font appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can specify the font used for the legend text by selecting the typeface, font style, font size, and font colour.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

The post Changing the legend font appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the legend backdrop https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-legend-backdrop/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:16:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11922 You can specify the background and outline for the legend. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in the analysis Map Control Editor. Fill Select whether the legend will be in a coloured box. Gradient Specify in what manner the coloured background changes from the first to the second colour. Fill/From colour Define the first colour […]

The post Changing the legend backdrop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can specify the background and outline for the legend.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

FillSelect whether the legend will be in a coloured box.
GradientSpecify in what manner the coloured background changes from the first to the second colour.
Fill/From colourDefine the first colour (the centre for circle and rectangle gradients).
To colourDefine the second colour (edge colour for circle and rectangle gradient).
FrameDefine the outline style, colour and width of the legend box.

The post Changing the legend backdrop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the legend location https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-legend-location/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:15:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11920 The Location tab positions the legend or map key, relative to the image. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in the analysis Map Control Editor. Check Visible to display the legend on the analysis map. Select a radio button to position the legend. If you select Custom location, you must specify the dimensions of the legend box. For […]

The post Changing the legend location appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Location tab positions the legend or map key, relative to the image.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

Check Visible to display the legend on the analysis map. Select a radio button to position the legend.

If you select Custom location, you must specify the dimensions of the legend box. For all other locations, the box is auto-sized. The number of items displayed in the legend is the same as the number of data points defined in the shading.

The post Changing the legend location appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the shading https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-shading/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:15:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11918 You can add and remove data points as well as change the colours of each data point in the legend. You must define at least two colours, one set as the minimum and the other as the maximum value. Any additional data points are fixed as mid values. Open this dialog by clicking Fill in […]

The post Changing the shading appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can add and remove data points as well as change the colours of each data point in the legend. You must define at least two colours, one set as the minimum and the other as the maximum value. Any additional data points are fixed as mid values.

Open this dialog by clicking Fill IM: Fill button in the analysis Map Control Editor.

Colour modelHSL: Hue saturation lightness colour model. Used for creating traffic light maps to go through the colours of red amber green.
RGB: Red green blue colour model. Used for creating merged colour maps, where the colours merge smoothly into one another.
Data modeStepped: only use the defined colours for all values.
Continuous: use intermediate colours for intermediate values.
+Add a new data point and item to the legend.
Remove the data point and item from the legend.

The post Changing the shading appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Map Control Editor for Analysis Maps https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor-for-analysis-maps/ Wed, 22 May 2024 15:15:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11914 The Map Control Editor lets you design an analysis map. The Designer tab contains the tools to load and edit an analysis map. First, you need to load a map control or an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following: Snap Surveys provides a range of […]

The post Map Control Editor for Analysis Maps appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Map Control Editor lets you design an analysis map.

The Designer tab contains the tools to load and edit an analysis map.

First, you need to load a map control or an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following:

  • Snap XMP map control
  • image
  • HTML image map

Snap Surveys provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use.

After you have loaded the images into the map control, you are able to

The post Map Control Editor for Analysis Maps appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Override Analysis Value https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/override-analysis-value/ Wed, 22 May 2024 09:57:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11908 You can open the Override Analysis Value dialog by double-clicking a table cell. It is used to add external data or text to a table, possibly for later reference using a table cell reference in a report. You can also use it to change the default text of the row and column labels. Cell Value Includes the […]

The post Override Analysis Value appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can open the Override Analysis Value dialog by double-clicking a table cell. It is used to add external data or text to a table, possibly for later reference using a table cell reference in a report. You can also use it to change the default text of the row and column labels.

Cell ValueIncludes the table cell reference for use when inserting a reference to this table cell elsewhere.
DefaultUse value generated from table definition and data.
OverrideUse value supplied in field below.
InsertUse dynamic data within the table by inserting a field.
 Variable field: insert the name, label or current context value of a variable.
 Date/Time field: insert the current date or time.
 Cell value fieldinsert data from another table.
Clear all overridden valuesReturn table to its original state, removing all overrides on cells.

The post Override Analysis Value appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
New Cell Value Field dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/new-cell-value-field-dialog/ Wed, 22 May 2024 09:50:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11905 The New Cell Value Field dialog allows you to insert the data into table cells or notes within your report. This can be the calculated current value or over-typed data. Enter an expression describing the table cell data to insert the current table cell data into the report field, when you run the report. The expression is […]

The post New Cell Value Field dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The New Cell Value Field dialog allows you to insert the data into table cells or notes within your report. This can be the calculated current value or over-typed data.

Enter an expression describing the table cell data to insert the current table cell data into the report field, when you run the report.

The expression is defined as the table name, and an expression identifying the cell to be inserted. You can use the appropriate operators within the expression, e.g., A21 R1C1 – A22 R1C1 where both table cells contain quantities.

The cell referred to can be

  • A row label description: tablename RNlabel.
  • A column label description:  tablename CNlabel.
  • A data cell described by its row and column number: tablename RNCN.
  • A statistic value described by its row and statistic number, where the statistic number is the position in the list of statistics, S1 being the top, given by tablename RNSN.

You can also use the expression tablename empty to test if a specific table contains any data.

You can choose to modify the case and set the number of decimal places to display.

The post New Cell Value Field dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Scanning Summary dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/scanning-summary-dialog/ Wed, 22 May 2024 09:12:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11894 The Scanning Summary dialog opens by clicking  on the data entry window toolbar in scanning mode. Map from case This provides a set of colour coded blocks representing the current cases in the survey. Map from case Description An unscanned page or case. The case may have been entered without scanning, set to unscanned, or the image may […]

The post Scanning Summary dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Scanning Summary dialog opens by clicking Statistics button on the data entry window toolbar in scanning mode.

Map from case

This provides a set of colour coded blocks representing the current cases in the survey.

Map from caseDescription
An unscanned page or case. The case may have been entered without scanning, set to unscanned, or the image may have been deleted.
A page/case that has been scanned, but is skewed and needs deskewing or manual keying. 
A page/case that has been scanned but not detected.
A page/case that has been scanned and detected.
A page/case needs keying or cleaning.
The more red on the image the greater the amount of keying or cleaning required on the case.

View options

Scan/DeskewShow scanned data and cases that need deskewing.
KeyingShow keyed data.
CleaningShow cleaned data.
StatisticsOpens the Data Entry Statistics window.
PageSelect the page in a multi-page questionnaire to view.
VariableSelect variable you wish to check (Keying/Cleaning modes)
MethodClick  to select the error types to search for in Cleaning mode.
All Reply: every code has been selected.
Error: has an error response.
Multiple responses to a single: multiple responses have been given to a single response question.
No Reply: no response received.
Unknown: the question has not been recognised.

Mark As

CompletedShow the selected cases as completed.
Deskew NowForce deskewing to be applied now.
Needs KeyingMark that selected cases need to be entered by hand.
Needs DeskewingDelete the deskew files (.scf) on selected cases.
Needs CleaningMark that selected cases need cleaning.
Needs ScanningDelete the image files (.tif) for selected cases.

Other options

OMR InfoOpen the OMR (Optical Mark Reading) Information dialog to identify ticks that are too dark or too light.
RotateOpen the Rotate Sheets dialog to rotate the selected page(s).

The post Scanning Summary dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Importing your translated file https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/importing-your-translated-file/ Wed, 22 May 2024 08:20:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11891 When you receive your translated text file, check it to ensure that it matches the format of the exported file. If you are content, you can then use it to translate your survey.

The post Importing your translated file appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
When you receive your translated text file, check it to ensure that it matches the format of the exported file. If you are content, you can then use it to translate your survey.

  1. Open your survey in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png .
  2. Select File|Translation. The translation wizard opens. Select Apply External Translation from the Action list.
  3. Click Next>. The translation wizard import dialog appears.
  4. Select the language in the survey that you are translating from. You would normally use the text file that you previously exported as the Reference Language file.
  5. Specify the language that you are translating to as the Translation Language. Select the file that you have received from your translator as the File name.
  6. Check the Complete variables only box if you wish only to use translations of complete questions.
  7. Uncheck the box if you want to translate partial questions where the automatic translator finds matching strings or words (for example, Yes and No).
  8. Check the Overwrite existing content box if you wish to overwrite any translated text which is already present in your survey. Clear the box if you want to preserve any existing translated text.
  9. Click Start.
  10. When the translation has finished, a translation report is displayed. You can save this to a file or print it by clicking the Send To… button.
  11. Inspect the translated version of your survey. Questions or parts of questions which have not been translated will display the original language in grey.

The post Importing your translated file appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Exporting the source file for translation https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/exporting-the-source-file-for-translation/ Wed, 22 May 2024 08:19:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11889 These instructions show how to create the translation file containing the text that you need translating. Preparing external translation Setting the export languages Setting the export options

The post Exporting the source file for translation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
These instructions show how to create the translation file containing the text that you need translating.

Preparing external translation

  1. Open your survey in Design mode
  2. Select File|Translation to open the translation wizard.
  3. Select Prepare External Translation from the Action drop down list.
  4. Click Next.

Setting the export languages

Using the Translation wizard to export a language for translation
  1. If you already have translated some of the questions, export to a Reference with a matched translation. This creates two files, one with the list of text to be translated, and one with the list of texts that have been translated with gaps for untranslated text. If you do not have an existing translation, you can create a Reference file only.
  2. Specify the Reference Language (the language that you will translate from) and the name of the file where the list of texts will be saved. By default, the file name is the survey filename with a TXT suffix.
  3. If you are creating a matched translation, specify the Translation Language (the language that your text will be translated into) and the name of the file where the list of existing translation texts will be saved. Ensure that this is a different file name to the reference language file name.

Setting the export options

  1. Select the Omit repeated content box to limit the number of texts in the translation file. This omits duplicates of complete questions, instructions and labels (such as “Other”).
  2. Clear the Omit undefined translations, if available. Use this when you are exporting a translated survey for use in translating other surveys.
  3. Select the Omit defined translations if you are creating a single file. This leaves out already translated phrases. If you are not sure about your existing translations, clear this box to translate all the survey text.
  4. Click Start to start the export. When the export completes, you will see a translation report. You can save this to a file or print it by clicking the Send To button.

The post Exporting the source file for translation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Translation wizard https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/translation-wizard/ Tue, 21 May 2024 16:38:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11884 The translation wizard helps you to create multi-lingual surveys. You can export text from the questionnaire for translation. When the translation is available, you can import the file containing the translated text to the survey. If you have a translated file, you can import it into any survey that contains the original text. You can also use a SurveyPak as […]

The post Translation wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The translation wizard helps you to create multi-lingual surveys. You can export text from the questionnaire for translation. When the translation is available, you can import the file containing the translated text to the survey. If you have a translated file, you can import it into any survey that contains the original text.

You can also use a SurveyPak as a source for your translations, so that a survey can include any translation text in the SurveyPak.

Prepare External TranslationCreate a file containing the pieces of text from the survey that you wish to translate.
Apply External TranslationImport translations from files in the correct format. This can be from a matched file export from another survey, or by a translation service working on a previously exported file.
Translate From ReferenceUse an open SurveyPak as a source for translation. If the same question exists in the SurveyPak and has been translated, you can import the translation from the SurveyPak.

The post Translation wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: Online email invitations https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-online-email-invitations/ Tue, 21 May 2024 15:59:39 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11873 This page is available if you have chosen to send email invitations for an online survey, using the database link wizard. This happens when you have Email invitations and reminders Email address field The database field that stores the participants’ email addresses. Font formatting Choose the font type, size, format and colour for the selected text […]

The post Database link wizard: Online email invitations appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This page is available if you have chosen to send email invitations for an online survey, using the database link wizard. This happens when you have

  • selected the send email invitations option
  • selected the login participants with email invitations options

Email invitations and reminders

Email address fieldThe database field that stores the participants’ email addresses.
Font formattingChoose the font type, size, format and colour for the selected text in the Invitation or Reminder.
Email subject and textEnter your email subject in the top pane and the message in the lower field.
InsertEnter an HTML field, the survey location, a field from the database containing information specific to the participant or a survey opt out link. The survey location link is mandatory.
InvitationEnter the email invitation text and insert any fields required, including the survey location, which is mandatory.
ReminderEnter the email reminder text. By default, this is the same as the Invitation text. The survey location link is mandatory.
Automatically log into surveyThe link to the survey location automatically logs in the participant, and they do not need to enter their login details.
Show a login pageThe participant must enter their login details before they can start the questionnaire. The Participant paradata variable identifies the participant when they click the link.
Use HTML emailsSelect this option if you want to use HTML in your emails. Clear this option to send plain text emails.

The post Database link wizard: Online email invitations appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Editions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/editions/ Thu, 09 May 2024 12:19:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11847 The Editions and Style Templates dialog contains information about the different editions in the questionnaire. Edition list Check the box by an edition to include it when you publish your questionnaire, uncheck the box to remove it. New Create a new output edition. Questionnaire has same structure and text but different properties Language Open the […]

The post Editions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Editions and Style Templates dialog contains information about the different editions in the questionnaire.

Editions and Style Templates
Edition listCheck the box by an edition to include it when you publish your questionnaire, uncheck the box to remove it.
NewCreate a new output edition. Questionnaire has same structure and text but different properties
LanguageOpen the languages dialog to create a new language edition (one per output edition). Questionnaire can have different text but same structure and properties
DeleteDelete selected edition. This is only available if survey has never been published.
RenameChange the name of the selected edition (you cannot change the language tag)
LoadLoad one of the style templates (.qsf file) supplied with Snap according to which boxes are checked
SaveSave the current questionnaire styles to a template file.
CopyCopy the current styles to the Clipboard. This is often used to transfer styles between surveys.
PastePaste styles from the Clipboard.
Page setupCheck to use portrait/landscape, page size etc
ColoursCheck to load the colours of questions/backgrounds and images
LayoutLoad the question styles and the layout (number of columns and width of margins etc.)

Adding an edition

  1. With the Questionnaire window open, click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog box.
  2. The dialog will display any editions of the questionnaire that currently exist.
  3. Select New from the Edition area of the screen. A New Survey Edition dialog box will display.
Creating a new edition
  1. Enter an edition name to appear on the edition tab that identifies this edition. You must choose a name that is unique in the questionnaire.
  2. Select the publication medium details from the drop-down list. The choices are Snap OnlinePaper and Scanning.
  3. Select which current edition to copy styles from, or select a template to load styles from.
  4. Click OK.
  5. The editions list shows the new edition of the questionnaire.
  6. Click OK to return to the Questionnaire window.
  7. You can toggle between the various editions by
    • clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the screen
    • using Alt +PageUp and Alt +PageDown to switch between the tabs
Tabs used to switch to a different edition
  1. If you have multiple languages in your questionnaire, the new edition will include a tab for each language.

Deleting an edition

  1. You can only delete editions from unpublished questionnaires. You cannot remove any editions after publishing the questionnaire.
  2. Open the Questionnaire window.
  3. Click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
  4. Select the edition you wish to delete and click Delete.
  5. This displays a message to confirm that you want to delete. Click Yes.
  6. Click OK to return to the questionnaire.

Hiding an edition

You can always hide editions. Hidden editions are not visible in the Questionnaire window and they are not part of the published questionnaire.

  1. Click EditionsIcon.png in the Questionnaire window to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
  2. Displayed editions have a check mark in the box next to them. To hide an edition, uncheck the box.
  3. Click OK to return to the questionnaire. The hidden edition(s) will no longer be in the edition tabs at the bottom of the pane.

Renaming an edition

  1. Open the Questionnaire window.
  2. Click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
  3. Select the edition you wish to rename and click Rename.
  4. The Format Name dialog opens displaying the current name. Change the name to the one you require and click OK.
  5. Click OK to return to the questionnaire.

The post Editions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Context menus https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/context-menus/ Wed, 24 Apr 2024 14:17:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11780 Clicking the right mouse button in the Questionnaire window displays a context menu; a menu of commands that are relevant to your current position and selection. All the commands on it can be accessed in other ways, but this may be a faster way of finding them. The menu that appears will vary depending on the current mode […]

The post Context menus appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Clicking the right mouse button in the Questionnaire window displays a context menu; a menu of commands that are relevant to your current position and selection. All the commands on it can be accessed in other ways, but this may be a faster way of finding them.

The menu that appears will vary depending on the current mode (DesignStyle or Data View) and on what is selected. Each mode has its own standard menu that will appear in most cases, but in two of the modes (Design and Style) a shortened version will appear if one or more entire questions are highlighted.

Styles menu

Menu ItemDescription
StylesOpens the Style Picker (in Design mode) or Style Organiser (in Style mode).
Style ModeSwitches to Style mode.
Design ModeSwitches to Design mode.
Data ViewSwitches to Data View mode.

Edit menu

Menu ItemDescription
EditOpens a sub-menu choice of CutCopyPaste or Delete.
CutCuts the current selection to the clipboard.
CopyCopies the current selection to the clipboard.
PastePastes the current selection from the clipboard.
DeleteDeletes the current selection.
Select AllSelects all the questions.

Properties menu

Menu ItemDescription
Variable PropertiesOpens the Variables Properties dialog.
Routing RulesOpens the Routing Rules dialog.
Background ImageOpens the Picture dialog.
Expand all drop downsIn online questionnaires containing one or more drop-down questions, this setting opens or closes the answer lists.
Hide VariablesConceal the selected questions.
ResponseSet the response type for the selected question(s), which can be single, multiple, quantity, literal, date, time or none.
Character FormatOpens a sub-menu choice containing the options Font, BoldItalic or Underline. Font opens the Font dialog, the other options apply that character format.
InsertInsert answers from a previous question, such as, survey fields, images, audio or video files, or links. Opens a sub-menu containing the items ImageVariable FieldResponse Property, Survey FieldHTML Field, Media Field and Page Timer, which open the appropriate dialog.
BreakInsert a Page BreakColumn Break or Section Break.
ToolsOpens a sub-menu containing the items RenumberSpell Check, and Editions Templates, which opens the Editions and Style Templates dialog.

The post Context menus appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Editing buttons and keyboard shortcuts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/editing-buttons-and-keyboard-shortcuts/ Wed, 24 Apr 2024 10:29:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11778 Navigating around the questionnaire Action Commands Move question below Page Down Move question above Page Up Move to the first question Ctrl + Home Move to the last question Ctrl + End Move down a line Down cursor key Move up a line Up cursor key Move one character left or right Left or Right […]

The post Editing buttons and keyboard shortcuts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Navigating around the questionnaire
ActionCommands
Move question belowPage Down
Move question abovePage Up
Move to the first questionCtrl + Home
Move to the last questionCtrl + End
Move down a lineDown Arrow Down cursor key
Move up a lineImage: Up Arrow Up cursor key
Move one character left or rightImage: Left Arrow Left or Image: Right Arrow Right cursor key
Move one word left or rightCtrl + Image: Left Arrow Left cursor key or Ctrl + Image: Right Arrow Right cursor key

Editing questions

ActionCommands
Add a new questionMove the cursor to the required location. Press Enter to create a new question after the current one.
Click New button to insert a new question before the current one.
Alternatively, use the menu option Edit | New or Ctrl + N.
Add a new part of a questionAt the end of a Multi Choice, use Ctrl + Enter to add an Other style question, or to create a Grid Next after a Grid First, or Open Next after Open First.
Delete a questionDelete button will delete the question currently highlighted.
Clone a questionClone button will copy the currently highlighted question and insert it immediately after the current question.
Alternatively, use the menu option Edit | Clone or Ctrl + O.
Move a questionUse CtrlImage: Up Arrow and Down Arrow to move a question up and down within the questionnaire.
Add new codesMove the cursor to the required location in the list of codes and press Tab.
Delete existing codesUse Ctrl + Y to remove the entire code. Alternatively, use the Backspace key or Delete key to remove a character at a time.
Change box sizeUse Ctrl+ + on the numeric keypad to increase the size of the box and Ctrl + to decrease the size of the box for Open Ended questions.

Adding breaks

ActionCommands
Add a new lineMove the cursor to the required place in the text. Use Shift + Enter to force a new line.
Add a page breakHighlight a question and press Ctrl + Shift + B and a  will appear above the current question. Press Ctrl + Shift + B again to remove the page break.
Add a column breakHighlight a question and press Ctrl + Shift + A and a  will appear above the current question. Press Ctrl + Shift + A again to remove the column break.
Add a section breakNo shortcut available.

Selecting questions

ActionCommands
Selecting consecutive questions/ codesEither drag down with the left mouse button depressed, or use Shift + Down Arrow to select the required questions or codes.
Select allUse Ctrl + A to select the whole questionnaire.

Questionnaire actions

ActionCommands
SaveUse File | Save or Ctrl + S to save your work.
PrintUse File | Print Report or Ctrl + P to show the print preview, where you can print the questionnaire.
Undo the last actionUse Edit | Undo or Ctrl + Z
FindUse Edit | Find or Ctrl + F to open the Find dialog.
Use Edit | Find Next or F3 to find the next item.
Use Edit | Find Previous or Shift + F3 to find the previous item.
Spell CheckUse F9 to open the spell checking dialog
Switch to Design mode (from Style or Data View mode)
Switch to Style mode (from Design mode)
Ctrl + M
Switch to Data View modeCtrl + Shift + D
Variable PropertiesAlt + Enter to open the Variable Properties for the selected question.
Open the Style Picker in Design mode
Open the Style Organiser in Style mode
Ctrl + Shift + S
Publish QuestionnaireUse File | Publish or Ctrl + Shift + W to open the Questionnaire properties for publishing
Editions and Style TemplatesUse File | Editions or Ctrl + Shift + E to open the Editions and Style templates dialog.

The post Editing buttons and keyboard shortcuts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Spell checking your questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/spell-checking-your-questionnaire/ Tue, 23 Apr 2024 16:44:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11776 Spell checking helps improve the quality of your questionnaire by making sure there are no spelling mistakes in the text for titles, instructions, questions and answers. Spell checking the questionnaire text Spelling options You can set the default settings for spell checking in the Spell Checker Options dialog. Click Options in the Spellings dialog or use the Tailor […]

The post Spell checking your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Spell checking helps improve the quality of your questionnaire by making sure there are no spelling mistakes in the text for titles, instructions, questions and answers.

Spell checking the questionnaire text

  1. With the Questionnaire window open, click SpellCheckIcon.png to start a spell check. The spell check searches the entire questionnaire from the current editing position of the cursor.
  2. When the spell check identifies an incorrect spelling, you will see the word in the Change to field. The Suggestions list shows a list of alternative spellings that you can choose from.
    • Click Ignore to leave a word unaltered.
    • Click Ignore All to skip all occurrences of that word.
    • Select Change to put the text in the Change to: box into the text of the questionnaire.
    • Select Change All to change all occurrences of that word to the new spelling.
Spell checking the questionnaire
  1. At the end of the questionnaire, the spell check automatically restarts at the beginning. The spell check process stops once the entire questionnaire has been checked. It will then display a message showing the number of words checked and replaced.
  2. Click OK to return to the survey.

Spelling options

You can set the default settings for spell checking in the Spell Checker Options dialog. Click Options in the Spellings dialog or use the Tailor | Spelling menu in Snap XMP Desktop to change the spell checker options.

The default setting for spell checking is to ignore both numbers and partial numbers, so that numbers that appear in the questionnaire, such as Q1, Q2A, 100, 1997 are ignored.

The post Spell checking your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Zoom https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/zoom/ Tue, 23 Apr 2024 14:44:16 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11774 The displayed size of the questionnaire can be changed by using the Zoom button  on the Questionnaire toolbar. You can choose to zoom in, with a larger value, to get a more detailed view of questions and graphics in your questionnaire. By choosing a smaller value, you can see an overview of the questionnaire layout, showing more questions at a […]

The post Zoom appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The displayed size of the questionnaire can be changed by using the Zoom button ZoomIcon.png on the Questionnaire toolbar. You can choose to zoom in, with a larger value, to get a more detailed view of questions and graphics in your questionnaire. By choosing a smaller value, you can see an overview of the questionnaire layout, showing more questions at a reduced size.

This only affects the appearance on the screen. It does not alter the look of the questionnaire when printed or viewed online. The Zoom setting resets when you close the Questionnaire window. The questionnaire always opens with zoom set to 100%.

  1. Click the Zoom button ZoomIcon.png on the toolbar and this shows a drop-down list of options, from 25% up to 400%.
  2. Choose a larger value to zoom in to get a close-up view of your questionnaire.
  3. Choose a smaller value to zoom out to make more questions visible but at a reduced size.
  4. Alternatively you can type in any value between 25% and 400% to display the zoom setting you want.

The post Zoom appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Questionnaire toolbar https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/questionnaire-toolbar/ Tue, 23 Apr 2024 14:30:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11768 The Questionnaire window allows you to specify the layout and structure of your questionnaire. Button and menu options Button Menu option Alternative Description Switch to Design mode. Ctrl + M Switch to Style mode. Ctrl + Shift + D Switch to Data View mode. Edit | New Ctrl + N Create a new question. The […]

The post Questionnaire toolbar appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Questionnaire window allows you to specify the layout and structure of your questionnaire.

Button and menu options

ButtonMenu optionAlternativeDescription
DesignModeIcon.pngSwitch to Design mode.
StyleModeIcon.pngCtrl + MSwitch to Style mode.
DataModeIcon.pngCtrl + Shift + DSwitch to Data View mode.
NewSurveyIcon.pngEdit | NewCtrl + NCreate a new question. The name of the question must be unique within a survey. Digits and stops are allowed, e.g. Q1, Q1.1, Q1a
CloneSurveyIcon.pngEdit | CloneCtrl + OClone the existing question to create a new question with a different name.
DeleteSurveyIcon.pngEdit | DeleteDeleteDelete the current question.
UndoIcon.pngEdit | UndoCtrl + ZUndo the last action.
RedoIcon.pngEdit | RedoRedo the last action.
SaveIcon.pngFile | SaveSave the questionnaire but keeps the Questionnaire window open. This is only active once you have made changes.
VariablePropsIcon.pngOpens the Variable Properties dialog, where you can change the property values for the selected variable.
StylePickerIcon.pngOpens the Style Picker dialog, where you can select a style to apply to a question.
RoutingIcon.pngOpens the Routing Rules dialog, where you can create routing rules.
RenumberIcon.pngRenumber the questionnaire. Double-click to switch on auto-renumbering. Single-click to return to manual mode.
Questionnaire properties buttonFile | Page SetupQuestionnaire Properties. Options available depend on the edition of the questionnaire.
EditionsIcon.pngFile | EditionsEditions and Style Templates assigns a Format or Language or saves a template of the current questionnaire layout.
PrintPreviewIcon.pngFile |Print ReportCtrl + PProduce a print preview of the questionnaire with the option to print a copy.
SpellCheckIcon.pngEdit | Spell checkF9Spell checks the questionnaire.
ZoomIcon.pngZoom in or out to change the size of the questionnaire on the screen.
Define external questionnaireDefine scanning. This button is only displayed if the scanning module is installed and a scanning questionnaire is being designed.

The post Questionnaire toolbar appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Style Templates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/style-templates/ Wed, 27 Mar 2024 14:12:29 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11741 You can design a questionnaire using existing styles and then apply a Style Template that represents a particular branding in terms of page set-up, colours and layout. Snap XMP Desktop comes with a number of style templates. These provide a range of alternative layouts and colour schemes. You can also create your own style templates from questionnaires. Loading […]

The post Style Templates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can design a questionnaire using existing styles and then apply a Style Template that represents a particular branding in terms of page set-up, colours and layout.

Snap XMP Desktop comes with a number of style templates. These provide a range of alternative layouts and colour schemes. You can also create your own style templates from questionnaires.

Loading a style template

  1. With the Questionnaire window open, click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
Editions and Style Templates
  1. The three tick box fields relate to Page Setup (portrait/landscape etc.), Colours (the individual colors for the background of the questionnaire and the color of all the fonts used in the text of the question and the code labels) and Layout (the arrangement and format of individual styles of questions). If you select all three options, this loads all parts of the style template.
  2. Click Load in the Style Template area.
  3. Select one of the style template files, with extension QSF, from the list and press Open to load the template in to the questionnaire. This updates the questions using the new style settings. Save the questionnaire to save the new layout/colors as well.

Saving a template

If you make changes to the styles, you can save them as a template for re-use in other surveys.

You can only save named styles (not like styles) which you have saved in the Style Organiser in Style mode.

  1. Click StyleModeIcon.png to change to Style mode.
  2. Click StylePickerIcon.png to display the Style Organiser dialog.
Style Organiser dialog
  1. Convert any new like styles into full styles by clicking the Properties button and renaming the style. Click OK to save the style.
Style Properties dialog
  1. Click EditionsIcon.png to display the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
Editions and Style Templates
  1. Select the Page setup, Colours and Layout boxes to specify which attributes to save in the style template. You will need to check the Layout box to store the new styles.
  2. Click Save.
  3. Enter the file name of the style template. The style template files have the extension QSF. Click Save to save the style template. The new template will now be available to other Snap XMP questionnaires.

The post Style Templates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Adding headers and footers to a paper questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-headers-and-footers-to-a-paper-questionnaire/ Thu, 21 Mar 2024 13:33:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11735 You can add additional text and graphics to the header and footer of the first page and, optionally, all subsequent pages.

The post Adding headers and footers to a paper questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can add additional text and graphics to the header and footer of the first page and, optionally, all subsequent pages.

  1. Click QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to display the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
  2. Select the Page section.
  3. Click the Header/Footer button to display a Headers/Footers dialog.
Inserting headers and footers for the questionnaire pages
  1. Check the relevant boxes to specify whether the headers and footers are to appear on the first page and/or subsequent pages.
  2. The header and footer each consist of the three areas (left, centre and right). The header/footer may contain:
    • free format text
    • images
    • variable fields
    • survey fields
    • date and time of printing or publication
  3. To insert a field click Insert and choose from Image, Variable Field, Survey Field or Date/Time Field from the menu. You can also select a Survey Field from the drop-down list in the top left corner in the dialog toolbar.
  4. The contents can be formatted using the format buttons and fields at the top of the dialog to set the font name, size, style and color. The justification is fixed for each area.

The post Adding headers and footers to a paper questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Saving your questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/saving-your-questionnaire-2/ Thu, 21 Mar 2024 10:55:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11724 As you create your questionnaire, make sure that you save your questions and other changes regularly. When closing the Questionnaire window by clicking on  in the top right corner of the window, you will be asked if you wish to save the changes to the questionnaire.

The post Saving your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
As you create your questionnaire, make sure that you save your questions and other changes regularly.

  • Click Save SaveIcon.png on the Questionnaire window toolbar to save changes to the questionnaire.
  • You can also select the File|Save menu to save any changes to the questionnaire.

When closing the Questionnaire window by clicking on https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/409.bmp in the top right corner of the window, you will be asked if you wish to save the changes to the questionnaire.

  • Click Yes to save the current changes.
  • Click No to close the Questionnaire window and abandon any changes made.
  • Click Cancel to return to the Questionnaire window.

The post Saving your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Response types https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/response-types/ Thu, 21 Mar 2024 10:54:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11722 You can set the type of response required from the respondent for some of the question styles. No response These styles are used to give information. They provide the title, instructions and notes in your questionnaire. Select a response Respondents can select one or more pre-defined answers. These types of questions are also known as […]

The post Response types appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can set the type of response required from the respondent for some of the question styles.

No response

These styles are used to give information. They provide the title, instructions and notes in your questionnaire.

Select a response

Respondents can select one or more pre-defined answers. These types of questions are also known as closed or coded questions, as the respondent must select one or more question codes as their answer.

They can appear as drop-downs, grids, interactive images, sliders and semantic scales.

Examples can include

  • a single choice question asking what age range the respondent is in
  • a grid of questions asking respondents to rate different aspects of a service

Open response

Respondents can enter responses in their own words, often in a comment box. The data can be free format text, a quantity, date or time. When you need the response to match a specific format, you can use a pattern to define the expected format, for example, a phone number or zip code.

The post Response types appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Assigning a question code to an area https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/assigning-a-question-code-to-an-area/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 17:32:12 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11705 When you assign a code to an area, this creates a link between the area and code so that when the respondent clicks the area this is equivalent to selecting the question code as their response. To make the area inactive, click unassign to remove the assigned code from the selected shape. You can attach […]

The post Assigning a question code to an area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
When you assign a code to an area, this creates a link between the area and code so that when the respondent clicks the area this is equivalent to selecting the question code as their response.

  1. Open the Map Control Editor on the Designer tab.
  2. Select the area(s) to associate with the code. You can select multiple areas using Ctrl + click.
  3. Either right-click and select Assign to Code|variable code or select Shape | Assign to Code | variable code.
  1. When you have associated an area with a code, the code appears below the image when the area is selected.

To make the area inactive, click unassign to remove the assigned code from the selected shape.

You can attach the same image codes to multiple areas. This means when any of the areas is clicked or has the mouse go over it, all the areas associated with that code will appear according to the changes you have applied.

The post Assigning a question code to an area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Copying a format in the Map Control Editor https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/copying-a-format-in-the-map-control-editor/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 17:21:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11703 When you have created a format for an area, you can copy it to another area using the Format painter. If you would like to apply the same format to multiple areas, double click the Format painter before you apply it to an area. Click the button again to exit this mode.

The post Copying a format in the Map Control Editor appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
When you have created a format for an area, you can copy it to another area using the Format painter.

  1. Select the area that has the applied format that you want.
  2. Click the Format painter button IM: format painter.
  3. Click the area you would like to apply the format to. The filter, brightness, contrast and pen settings will all be copied to the selected area.

If you would like to apply the same format to multiple areas, double click the Format painter before you apply it to an area. Click the button again to exit this mode.

The post Copying a format in the Map Control Editor appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Change the way an area looks in the Map Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/change-the-way-an-area-looks-in-the-map-control/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 17:18:00 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11676 You can change the way an area looks when it is clicked on. You can add a filter to change the way the image appears, add an outline, and change the contrast or brightness of the area. These are available in the Map Control Editor from the Designer tab toolbar and the Shape menu. Fill […]

The post Change the way an area looks in the Map Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can change the way an area looks when it is clicked on. You can add a filter to change the way the image appears, add an outline, and change the contrast or brightness of the area.

These are available in the Map Control Editor from the Designer tab toolbar and the Shape menu.

Fill IM: Fill button Fill the area with the selected colour.
Color filter IM; colour filter button View the picture through a lens of the selected colour.
Grayscale IM: grayscale button Change the area from colour to grey.
Invert colors Reverse the red, green and blue colour in the area.
Blur IM: blur button Blur the selected area.
Oil painting effect IM: oil painting button Speckle the selected area.
Emboss IM: emboss button Make dark patches indented and light patches raised.
Edge detect Emphasize edges and simplify plain areas.
Clear filters Remove any of the effects above.
Brightness/ Contrast IM: brightness contrast button Increase or decrease the brightness or contrast of the selected area. This may be combined with any of the filters above.
Pen IM: pen button Specify the colour and thickness of the area outline, and whether it is displayed. This may be combined with any of the effects above.

The post Change the way an area looks in the Map Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Editing the clickable area https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/editing-the-clickable-area/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 17:09:11 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11673 You can convert shapes from one type to another. If you have a polygon, you can also add and remove points from the polygon to change its shape. Drawing precisely To draw more accurately use the Zoom tool on the bar to change your view of the picture. Changing the shape type Deleting a shape Moving the […]

The post Editing the clickable area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can convert shapes from one type to another. If you have a polygon, you can also add and remove points from the polygon to change its shape.

Drawing precisely

To draw more accurately use the Zoom tool on the bar to change your view of the picture.

Changing the shape type

  1. Select the area by clicking it.
  2. Right-click the area, click Shape Type and select a new shape from the context menu. You can also select the new type from the Shape|Type sub-menu.

Deleting a shape

  1. Select the area by clicking it.
  2. Right-click the area, click Delete Shape.

Moving the selected area

You can move a selected area by dragging it with the mouse or by moving it with the cursor keys [] [] [] []. To move a pixel at a time, use the [Ctrl] key with the cursor keys.

Rotating a polygon

You can rotate the polygon when it is complete.

Combining shapes

You can assign more than one area to the same image code. This will have the effect of grouping the areas, and all the areas will be highlighted if the respondent clicks or puts their mouse over one of them.

Using layers

You can create complicated shapes by layering shapes on top of one another. Either by using inactive shapes, or by using grouped shapes (several shapes linked to one code). The topmost shapes are always the ones which are used if a respondent clicks on them. You can change which shape is on top by using the Shape|Bring to front or Shape | Send to back  commands.

The post Editing the clickable area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Defining the clickable area https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/defining-the-clickable-area/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 16:56:27 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11668 When you have imported the image, you need to define the areas that you want to associate with the questions codes. You define the clickable areas of the map control in the Designer tab of the Map Control Editor. Set the pen style After loading the map control or image, the default pen style is […]

The post Defining the clickable area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
When you have imported the image, you need to define the areas that you want to associate with the questions codes.

You define the clickable areas of the map control in the Designer tab of the Map Control Editor.

Set the pen style

After loading the map control or image, the default pen style is a 2 pixel wide yellow line.

You can change the pen style, by clicking the Pen icon IM: pen button or selecting Shape | Format | Outline pen. This opens the Edit Outline dialog where you can set the colour and width of the pen style.

Choose the shape

Next, choose the type of shape to draw the outline. You can

  • Click the appropriate toolbar button.
  • Select the shape from the Tools menu.

If you want to draw several areas of the same shape type, double-click the toolbar shape icon. Click a shape icon again to go back to normal mode.

Define the clickable area

If you are drawing a regular shape, click and drag to create it.

If you are drawing a polygon, click at each point of the shape you wish to create before moving to the next point. Right-click to close the polygon. You can rotate the polygon when it is complete.

The post Defining the clickable area appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Resize the Map Control for different screen sizes https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/resize-the-map-control-for-different-screen-sizes/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 15:05:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11664 You can resize a map control to make them suitable for smaller or larger screens. In the Map Control Editor, enter a new percentage value in Size or use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the size. The map resizes to the new percentage size. For example, 100% is the default size […]

The post Resize the Map Control for different screen sizes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can resize a map control to make them suitable for smaller or larger screens.

In the Map Control Editor, enter a new percentage value in Size or use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the size.

The map resizes to the new percentage size. For example, 100% is the default size when the image or map control loads. When the size is set to 50 %, this resizes to 50% of the original size.

Map Control Resize

Click OK to save the map control.

Use Zoom if you want to see the image in more detail without changing the size of the image in the map control.

The post Resize the Map Control for different screen sizes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Save your Map Control to use again https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/save-your-map-control-to-use-again/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 14:54:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11662 You can save your Map Control so that you can use it in other surveys and other editions.

The post Save your Map Control to use again appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can save your Map Control so that you can use it in other surveys and other editions.

  1. In the Map Control Editor, select File | Save map control
  2. Browse to the folder location where the map control will be saved.
  3. Enter a name to identify the Map Control file.
  4. Click Save to save the map control.

The post Save your Map Control to use again appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Importing a map control image https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/importing-a-map-control-image/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 13:26:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11648 First, you need to load an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following: Snap Surveys provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use. Loading an existing Map Control Snap XMP comes with a number of map control files, including numbers, […]

The post Importing a map control image appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
First, you need to load an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following:

  • Snap XMP map control
  • image
  • HTML image map

Snap Surveys provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use.

Loading an existing Map Control

Snap XMP comes with a number of map control files, including numbers, stars, smileys, and UK and US maps. Your organisation may also have their own map control files, which have been created using the Map Control Editor.

  1. Double click the Map Control to open the Map Control Editor.
  2. Select File|Load map control.
  3. Browse for the saved map control file, which use the file extension ISF.
  4. Click Open to load the map control, including the image, formatting and default codes.
  5. You can now edit the map control and save it for future use.

Importing an HTML map

If you already have map files that have been created in the HTML format, you can import these, together with the associated image, and then associate the pre-defined areas with variable codes.

  1. Double click the Map Control to open the Map Control Editor.
  2. Select File|Import HTML map.
  3. Browse for the file containing the HTML image map, which use the extensions HTML and HTM.
  4. Click Open to load the HTML image map. If there are multiple maps in the file, the Map Control Editor loads the first one.
  5. You need to edit the map control by assigning codes and defining the areas to change on selection.
  6. You can save this as a Snap XMP map control for future use.

Importing an image

You can create a Map Control using an image with a supported format; jpg, bmp, png or gif.

  1. Double click the Map Control to open the Map Control Editor.
  2. Select File|Import image.
  3. Browse for the image that you wish to use as a basis for your map.
  4. Click Open to load the image.
  5. You need to edit the map control by assigning codes, formatting and defining the areas to change on selection.
  6. You can save this as a Snap XMP map control for future use.

The post Importing a map control image appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Map Control Editor https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 13:25:54 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11639 The Map Control Editor lets you design and preview a Map Control. The Designer tab contains the tools to load and edit a map control or image. The Preview tab lets you test the map control. First, you need to load a map control or an image into the map control. The image used for […]

The post Map Control Editor appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Map Control Editor lets you design and preview a Map Control.

The Designer tab contains the tools to load and edit a map control or image. The Preview tab lets you test the map control.

First, you need to load a map control or an image into the map control. The image used for the map control can be one of the following:

  • Snap XMP map control
  • image
  • HTML image map

After you have loaded the images into the map control, you are able to

The post Map Control Editor appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Using a Map Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-a-map-control/ Tue, 19 Mar 2024 11:49:34 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11633 In online questionnaires, you can make the survey more interesting by converting single or multi-response questions to images. The respondents click on one of the images to answer the question. Snap XMP uses Map Controls to add this feature. With a Map Control each image or part of an image represents a choice. When the […]

The post Using a Map Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
In online questionnaires, you can make the survey more interesting by converting single or multi-response questions to images. The respondents click on one of the images to answer the question.

Snap XMP uses Map Controls to add this feature. With a Map Control each image or part of an image represents a choice. When the respondent clicks on one this highlights the image, showing their response.

You can customise the Map Control by

  • defining the areas to click on
  • defining how the areas map to the question codes
  • setting the type of highlighting

Converting a question to a map control

  1. Open the questionnaire in Design mode.
  2. Select the single or multi-response question that you wish to convert.
  3. Select Show in the toolbar topic list.
  1. Select As Map Control in the next list and check the box.
  1. The question layout changes to a grey box with the text “Double-click to define Map Control”
  2. Click the Map control button on the toolbar or double-click the grey block to open the Map Control Editor window to define your clickable picture.

The codes in the selected question will be loaded into the Map Control Editor so you can associate them with defined areas of the image.

Removing a map control

You can remove a map control from a question.

  1. Select your Map Control question.
  2. Select the Show toolbar topic.
  3. Select As Map Control.
  4. Clear the Show box to revert to the original question style.
Show the Map Control as a Single Choice question

The post Using a Map Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Extracting graphics from a Slider Control template https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/extracting-graphics-from-a-slider-control-template/ Mon, 18 Mar 2024 17:21:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11623 If you want to create your own Slider Control but wish to make it look like one of the template Slider Controls, you can extract the graphics from the template.

The post Extracting graphics from a Slider Control template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
If you want to create your own Slider Control but wish to make it look like one of the template Slider Controls, you can extract the graphics from the template.

  1. Open the Slider Control wizard. This displays the available Slider Control templates. If the one you want is not visible, press the Browse button to find the folder containing it.
Slider Control wizard
  1. Select the Slider Control template with graphics that you wish to use.
  2. Click Extract. A Browse for Folder dialog appears.
  3. Select the folder where you wish to save the graphics, or create a new folder and click OK.
  4. This displays a message box showing whether extraction was successful. You will see the extracted graphic files.

The post Extracting graphics from a Slider Control template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Slider Control for quantity questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/slider-control-for-quantity-questions/ Mon, 18 Mar 2024 17:20:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11621 You can convert a quantity question to a Slider Control. Respondents can drag the slider along the bar to show a given quantity. The Slider Controls for quantity questions are very similar to those used for single-response questions, but they do not have the associated graphics for each code point. Instead, you need to supply […]

The post Slider Control for quantity questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can convert a quantity question to a Slider Control. Respondents can drag the slider along the bar to show a given quantity.

The Slider Controls for quantity questions are very similar to those used for single-response questions, but they do not have the associated graphics for each code point. Instead, you need to supply a range of values for the quantity. You can either display a code box so that respondents can type in a numeric value, or display the draggable Slider Control.

Using a template Slider Control

  1. In the Questionnaire window, select the quantity question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The Questionnaire window changes to display a grey box for the question. If a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question the selected Slider Control is displayed.
  3. Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. The existing slider bar templates will be displayed. The default templates show five code positions.
  4. Select the one with the bar you wish to use. It will appear in preview, allowing you to move the slider to see how it displays at different settings.

The associated code graphics shown in the template window do not appear for quantity questions. They are only available for coded questions. Instead, you have a code box for respondents to enter their value.

If you wish to change the code box visibility and location:

  1. Select Advanced.
  2. Click Next until you get to the Code labels/ response box page.
  3. Change Size to the required size of the code box (the proportion of space the box uses)
  4. Change Horizontal space to change the distance from the left edge that the response box appears.
Settings for a quantity slider control
  1. Click Finish.

Creating a new Slider Control

  1. In the Questionnaire window, select the quantity question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The Questionnaire window changes to display a grey box for the question. If a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question the selected Slider Control is displayed.
  3. Double click the grey area to open the Slider Control wizard. The existing Slider Control templates will be displayed. The default templates show five code positions, but this will be changed to fit the number of codes that exist in your question.
  4. Click Advanced without selecting a template. You are taken to the Bar section.
  5. Click Browse to find an image to use as the bar for your Slider Control.
Setting the bar properties for a quantity slider control
  1. If the image is greyscale, you can change the color by using the Colourize button.
  2. Click Next to go to the scale marker page. These mark divisions on the bar. You can ignore these for a quantity slider.
  3. Click Next to choose an image to use for the slider that respondents drag or stretch across the bar.
  4. Click Next to set how the Slider Control behaves. Clear the Use steps box so the respondent can position the slider wherever they like on the bar.
Setting the scale properties for a quantity slider control
  1. Click Next to set the maximum and minimum values respondents can enter. You can also set the position of the code box to type in a response and the direction the slider travels in.
Settings for a quantity slider control
  1. When you have made all the changes, click Finish. You have the options to save your Slider Control as a template. Slider Control tempate files have the SLD extension and contain all the images to create the Slider Control.

The post Slider Control for quantity questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Slider Control for single-response questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/slider-control-for-single-response-questions/ Mon, 18 Mar 2024 17:19:30 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11619 You can use a Slider Control with single response questions. Respondents drag the slider to the position representing their response. Using a Slider Control template Creating a new Slider Control Changing the number of points If you have created a question with a Slider Control and then realise that you need to add more points […]

The post Slider Control for single-response questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can use a Slider Control with single response questions. Respondents drag the slider to the position representing their response.

Using a Slider Control template

  1. In the Questionnaire window, select the single response question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The question changes to a grey box for the question. If a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question, that Slider Control is shown.
  3. Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. This shows the available Slider Control templates. The default templates have five code positions, but change to fit the number of codes in your question.
Slider Control wizard
  1. Select the one you wish to use. It will appear in preview, allowing you to move the slider to show how the template looks at different settings.
Previewing the slider control
  1. When you have the Slider Control you want, click OK.

Creating a new Slider Control

  1. In the questionnaire window, select the single-response question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  2. Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The questionnaire window changes to display a grey area for the question.
  3. Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. This displays the existing Slider Control templates.
Slider Control wizard
  1. Click Advanced without selecting a template. This displays the Points on slider page. This is where you can choose an image to go with each point on your Slider Control.
Set the point labels using the Slider Control wizard
  1. Click the Browse button to browse for an image for that point. If the image is greyscale, you can change its colour by using the colourize button.
Insert slider image
  1. Repeat this for each point.
Setting the images for a slider control
  1. Click Next to choose an image for the bar. You can specify the position of the bar image.
Setting the bar properties for a slider control
  1. Click Next to choose an image to use as a scale marker between codes.
  2. Click Next to choose an image to use for the slider that respondents drag or stretch across the bar.
  3. Click Next to set how the slider behaves. Select the Use steps box if you want the slider to jump between points, clear it if you want the respondent to be able to position it anywhere on the slider.
Setting the scale properties for a slider control
  1. Click Next to set how the point graphics behave. This step allows you to change which direction the slider travels in, and where the graphics appear.
Settings for a slider control
  1. When you have the slider you want, click Finish. This asks if you wish to save your Slider Control as a style. The file is saved with the .sld extension and contains all the images to create the Slider Control.

Changing the number of points

If you have created a question with a Slider Control and then realise that you need to add more points to it, you must do this.

  1. Select the question in the Questionnaire window.
  2. Click StyleModeIcon.png on the toolbar to change to Style mode.
  3. Click the Slider Control button on the toolbar to open the Slider Control wizard.
  4. Click the Advanced button on the Slider Control wizard. There will be extra SBW: add point and SBW: Remove point buttons, allowing you to add and remove codes in the slider style.
Slider Control wizard

The post Slider Control for single-response questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: Variable mapping https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-variable-mapping/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 10:02:56 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11476 The variable mapping dialog allows you to specify which database field maps to a Snap variable. If you are mapping a database field to a single or multi-response variable in Snap you can seed data directly into one or more codes. This is shown in the picture above. When a multi-response variable is selected, the […]

The post Database link wizard: Variable mapping appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The variable mapping dialog allows you to specify which database field maps to a Snap variable. If you are mapping a database field to a single or multi-response variable in Snap you can seed data directly into one or more codes. This is shown in the picture above. When a multi-response variable is selected, the available codes appear in the lower pane.

The questionnaire seeding page is displayed if you have selected Import from or Export to a database. It is also shown if you have selected Seed database data into questionnaires when setting up the options for online surveys.

Instructions to map variables

  1. To seed (transfer) data from a database field to a question variable in the survey, click in the area to the right of the field and select the survey variable from the drop-down list.

  1. Single and multiple-response questions in Snap XMP Desktop have a code for each possible answer. You can seed data directly into one or more codes.
ColumnDescription
Database valuesThe possible values for the selected field in the database.
CountsThe number of cases in the database with the specified value.
Snap code indexThe different possible responses to seed into.
Mapping database fields and field values to the survey variables
  1. Select the code that you wish to seed for a given value of the database field. The example shows different age range fields in the database being seeded into the single-multiple response question Age. If the Age field in the database is set to 2 the age range 25 to 44 will be seeded into the field.
  2. Click Next. You will see a summary of what the database link does.
  3. Enter a name for the link and click Finish.

The post Database link wizard: Variable mapping appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: Setting up email or logins for an online survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-setting-up-email-or-logins-for-an-online-survey/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 10:02:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11474 This page of the wizard contains the email and login options for the survey. You can choose to send email invitations only to the participants, or to use log ins for the participants. Email invitations Select the Send email invitations only option to send an email invitation only to your participants. This does not provide […]

The post Database link wizard: Setting up email or logins for an online survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This page of the wizard contains the email and login options for the survey. You can choose to send email invitations only to the participants, or to use log ins for the participants.

Email invitations

Select the Send email invitations only option to send an email invitation only to your participants. This does not provide tracking options. This requires email addresses to be provided in the participant data. With this option, clicking next opens an email editor, where you can create the email invitation.

Log in participants

Select the Log in participants option to provide the option to track and manage participants in Snap XMP Online. The participant data must contain a field containing unique values to use as the login. You have the option to require a password, send email invitations, seed the questionnaire as well as use group questionnaires.

Email and login settings

Send email invitations onlySelect to go straight to setting up emails, using email addresses from the participant data.
Log in participantSelect to use unique ids from the participant data to log into the survey. Snap XMP uses these to maintain the survey. This tracks the participants in Snap XMP Online for emails, reminders and seeding.
Login fieldSelect a database field containing unique values to use as the login.
Password fieldSelect a database field to use as the password.
Send email invitations and remindersCheck this box to include email invitations. These may include data from the database.
Seed database data into questionnaireCheck this box to pre-load the response for an individual with data from the database. You can only seed data for known respondents, so this box is only available if respondents are logging into the survey.
Group questionnaireUsed if the participant needs to complete multiple versions of a survey for different subjects.
Subject fieldSelect the database field containing the subjects that a participant should use to fill in the survey.
Identify respondents in the response data (‘Respondent’ paradata variable is required)Select to store the respondent login name in the respondent paradata variable when publishing. The Participant paradata variable must be set on in the survey.

The post Database link wizard: Setting up email or logins for an online survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: Database import/export options https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-database-import-export-options/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 10:02:07 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11470 This page appears when you are importing or exporting data between a survey and a database using the database link wizard. Join cases where the link variables match Update the variable data for cases where the specified link variable is matched in the source survey and the import data. Do not import cases where the link variable does […]

The post Database link wizard: Database import/export options appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This page appears when you are importing or exporting data between a survey and a database using the database link wizard.

Join cases where the link variables matchUpdate the variable data for cases where the specified link variable is matched in the source survey and the import data. Do not import cases where the link variable does not match.
Join matching cases and append unmatched casesUpdate the variable data for cases where the specified link variable is matched in the source survey and the import data. Add new cases for each new value of the link variable.
Append unmatched cases onlyDo not update the variable data for cases where the specified link variable is matched in the source survey and the import data. Add new cases for each new value of the link variable.
Append all casesAdd all cases from the import data without checking if they already exist. (Cases may be duplicated but never overwritten.)
Link VariablesSpecify which variables will be used to match cases across the surveys.
Database fieldSelect the field to match to a Snap variable or case number.
Use Snap variableSelect the variable to match on from the drop-down list.
Use Snap case numberUse the Snap case number (system data) to match cases.

The post Database link wizard: Database import/export options appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: Select Database https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-select-database/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 10:01:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11468 The Select Database page is available when you use a database link to import or export data from a database, set up emails for an online survey or connect to a respondent database for a Snap XMP survey. This page allows you to select the database you are linking to, and apply any filters or passwords required. Table […]

The post Database link wizard: Select Database appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Select Database page is available when you use a database link to import or export data from a database, set up emails for an online survey or connect to a respondent database for a Snap XMP survey. This page allows you to select the database you are linking to, and apply any filters or passwords required.

Select the database file or build a database link

Table of fields

Select Database FileOpen a file selection dialog to select the database that you are linking to.
Build Data LinkOpen the Microsoft data link tool to specify the type of database that you wish to link to. This is only required for unrecognised database types.
Advanced SettingsOpen the database link Advanced Settings dialog to specify further details of your database.
Create TableExport only: Add a new table to the selected database on file export. By default, exported cases will be added to the new table.
Select the Table to useSelect the database table from the dropdown list to import from or export to.
Where condition (SQL)Import only: Specify a suitable SQL filter condition to select data from the database. (This expression will depend on the database you are using and the data you wish to import.)

Selecting a database

  1. In the Select Database page, you can select the link to your participants’ data. There are two choices depending on the format in which your data is stored.
    • Click Select Database File and browse to the Excel or MS Access file containing the participants’ data. This needs to include a unique id, such as a username or login id.
    • Click Build Data Link to build a link to an Oracle or SQL Database containing the participants’ data. This needs to include a unique id, such as a username or login id.
  2. The Select the Table to use drop-down automatically displays a table name. If this is not the table you require, select a different table from the list. If you wish to filter the participants so that this survey is only available to some members of the database, set an appropriate filter in the Where condition box. Click Next.
  3. The next step depends on the options required for the survey. Click on the link that matches your required choice and follow the instructions given:
    • Sending email invitations only with the option to seed the email invitation
    • Using logins only with the option to seed the questionnaire
    • Using Logins and sending email invitations with the option to seed both the email invitation and the questionnaire

The post Database link wizard: Select Database appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: Advanced Settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-advanced-settings/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 10:01:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11463 The Advanced Settings dialog is accessed from the Database selection page of the wizard. It specifies how your database is accessed. General The first row is a header row Check this box to ignore the first row in the Excel file. Use Unicoded Literals Used for Excel and Access data sources. User ID and password Enter the details for […]

The post Database link wizard: Advanced Settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Advanced Settings dialog is accessed from the Database selection page of the wizard. It specifies how your database is accessed.

General

The first row is a header rowCheck this box to ignore the first row in the Excel file.
Use Unicoded LiteralsUsed for Excel and Access data sources.
User ID and passwordEnter the details for a password protected database if you wish to access the database automatically, for example, as a Hot Link.

SQL Quotes

This tab enables you to specify how SQL keywords will be quoted. 

Types

Specify the data types used when creating new fields in the database on an export. The default types will be suitable for all standard operations.

The post Database link wizard: Advanced Settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: report https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-report/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 10:00:48 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11460 The report screen displays a summary of the database link that you have created. The information displayed will vary according to the type of link and the variables used in the survey. Name A unique identifier for the database link that will be created. Label You are able to enter a further description, for example, […]

The post Database link wizard: report appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The report screen displays a summary of the database link that you have created. The information displayed will vary according to the type of link and the variables used in the survey.

DL: report screen
Name A unique identifier for the database link that will be created.
Label You are able to enter a further description, for example, to describe the purpose of the database link.

The post Database link wizard: report appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: Import/export options https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-import-export-options/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 10:00:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11457 This page appears when you are importing or exporting data between two Snap XMP surveys using the database link wizard. Join cases where the link variables match Update the variable data for cases where the specified link variable is matched in the source survey and the import data. Do not import cases where the link variable does not […]

The post Database link wizard: Import/export options appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
This page appears when you are importing or exporting data between two Snap XMP surveys using the database link wizard.

Join cases where the link variables match Update the variable data for cases where the specified link variable is matched in the source survey and the import data. Do not import cases where the link variable does not match.
Join matching cases and append unmatched cases Update the variable data for cases where the specified link variable is matched in the source survey and the import data. Add new cases for each new value of the link variable.
Append unmatched cases only Do not update the variable data for cases where the specified link variable is matched in the source survey and the import data. Add new cases for each new value of the link variable.
Append all cases Add all cases from the import data without checking if they already exist. Cases may be duplicated but never overwritten.
Link Variables Specify which variables to match cases across the surveys.
Use Snap variable Select the variable to match on from the drop-down list. You may choose a different variable for each survey.
Use Snap case number Use the Snap case number to match cases.
Filter Enter a filter to import or export a subset of the survey response data.

The post Database link wizard: Import/export options appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard: Snap survey selection https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard-snap-survey-selection/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 10:00:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11454 The survey selection page shows all Snap XMP surveys in the currently selected directory, including information about the data they contain. This page is available when the options Import from Snap Survey or Export to Snap Survey are selected. Offline/Online Choose to view the offline surveys or the online surveys. Browse Browse for the offline […]

The post Database link wizard: Snap survey selection appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The survey selection page shows all Snap XMP surveys in the currently selected directory, including information about the data they contain. This page is available when the options Import from Snap Survey or Export to Snap Survey are selected.

Offline/Online Choose to view the offline surveys or the online surveys.
Browse Browse for the offline survey directory that you wish to use.
Refresh Refresh the list of online surveys available to the Snap XMP account.
Account Change the Snap XMP account that you are using.

The post Database link wizard: Snap survey selection appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database link wizard https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-link-wizard/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:59:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11451 The Database Link wizard allows you to create and modify links to an external database or another Snap XMP survey. Online Invites/Logins/Seeding Create a respondent file from a database that can be uploaded to Snap XMP Online and/or set up email invitations to a Snap XMP Online survey. Import from Database Import data from a database into the survey response data (the […]

The post Database link wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Database Link wizard allows you to create and modify links to an external database or another Snap XMP survey.

Online Invites/Logins/Seeding Create a respondent file from a database that can be uploaded to Snap XMP Online and/or set up email invitations to a Snap XMP Online survey.
Import from Database Import data from a database into the survey response data (the raw data file).
Export to Database Export the raw response data from a survey into a database.
Import from Snap Survey Import response data from a Snap survey, with the ability to cross-map variables if the survey has a different structure.
Export to Snap Survey Export response data to a Snap survey, with the ability to cross-map variables if the survey has a different structure.

The post Database link wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Database links https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/database-links/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:59:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11448 The Database Links dialog allows you to manage and create links to external databases. Existing links This contains a list of the available database link, showing the link name, type of link and whether it is a Hot Link. New Opens the Database Linkage Wizard to create a new data link. Clone Opens the Database […]

The post Database links appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
The Database Links dialog allows you to manage and create links to external databases.

Existing links This contains a list of the available database link, showing the link name, type of link and whether it is a Hot Link.
New Opens the Database Linkage Wizard to create a new data link.
Clone Opens the Database Linkage Wizard with a copy of the selected database link’s details.
Modify Opens the Database Linkage Wizard to edit the selected database link.
Delete Delete the selected database link
Hot Link This type of link automatically updates the survey with information from the selected database link when there is a new response.
Run Run the selected database link, which loads data from the database into the matched survey fields.

The post Database links appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Changing the Map Control variable codes https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor-variable-codes/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:58:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11444 You can change the labels for question codes or add extra codes to a question from the Map Control Editor. Note that these changes are made to the question as well as the Map Control. Changing the variable codes Setting the codes to match the Map Control defaults If you click the Defaults button, all the response […]

The post Changing the Map Control variable codes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can change the labels for question codes or add extra codes to a question from the Map Control Editor. Note that these changes are made to the question as well as the Map Control.

Changing the variable codes

  1. Click the Variable codes VariablesIcon.png button on the Map Control Editor toolbar to open the Variable codes dialog.
  2. Click Add to add a new response code to your question.
  3. Type the new code label in the Codes field.
  4. Double-click in a field to edit the code label. The triangle changes to a pen when you are in edit mode. Changes made here will affect the variable properties of the map control question.
  5. Click OK to save your changes.

Setting the codes to match the Map Control defaults

If you click the Defaults button, all the response codes are set to the defaults code labels for the Map Control. For example, if you have a geographical map, the defaults might be geographical regions. If you do this by mistake, click Cancel to discard your changes.

The post Changing the Map Control variable codes appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Map Control Editor options https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor-options/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:57:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11441 You can decide for the whole map control whether areas change when a respondent clicks on them or whether they change when the mouse/cursor is over them.

The post Map Control Editor options appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
You can decide for the whole map control whether areas change when a respondent clicks on them or whether they change when the mouse/cursor is over them.

  1. Select Tools|Options in the Map Control Editor. The Options dialog appears.
  2. Set the required options.
    • Show shapes on hover displays the changed areas when the mouse pointer is over them.
    • Show code labels on hover displays the variable code label when the mouse pointer is above the associated area.
    • Select Highlight codes in scale displays all codes up to the one you have selected. For example, if you have a five-star map, checking the third star will highlight the first three stars.
    • Reverse scale reverses the highlight order, so if you have a five-star map, checking the third star will highlight the last three stars.
  3. Click OK to apply the changes to the map control.

The post Map Control Editor options appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Rotating a polygon shape https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/map-control-editor-rotate-dialog/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:57:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11438 Open the Map Control Editor rotate dialog by right-clicking a polygonal shape and selecting Rotate from the context menu. Right Rotate the selected shape right (clockwise) Left Rotate the selected shape left (anti-clockwise) Degrees Select the number of degrees to rotate. Select 90, 180 or 270 degree rotation or select Free and enter the number of degrees […]

The post Rotating a polygon shape appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Open the Map Control Editor rotate dialog by right-clicking a polygonal shape and selecting Rotate from the context menu.

RightRotate the selected shape right (clockwise)
LeftRotate the selected shape left (anti-clockwise)
DegreesSelect the number of degrees to rotate.
Select 90, 180 or 270 degree rotation or select Free and enter the number of degrees to rotate by.

The post Rotating a polygon shape appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
Testing a pattern https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/testing-a-pattern/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:56:09 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11421 If the test fails either the text does not fit the pattern or the pattern needs editing. Result and Modify Case only alter the way the data is displayed in the analysis.

The post Testing a pattern appeared first on SnapSurveys.

]]>
  • Once you have created, cloned or modified a pattern, you can test it by clicking Test on the Pattern Properties dialog. The test dialog appears.
  • Pattern Match Test dialog
    1. Type in a sample of data into the Text box. For example, for the date pattern you might type in 20201231.
    2. If the pattern works correctly it will show that it has matched the data, the result that will display in Snap and the Values of each of the component parts.

    If the test fails either the text does not fit the pattern or the pattern needs editing.

    Testing a pattern

    Result and Modify Case only alter the way the data is displayed in the analysis.

    The post Testing a pattern appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Character selection dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/character-selection-dialog/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:55:50 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11429 The Character selection dialog allows you to select specific characters to use in a pattern. Characters Use Control with left-click or Shift with left-click to select the characters you wish to use. Case Sensitive Select to make your selection case-sensitive.

    The post Character selection dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Character selection dialog allows you to select specific characters to use in a pattern.

    CharactersUse Control with left-click or Shift with left-click to select the characters you wish to use.
    Case SensitiveSelect to make your selection case-sensitive.

    The post Character selection dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Repeat pattern components https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/repeat-pattern-components/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:55:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11426 The Repeat dialog allows you to specify how often a component or pattern repeats. Once only No repeat (default). Exactly The component repeats the specified number of times. Optional The component is optional (not required for match). Up to The component is mandatory but cannot repeat more than the specified number of times. 0 or […]

    The post Repeat pattern components appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Repeat dialog allows you to specify how often a component or pattern repeats.

    Once onlyNo repeat (default).
    ExactlyThe component repeats the specified number of times.
    OptionalThe component is optional (not required for match).
    Up toThe component is mandatory but cannot repeat more than the specified number of times.
    0 or moreThe component is optional but can repeat any number of times.
    1 or moreThe component is mandatory but can repeat any number of times.
    At leastThe component must repeat the specified number of times or more.
    BetweenThe component must repeat at least the lower number of times but no more than the higher number.

    The post Repeat pattern components appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Match Pattern dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/match-pattern-dialog/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:55:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11432 The Match Pattern dialog is used to define text to be matched. Match Enter the text string and patterns to match. Select and right-click to apply repeats to the selected text. Right-click in the field to insert components. Right-click to display context menu. Repeat Open the repeat dialog to specify how often a component or character can […]

    The post Match Pattern dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Match Pattern dialog is used to define text to be matched.

    MatchEnter the text string and patterns to match. Select and right-click to apply repeats to the selected text. Right-click in the field to insert components. Right-click to display context menu.
    RepeatOpen the repeat dialog to specify how often a component or character can be or must be repeated.
    Any CaseCheck to make match case insensitive
    ComponentsSelected or defined components that have been added to the pattern
    Global PatternsSystem components provided with Snap
    CharactersOpen the Character Selection dialog to add characters to the match

    The post Match Pattern dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Component properties dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/component-properties-dialog/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:54:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11435 The component properties dialog is used to create components to use in patterns. Components are essentially patterns that can only be used within the parent pattern. They allow you to specify repeats of groups of characters, and to identify elements within a pattern match. Name Name for the component. Should be as specific as possible. […]

    The post Component properties dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The component properties dialog is used to create components to use in patterns. Components are essentially patterns that can only be used within the parent pattern. They allow you to specify repeats of groups of characters, and to identify elements within a pattern match.

    NameName for the component. Should be as specific as possible.
    LabelMore detail about the component.
    ConsistentCheck to require the same match for the component in all uses in a single pattern.
    Less<<More>>Hide or display the Components panel.
    ComponentsThe list of components which are local to this component.
    MatchesThe list of matches which are valid for this component.
    ResultThe string or component result that the match is changed to. If empty, any sub-component results will be used. If there are no component results, no transformation will take place. Right-click in field to select a component name to use as the result.
    Modify CaseTransform the result of applying the component to the specified case. The available options are lower case, Normal, Sentence case, Title case, UPPER CASE.

    The post Component properties dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Patterns properties dialog https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/patterns-properties-dialog/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:54:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11423 The Pattern properties dialog allows you to view or create patterns. Patterns define the format of the data that a respondent should enter when they are completing the questionnaire. Snap XMP Desktop comes with a library of patterns. You can also create your own patterns. Viewing the patterns Name Name for the pattern. Label More detail […]

    The post Patterns properties dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Pattern properties dialog allows you to view or create patterns. Patterns define the format of the data that a respondent should enter when they are completing the questionnaire. Snap XMP Desktop comes with a library of patterns. You can also create your own patterns.

    Viewing the patterns

    1. Open the Patterns dialog from the View | Patterns menu on the Snap XMP Desktop menu.
    2. To open the Pattern Properties dialog you can
      • Select a pattern in the list and click the View or Modify button. The patterns supplied with Snap XMP are read-only.
      • Click the New button to create a new pattern.
    NameName for the pattern.
    LabelMore detail about the name and describes the pattern in the Patterns dialog.
    ReferenceThis gives further details about the source of the information for the Pattern: for example, a website address; a database; a reference book.
    UsageThe response type that uses the Pattern. The Other Patterns Only option, means that the pattern is only for use within other Patterns.
    DecoratedAdd fixed-position known characters in fixed length patterns (e.g. separators for dates).
    Less<<More>>Hide or display the Components panel.
    ComponentsThe list of components which are used in this pattern.
    MatchesThe list of matches which are valid for this pattern.
    ResultThe text or component result after applying the pattern. If this is empty, any component results will be used. If there are no component results, no transformation will take place. Right-click in field to select a component name to use as the result.
    Modify CaseTransform the result of applying the pattern to the specified case. The choices that are available are: lower case, Normal, Sentence case, Title case, UPPER CASE.

    The post Patterns properties dialog appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Custom columns widths https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/custom-columns-widths/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:52:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11417 You can customise the column widths in a report using the Page Layout instruction. Number of columns Specify the number of columns. The maximum is 10 columns. Gap between Specify the gap between columns as a percentage of the page or screen. The maximum is 10%. Columns This grid shows the column widths. Set the column […]

    The post Custom columns widths appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can customise the column widths in a report using the Page Layout instruction.

    1. In the Page Layout instruction, click the Page Setup tab.
    2. Select Modify Columns.
    3. Select Custom widths. This lets you use the Define button.
    1. Click the Define button to open the Custom column width dialog where you can set the column widths.
    Number of columnsSpecify the number of columns. The maximum is 10 columns.
    Gap betweenSpecify the gap between columns as a percentage of the page or screen. The maximum is 10%.
    ColumnsThis grid shows the column widths. Set the column by dragging the bar or entering the percentage for each column in the boxes below each column.

    The post Custom columns widths appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Style properties https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/style-properties/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:51:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11397 In Style mode  , clicking the Style Properties button  opens the Style Properties dialog for the currently selected style. Name This is the name of the question style. Based On The name of the style that is the basis for the question style. Next Object The question style that is automatically created after the current question. Next […]

    The post Style properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In Style mode StyleModeIcon.png , clicking the Style Properties button VariablePropsIcon.png opens the Style Properties dialog for the currently selected style.

    Renaming a style template in the Style Properties dialog
    NameThis is the name of the question style.
    Based OnThe name of the style that is the basis for the question style.
    Next ObjectThe question style that is automatically created after the current question.
    Next PartThe part of a question that is created once the current part is completed. This applies to Grid First and Grid Next, Open First and Open Next, and Multi Choice.
    PreviousThe type of question to be created immediately before this question.

    Use the Scroll down arrow button to change any of the settings in terms of Next Object, Next Part or Previous. Any changes you make to individual style properties remain with that style for the current survey. The changes are not available to other surveys created with Snap XMP.

    To alter any of the settings in the copy fields, ensure that you select the appropriate Clone Next Object, Clone Next Part or Clone Previous. This highlights the selected elements of the question. Then you can use the cursor or the space bar to identify which element you want to copy.

    The post Style properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Renaming a style https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/renaming-a-style/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:51:16 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11395 If you make changes to elements within an individual question and are working within Design mode  , the new changes will be saved as a new style called (like Grid First). If you have several questions that will be using the same layout as the (like Grid First) one, then you could choose to rename the style.

    The post Renaming a style appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    If you make changes to elements within an individual question and are working within Design mode DesignModeIcon.png , the new changes will be saved as a new style called (like Grid First). If you have several questions that will be using the same layout as the (like Grid First) one, then you could choose to rename the style.

    1. To rename any of your own styles, switch to Style mode StyleModeIcon.png
    2. Select one of the questions using the style that you want to rename.
    Selecting a question in Style mode
    1. Select the Style Properties button VariablePropsIcon.png
    2. Click in the Name box at the top of the Style Properties dialog box.
    3. Type in a new name and click on OK to save the style name within the current survey.
    Renaming a style template in the Style Properties dialog

    The post Renaming a style appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using the Style Organiser https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-the-style-organiser/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:50:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11393 The Style Organiser tool allows you to view the styles you have used within the questionnaire. Style Organiser is only available in Style mode  and can be used to sort styles, as well as rename and make copies of styles. Other views of styles are also available in the organiser. Click  to display the Style Organiser dialog. Viewing styles Select All Variables to […]

    The post Using the Style Organiser appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Style Organiser tool allows you to view the styles you have used within the questionnaire. Style Organiser is only available in Style mode StyleModeIcon.png and can be used to sort styles, as well as rename and make copies of styles. Other views of styles are also available in the organiser.

    Click StylePickerIcon.png to display the Style Organiser dialog.

    Style Organiser dialog

    Viewing styles

    • Select the type of styles you would like to view in the preview window from the Styles drop-down list.

    Select All Variables to display all the questions in the current questionnaire in a list. This can be useful if you are not familiar with style names.

    • Check the Fit to Window box to fit the question inside the preview window. This is especially useful when previewing titles and subtitles, which normally fit across the width of the whole page.
    • The Sorting option orders the styles in the style list. There are three choices:
      • By Name lists the styles in alphabetical order.
      • Recently Used First lists the styles in most recently used order.
      • By family lists the styles in the family they belong to. The list shows style families in alphabetical order.

    Creating new styles

    Create a new style based on an existing style by clicking the New button. This copies the attributes of the style and allows you to give it a new name.

    Managing temporary styles

    Snap XMP Desktop creates temporary styles if you edit a question within questionnaire design.

    1. You can convert these temporary styles into full re-usable styles by clicking the Properties button and renaming the style. Click OK to save the style.
    Style Properties dialog
    1. You can also use a temporary style to overwrite the style it was based on, or set it back to being the base style. Click the Re-assign button to display the Extended Style Assignment dialog. The available choices depend on the selection.
      • Make the style “base style” look like variable changes the base style so it matches the selected style
      • Make all “base style” variables look like variable changes all the variables which have the same style base as the selected one look like the selected one.
      • Assign the style “base style” to variable is re-applies the original style to the variable.
    Extended Style Assignment dialog

    Displaying style information

    Click the Properties button to display the Style Properties dialog box. You can make changes to style names, or edit parts of the question. You cannot edit the names of the styles supplied with Snap XMP.

    Deleting styles

    When you Delete a style any questions in that style return to the appropriate base style. You cannot delete the base styles supplied with Snap.

    Renaming a style

    If you make changes to elements within an individual question and are working within Design mode DesignModeIcon.png , the new changes will be saved as a new style called (like Grid First). If you have several questions that will be using the same layout as the (like Grid First) one, then you could choose to rename the style.

    1. To rename any of your own styles, switch to Style mode StyleModeIcon.png
    2. Select one of the questions using the style that you want to rename.
    Selecting a question in Style mode
    1. Select the Style Properties button VariablePropsIcon.png
    2. Click in the Name box at the top of the Style Properties dialog box.
    3. Type in a new name and click on OK to save the style name within the current survey.
    Renaming a style template in the Style Properties dialog

    The post Using the Style Organiser appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using the Style Picker https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-the-style-picker/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:49:35 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11391 The Style Picker tool is an easy way of applying a question style to questions in your questionnaire. This tool is only available in Design mode  . Style Picker allows you to format a question by selecting a style of your choice and viewing this style in the preview window before applying it to the questionnaire. This window shows you how the […]

    The post Using the Style Picker appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Style Picker tool is an easy way of applying a question style to questions in your questionnaire. This tool is only available in Design mode DesignModeIcon.png . Style Picker allows you to format a question by selecting a style of your choice and viewing this style in the preview window before applying it to the questionnaire. This window shows you how the question will look in the questionnaire with the selected style applied. It is a useful and easy tool to use as it allows you to try out different question styles and see how they would look in a preview window without actually applying it to a question in the questionnaire.

    1. Select the question you would like to change.
    2. Select More Styles from the drop-down list of style names, or click the Style Picker button StylePickerIcon.png .
    3. The Style Picker dialog appears with the selected question displayed in the preview pane. You can see a list of all of the styles in the questionnaire on the left of the dialog box. To show the question with a different style, select a new style in the list. The preview will change accordingly.
    Style Picker dialog
    1. Showing ‘All Variables’ displays all the questions from the current questionnaire with their associated style name in a list. This can be useful if you are not really familiar with style names as it allows you to pick styles by variable rather than by style name.
    2. This updates the question showing the new style in the Questionnaire Window.

    Style Picker options

    StylesSelect the styles option from drop-down list
    All Styles displays all styles, including temporary styles starting with “Like” which have not been saved.
    Named Styles displays all named and saved styles.
    Used Styles displays all styles used in the questionnaire.
    Unused Styles displays all styles not used in the questionnaire.
    All Variables lists all variables and their associated style.
    PreviewAs the selected question will appear in the selected style.
    Fit to windowSelect to fit the preview in the preview window. Clear to display preview at full size.
    SortingSelect the order of the styles list: in alphabetical order by name, in order of use, or grouped together in style families (so styles based on another style will appear by it)
    OKApply chosen style to the selected variable or question.

    The post Using the Style Picker appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Slider Control summary https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/slider-control-summary/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:41:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11388 The Summary displays a brief report of the options you chose for the Slider Control. Click the Finish button to create or update the Slider Control. If you want to change anything, click the Back button until you reach the relevant page.

    The post Slider Control summary appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Summary displays a brief report of the options you chose for the Slider Control.

    Click the Finish button to create or update the Slider Control.

    If you want to change anything, click the Back button until you reach the relevant page.

    The post Slider Control summary appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Set the code labels and response box in the Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/set-the-code-labels-and-response-box-in-the-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:41:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11385 You can specify whether to show the code label text or the Slider Control point image in single-response questions. Choose whether the response box is shown when using quantity questions. You can also define the size of the display area and the appearance of code labels or point images. Show code labels/ images Show response […]

    The post Set the code labels and response box in the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can specify whether to show the code label text or the Slider Control point image in single-response questions. Choose whether the response box is shown when using quantity questions. You can also define the size of the display area and the appearance of code labels or point images.

    Show code labels/ images
    Show response box
    Select to show the specified items
    Slider directionSelect whether the code labels start with the lowest number code on the right or left (or at the top or bottom) For quantity responses specify which way the slider moves to increase or decrease the response
    PositionWhether the code labels/response box are to the left or right of the slider
    Size% share the code labels/response box has of the space allocated to the slider control
    Horizontal spaceSpecify the width of the space around the code labels/response box
    Vertical spaceSpecify the height of the space around the code labels/response box
    AlignmentSpecify the text/box alignment
    MinimumSpecify the minimum value for a quantity response
    MaximumSpecify the maximum value for a quantity response
    Decimal placesSpecify the decimal places used when specifying quantity scale points

    The post Set the code labels and response box in the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Set the scale properties in the Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/set-the-scale-properties-in-the-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:41:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11382 Specify whether the respondent can choose any position on the Slider Control, or whether the slider moves in discrete steps. You can also specify how the scale is positioned relative to the bar image. Use steps Check to move the slider in code point jumps, clear to allow the respondent to put the slider anywhere […]

    The post Set the scale properties in the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Specify whether the respondent can choose any position on the Slider Control, or whether the slider moves in discrete steps. You can also specify how the scale is positioned relative to the bar image.

    Use stepsCheck to move the slider in code point jumps, clear to allow the respondent to put the slider anywhere on the bar.
    Number of pointsSet the number of points on the scale available to a quantity slider (only available if using steps). Displays the number of codes for a single-response question.
    Base offsetSet the start position for a stretchable slider. You would use this for a fill image, if you wished to start the fill at a specific point on the bar image – eg, for a glass to fill above the base.
    Left/Top offsetPosition the end of the scale relative to the image.
    For a stretched slider, left defaults to 1, top defaults to the bar image height.
    Right/Bottom offsetPosition the other end of the scale relative to the image.
    For a stretched slider, right defaults to the bar image width, bottom defaults to 1.
    Default slider positionSpecify where the slider starts on the bar.

    The post Set the scale properties in the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Add bar slider to the Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/add-bar-slider-to-the-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:40:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11379 Select an image to use as the slider to position the respondent’s choice. Browse Select the image file used for the slider Colourize Choose a color to tint a grayscale image Horizontal offset Move the image left and right from the centre position. Negative values move left, positive values move right. Vertical offset Move the […]

    The post Add bar slider to the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Select an image to use as the slider to position the respondent’s choice.

    BrowseSelect the image file used for the slider
    ColourizeChoose a color to tint a grayscale image
    Horizontal offsetMove the image left and right from the centre position. Negative values move left, positive values move right.
    Vertical offsetMove the image up and down from the baseline. Negative values move up, positive values move down.
    Alt textSpecify the text that is displayed if images are not available or is read out by an audio browser.
    MoveMove the slider image along the bar
    StretchStretch the slider image along the bar. You would use this if you were filling a bar image.

    The post Add bar slider to the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Add bar scale markers to the Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/add-bar-scale-markers-to-the-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:40:28 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11376 Specify the marks used on the bar and the starting position for the first mark. Subsequent marks will be placed according to the number of points in the question. Browse Select the image used for the markers Top/Left offset Specify how close the start of the scale is to the start of the bar image […]

    The post Add bar scale markers to the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Specify the marks used on the bar and the starting position for the first mark. Subsequent marks will be placed according to the number of points in the question.

    BrowseSelect the image used for the markers
    Top/Left offsetSpecify how close the start of the scale is to the start of the bar image
    Bottom/Right offsetSpecify how close the end of the scale is to the end of the bar image
    Horizontal/ vertical positionSpecify how close the centre of the mark is to the centre of the bar image
    Omit first and last markerCheck to omit the first and last scale marker. You would want to do this if you wished to use the bar image ends as the scale markers.

    The post Add bar scale markers to the Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding points to a Slider Control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-points-to-a-slider-control/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:40:11 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11371 The post Adding points to a Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • Open the Slider Control Wizard, and click Advanced without selecting a template. This opens the Points on slider page. This is where you can choose an image to go with each point on your Slider Control.
  • Set the point labels using the Slider Control wizard
    1. Click the Browse button to browse for an image for that point. If the image is greyscale, you can change its colour by using the Colourize button.
    Insert slider image
    1. Repeat this for each point.
    Setting the images for a slider control
    1. Click Next to choose an image for the bar. You can specify the position of the bar image.

    The post Adding points to a Slider Control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Set the Slider Control bar image https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/set-the-slider-control-bar-image/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:39:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11373 In the Bar page you can specify the slider bar image and position of the bar. Click Browse to find an image file to use as the slider bar. Snap XMP comes with a number of bars to choose from. When you have finished, click Next to add points to the slider. Browse Select the […]

    The post Set the Slider Control bar image appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Bar page you can specify the slider bar image and position of the bar.

    Click Browse to find an image file to use as the slider bar. Snap XMP comes with a number of bars to choose from.

    When you have finished, click Next to add points to the slider.

    Setting the bar properties for a slider control
    BrowseSelect the image file used for the bar
    ColourizeChoose a color to tint a grayscale bar image
    Horizontal offsetMove the bar image left and right from the centred position. Negative values move left, positive values move right. Note that large values may move the bar image out of the preview window. Enlarge the preview window to see them.
    Vertical offsetMove the bar image up and down from the baseline. Negative values move up, positive values move down. Note that large values may move the bar image out of the preview window. Enlarge the preview window to see them.
    Alt textSpecify the text that is read out by an audio browser or shown in a Web browser if images are not available.
    Show code labels/imagesDisplay the response box for quantity sliders or the code labels for single-response sliders.

    The post Set the Slider Control bar image appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using a Slider Control template https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-a-slider-control-template/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:39:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11369 Explore how to customise the Slider Control templates. Explore more about the Slider Control wizard here.

    The post Using a Slider Control template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
  • In the Questionnaire window, select the single response question that you wish to turn into a Slider Control.
  • Select Show in the toolbar topics, then select As Slider Control in the drop-down list, and check the Show box. The questionnaire window changes to display a grey box for the question (if a Slider Control has been previously defined for this question, that Slider Control will be displayed).
  • Double-click the Slider Control area to open the Slider Control wizard. The existing Slider Control templates will be displayed. The default templates show five code positions, but this will be changed to fit the number of codes that exist in your question.
  • Slider Control wizard
    1. Select the one you wish to use. It will appear in preview, allowing you to move the slider to show how the template looks at different settings.
    Previewing the slider control
    1. When you have the Slider Control you want, click OK.
    2. Click the Advanced button to customise the slider bar.

    Explore how to customise the Slider Control templates.

    Explore more about the Slider Control wizard here.

    The post Using a Slider Control template appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Slider Control wizard https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/slider-control-wizard/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:39:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11365 The Slider Control wizard helps create and customise a slider control question. It opens with the option to load a slider template. Snap XMP comes with a number of slider templates that can help you create the slider quickly. A preview pane opens with the wizard and shows how the slider will be displayed during […]

    The post Slider Control wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Slider Control wizard helps create and customise a slider control question. It opens with the option to load a slider template. Snap XMP comes with a number of slider templates that can help you create the slider quickly.

    A preview pane opens with the wizard and shows how the slider will be displayed during the interview.

    Click the Advanced button, if you want to customise the slider. This guides you through all the options to edit the slider.

    BY clicking Next to go to each page, you can customise:

    At the end of the Slider Control wizard, there is a summary page that gives a brief report on the options you have chosen. Click the Finish button to update the slider.

    The post Slider Control wizard appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire Data View mode https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/questionnaire-data-view-mode/ Thu, 07 Mar 2024 09:38:12 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11403 The Data View mode in the Questionnaire window allows you to view and print responses to the survey in the questionnaire. The responses can be viewed either as a summary showing counts and/or percentages or as responses from individual participants. You can print a list of survey results when there are survey responses available, either when the […]

    The post Questionnaire Data View mode appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Data View mode in the Questionnaire window allows you to view and print responses to the survey in the questionnaire. The responses can be viewed either as a summary showing counts and/or percentages or as responses from individual participants. You can print a list of survey results when there are survey responses available, either when the survey is live or after it closes.

    Change the Questionnaire window to Data View mode by clicking  DataModeIcon.png  on the Questionnaire window toolbar. This shows the case data in questionnaire format. There are two options available:

    • Select Case Data to view or print individual responses
    • Select Counts to view or print a summary of responses
    Data view: Case DataDisplay the individual cases in questionnaire format. This looks like the Questionnaire view in the Data Entry window. You can print the survey responses but you cannot change the data. Use the slider bar to move between the cases.
    Data view: CountsDisplay a summary of all data cases by counting responses to the questions. Answers may be displayed as:
    Absolute – the sum of responses.
    Percentage – the percentage of the number of cases. You can weights to the summary to change the balance of respondents.
    FilterOpens a filter dialog where you can enter a filter expression to limit which cases appear.
    WeightOpens a weight dialog to use a weight to change the balance of cases in the summary.

    The post Questionnaire Data View mode appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Navigation button design https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/navigation-button-design/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 15:22:42 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11410 The type and style of the buttons of your pages are defined in the Questionnaire Properties dialog. You can set the default button style, to show with or without text, or add a custom button image. Design Select a design and color for all your buttons (and progress bar if used). Click Select Design to open an image […]

    The post Navigation button design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The type and style of the buttons of your pages are defined in the Questionnaire Properties dialog. You can set the default button style, to show with or without text, or add a custom button image.

    1. In the Questionnaire window, click Questionnaire properties QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to display the Questionnaire Properties dialog box.
    2. Select Buttons https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/qp_but.png in the Section panel to display the buttons properties.
    Setting the buttons to use in the questionnaire
    1. Click Design to choose a style for your buttons. This opens the Navigation Design dialog.
    Selecting the navigation button design
    DesignSelect a design and color for all your buttons (and progress bar if used). Click Select Design to open an image chooser and select the design to use for all buttons.
    Progress BarSpecify if a progress bar is used and whether it is labelled Progress. Click Select Bar to open an image chooser and select the progress bar
    ToolbarSpecify if the navigation area should be colored and which color to use.
    1. Select the button design.
    2. Click OK to save the changes to all buttons.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Navigation button design appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Select button or progress bar images https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/select-button-or-progress-bar-images/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 15:21:04 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11413 In the Select Image dialog you can Open the Select Image dialog from the Navigation Design dialog. Button design Browse Browse for the button design images. Type Choose to show CSS, Images or All button designs. Colourise Choose the colour used for the images. OK Click OK to save your selection. Progress Bar design Browse […]

    The post Select button or progress bar images appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Select Image dialog you can

    • choose the image used for the navigation buttons
    • choose the style of the navigation progress bar

    Open the Select Image dialog from the Navigation Design dialog.

    Button design

    BrowseBrowse for the button design images.
    TypeChoose to show CSS, Images or All button designs.
    ColouriseChoose the colour used for the images.
    OKClick OK to save your selection.

    Progress Bar design

    BrowseBrowse for the progress bar design images.
    ColouriseChoose the colour used for the images.
    OKClick OK to save your selection.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Select button or progress bar images appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Fallback fonts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/fallback-fonts/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 14:41:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11407 This lists any fonts that replace the original fonts you chose in the questionnaire design. This may happen when the fonts are not available on the device you are using. View all the Questionnaire Design tailoring options. Explore the other Tailoring survey settings.

    The post Fallback fonts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This lists any fonts that replace the original fonts you chose in the questionnaire design. This may happen when the fonts are not available on the device you are using.

    1. Click the Tailor | Questionnaire design menu option on the Snap XMP Desktop menu.
    2. Click the Fallback info button to open the Fallback Fonts information.

    View all the Questionnaire Design tailoring options.

    Explore the other Tailoring survey settings.

    The post Fallback fonts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Displaying questions in a different format https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/displaying-questions-in-a-different-format/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 12:32:37 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11533 You can use the Show topic in the Questionnaire window to display the question in different formats in different online editions. For example, a grid may fit better on a large screen and a drop-down list may be easier to use in a mobile edition. Displaying a question in a different formats Question formats As Drop-down Display […]

    The post Displaying questions in a different format appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can use the Show topic in the Questionnaire window to display the question in different formats in different online editions. For example, a grid may fit better on a large screen and a drop-down list may be easier to use in a mobile edition.

    Displaying a question in a different formats

    1. Select the question in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select Show in the topics drop-down list.
    1. Select one of the question formats available in the next drop-down. The question formats available depend on the selected question.
    1. Select the Show checkbox to change the question to the new format. Clear the Show checkbox to return to the original question style.

    Question formats

    As Drop-downDisplay a closed question as a drop-down list.
    As Map ControlDisplay a closed question as an Map Control.
    As Slider ControlDisplay a single-response or quantity question as a Slider Control.
    As Drag and DropDisplay a closed question as a drag and drop question.
    As CarouselDisplay a question as a Carousel.
    PlaceholderAdd a placeholder to an open-ended question.
    Data PickerAdd a data picker to an open-ended question.

    You can also use the Show topic to show or hide a question and to insert a separating line between questions.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Displaying questions in a different format appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Insert a separating line between questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/insert-a-separating-line-between-questions/ Wed, 06 Mar 2024 11:12:12 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11399 The Separating Line dialog appears when you use the toolbar topic Show|Line Before to insert a horizontal line before the selected question. Separating Line dialog Style The type of line (single, double or broken) Width Width of line Colour Color of the line before the selected question You can also use the Show topic to show or hide a question and to display the question in a different format. […]

    The post Insert a separating line between questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Separating Line dialog appears when you use the toolbar topic Show|Line Before to insert a horizontal line before the selected question.

    1. Select the question in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select Show in the topics drop-down list.
    3. Select Line Before in the next drop-down.
    4. Select the Show checkbox. This lets you use the Line Style button.
    1. Click the Line Style button. This opens the Separating Line dialog where you can set the appearance of the separating line.

    Separating Line dialog

    StyleThe type of line (single, double or broken)
    WidthWidth of line
    ColourColor of the line before the selected question

    You can also use the Show topic to show or hide a question and to display the question in a different format.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Insert a separating line between questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Open Grid questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-open-grid-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:52:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11514 You can create a grid of open ended questions where respondents can enter their own answers. This is an Open Grid Next question. Its question box (and all subsequent boxes) will be the same size as the first box in the question. If you wish to change the responses to quantities, dates or times, select Responses in the toolbar […]

    The post Inserting Open Grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can create a grid of open ended questions where respondents can enter their own answers.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Open Grid First. This will allow you to set up the heading for the first of a series of questions, each of which can contain numbers or text.
    OpenGridFirst.PNG
    1. Click on the box that reads Click here for text. Type your question text and press Down Arrow or Tab.
    2. The cursor will move to the Grid Label of the first row where you can enter your text. Use Ctrl and + to make the box larger if necessary.
    3. Press Tab and type the next question text in the next line of the question.
    OpenGridNext.png

    This is an Open Grid Next question. Its question box (and all subsequent boxes) will be the same size as the first box in the question.

    1. If you need more questions press Tab again and repeat the process.

    If you wish to change the responses to quantities, dates or times, select Responses in the toolbar topic. Following questions will keep the new response type and box size.

    OpenGridNextResponse.png

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Open Grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Open Ended questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-open-ended-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:52:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11509 You can use an Open question to collect free format text, numbers, dates or times. There are three alternative styles to use Inserting an Open Ended question Use an Open Ended question to collect free format text, number, date or time. A common use is to provide space for general comments. If you wish to change the responses to […]

    The post Inserting Open Ended questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can use an Open question to collect free format text, numbers, dates or times. There are three alternative styles to use

    • Open Ended is for a single free format response.
    • Open Grid First and Open Grid Next are for free format responses for a series of similar questions, which can come under the same overall question heading.

    Inserting an Open Ended question

    Use an Open Ended question to collect free format text, number, date or time. A common use is to provide space for general comments.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Open Ended, which allows the respondent to enter free format text.
    OpenEnded.PNG
    1. Use Click on the box that reads Click here for text and type in your question text.
    2. To make the box bigger hold down the Ctrl key and press the + key. Press Ctrl and  to make the box smaller.

    If you wish to change the responses to quantities, dates or times, select Responses in the toolbar topic.

    OpenGridNextResponse.png

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Open Ended questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Semantic Scale questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-semantic-scale-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:48:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11507 Semantic scale questions allow you to measure people’s attitudes towards contrasting adjectives or objects. Each pair of items is at opposite ends of a bipolar scale. You can insert a group of semantic scale questions together. Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Semantic Scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Semantic scale questions allow you to measure people’s attitudes towards contrasting adjectives or objects. Each pair of items is at opposite ends of a bipolar scale. You can insert a group of semantic scale questions together.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Semantic Scale First. If it is not available in the list, select More Styles and scroll to Semantic Scale First in the Style Picker dialog, then click OK. This creates an empty question with two codes.
    SemanticScaleFirst.PNG
    1. Type your question text, for example “How would you describe the product?” Press the Down Arrow key to move to the first label. Type the adjective at one end of the scale, such as “Cheap”.
    2. Press the Image: Right Arrow key to move to the first code in the question.
    3. Press Tab to add further codes
    4. Press the Image: Right Arrow key to move to the second label and type the adjective at the other end of the scale (such as “Expensive”).
    SemanticScaleFirst2.PNG
    1. Press Tab if you wish to create a grid of semantic scale questions or press Enter to create a new question.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Semantic Scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Grid questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-grid-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:48:04 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11505 A Grid is made up of a series of Single Response questions, which have exactly the same choice of answers, organised in grid rows. Often they ask for people’s attitude towards something. In Snap XMP Desktop, a grid uses the styles Grid First and Grid Next. Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Grid is made up of a series of Single Response questions, which have exactly the same choice of answers, organised in grid rows. Often they ask for people’s attitude towards something. In Snap XMP Desktop, a grid uses the styles Grid First and Grid Next.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Grid First. This will allow you to set up the headings for the first of a series of grid questions.
    GridFirst.png
    1. In the area marked Click here for text, type your question text, for example “How did you rate the following?” Press the Tab key on your keyboard.
    2. The cursor will now move to the list of codes across the top of the first grid question. Type the first of the possible answers, such as “Good”. Press Tab to create the next code. Type each subsequent answer and follow each by pressing Tab. After the last code press Down Arrow instead of Tab.
    3. The cursor will move to the text of the first Grid Label. Type the first item, such as “Speed of service” and press Tab.
    GridNext.PNG
    1. This creates the next grid row automatically changing the style to Grid Next for the second and subsequent rows. Type the next Grid Label.
    2. Press Tab to create another grid row or press Enter to complete the grid and move to a new question.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Other questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-other-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:47:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11503 When you are creating a list of items it is likely the list will not contain every answer and you may want to collect further information from the respondent. One of the supplied question styles is called Other and is used to collect more information. It is designed to appear as part of the main question with […]

    The post Inserting Other questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When you are creating a list of items it is likely the list will not contain every answer and you may want to collect further information from the respondent. One of the supplied question styles is called Other and is used to collect more information. It is designed to appear as part of the main question with its list of codes.

    1. When you complete your list of choices, press Ctrl + Enter to add an Other style question after the Multi Choice question. The style of an Other question contains a question text label and a text box for free format comments.
    2. In the area marked “Click here for text”, enter your question text.
    3. To make the text box larger press Ctrl + +. Press Ctrl + – to make the box smaller.
    Other response for a Multi Choice question

    The question number is not displayed but can be identified in the notification area of Snap XMP Desktop.

    Question information located on the status bar at the bottom of the Questionnaire window

    The post Inserting Other questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Multi Choice questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-multi-choice-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:36:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11501 Multi Choice questions let a respondent select one or more responses from a list. They are multiple response questions, by default, and display as check boxes to show the respondent that they can choose more than one answer. Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Multi Choice questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Multi Choice questions let a respondent select one or more responses from a list. They are multiple response questions, by default, and display as check boxes to show the respondent that they can choose more than one answer.

    1. Press Enter to start a new question after the currently selected question. By default, this is a single response question and the question style is Single Choice on the toolbar.
    2. Select the question style drop-down list on the toolbar and choose Multi Choice in the Style selection drop-down menu. The shape of the response boxes changes from a radio button to a checkbox.
    MultiChoiceQu.png
    1. You can see an area with “Click here for text”. Type your question text here.
    2. Press the Tab key on your keyboard to move the cursor into the area by the first box. This is labelled “Code Label”. Type your first answer code here then press Tab to create and move to the next code label.
    3. Continue with the text for the other code labels and press Tab after each one.
    4. When you have finished the question, press Enter to start the next question. Press Ctrl + Enter if you wish to add an “Other” question.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Multi Choice questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Showing questions as a drop-down https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/showing-questions-as-a-drop-down/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:31:41 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11499 You can show Single Choice questions, Multi Choice questions and Grid rows as drop-downs. To switch between the drop-down list or separate boxes: Explore more question styles here.

    The post Showing questions as a drop-down appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can show Single Choice questions, Multi Choice questions and Grid rows as drop-downs.

    To switch between the drop-down list or separate boxes:

    1. In the questionnaire window, select the question that you wish to turn into a drop-down.
    1. Select Show in the toolbar, then select As Drop-down in the next drop-down list
    2. Select the Show box to show the question as a drop-down. The question is now shown as a drop-down.
    1. Clear the Show box to show the question as response boxes.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Showing questions as a drop-down appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Single Choice questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-single-choice-questions/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:30:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11497 Single Choice questions let the respondent select one response from a list. They are single response questions, by default, and display as radio buttons to show the respondent that they should only choose one answer. Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Single Choice questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Single Choice questions let the respondent select one response from a list. They are single response questions, by default, and display as radio buttons to show the respondent that they should only choose one answer.

    1. Press Enter to start a new question after the currently selected question. By default, this is a single response question and the question style is Single Choice on the toolbar, showing radio buttons as the response box style.
    1. You can see an area with “Click here for text”. Type your question text here.
    2. Press the Tab key on your keyboard and the cursor will move into an area by the first box, labelled “Code Label”. Type your first answer code here then press Tab to create and move to the next code label.
    3. Continue with the text for the other code labels and press Tab after each one.
    4. When you have finished the question you can press Enter to start the next question.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Single Choice questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inserting Notes in your questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inserting-notes-in-your-questionnaire/ Tue, 05 Mar 2024 15:25:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11494 Notes are questions that provide text information and include Add a note to your questionnaire by inserting text in one of these styles. Inserting a title or sub-title A questionnaire normally starts with a heading together with text to explain its purpose and how it should be completed. As soon as a new questionnaire starts, […]

    The post Inserting Notes in your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Notes are questions that provide text information and include

    • Title
    • Sub Title
    • Instruction

    Add a note to your questionnaire by inserting text in one of these styles.

    Inserting a title or sub-title

    A questionnaire normally starts with a heading together with text to explain its purpose and how it should be completed. As soon as a new questionnaire starts, there are placeholders for a title and then a sub-title.

    1. In the area marked “Click here for text”, type the name of your survey. The style displayed in the ribbon at the top of the window is pre-set to Title. The default layout and font for the title is black text in Arial font on a white background.
    2. Press Enter when you have set up your title. This displays a sub-title area automatically. The Sub Title style is on the toolbar.
    3. Type your sub-title text.
    InsertTitle.PNG
    1. Press Enter when you have set up your title and sub-title.

    The text of the sub-title automatically moves onto the next line as you type. If you want to force a new line as part of the text of the title or sub-title, click on the appropriate location and press Shift and Enter.

    Inserting an instruction

    An Instruction can appear anywhere in the questionnaire and can be a note to an interviewer or guidelines to a respondent on how to complete the next section of the questionnaire.

    1. Press Enter to create a new question when you have set up your title and sub-title.
    2. Change the style to Instruction in the style selection box. This allows you to enter free format text that appears across the entire column of the questionnaire.
    3. Type your instruction or information text in the box.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inserting Notes in your questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Seeding data from the survey URL to identify where the participant accessed the questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/seeding-data-from-the-survey-url-to-identify-where-the-participant-accessed-the-questionnaire/ Wed, 21 Feb 2024 13:32:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11355 This tutorial shows how to seed data from the survey URL into the questionnaire, so you can capture which survey website the participant used to access the survey. In this example, the survey can be accessed from three websites: Snap Surveys, Facebook and Twitter. This allows you to capture which link the participant used, so […]

    The post Seeding data from the survey URL to identify where the participant accessed the questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial shows how to seed data from the survey URL into the questionnaire, so you can capture which survey website the participant used to access the survey. In this example, the survey can be accessed from three websites: Snap Surveys, Facebook and Twitter.

    This allows you to capture which link the participant used, so you can track the participants’ engagement on each platform.

    Step 1: Creating a variable to capture the seeded data.

    1. Create a variable to capture the data you want to collect. This example uses an Open Ended Literal variable, but you can also use a coded single choice variable.
    2. Change the name of the variable to something that helps you recognise it easily. Do this by right-clicking on the variable, then selecting Variable Properties. In this example, the variable name is changed to “Website”.
    1. If you don’t want the participants to see the variable in the survey, you can then hide it. To do this simply right click on the variable, then select Hide Variable. The participant cannot view a hidden variable, but the questionnaire uses the data behind the scenes.
    2. When the questionnaire is ready, you can publish it, which creates the survey URL in Snap Online. You can find out more about publishing your survey here.

    Step 2: Creating the URL for each website.

    1. Log in to Snap Online.
    2. Select the survey and open the Collect tab.
    3. In the Collect tab, you will find the Interview URL.
    1. Copy the URL using the Copy button, then paste it into a text editor, such as Notepad or Microsoft Word.
    2. To make a unique link for each website the questionnaire can be accessed, you need to add some code to the end of the URL. This code is: ?VariableName=Data
    3. Replace the ‘VariableName’ with the name of the variable you want to seed data into. Replace ‘Data’ with the data you want seed. In this example, there are three websites being used, so you need to seed the words ‘Facebook’, ‘Twitter’ or ‘Snap Surveys’ into the variable called Website in the survey. The links created are:
    4. Publish these links onto the relevant websites, each link takes the participant to the same questionnaire. The questionnaire captures the website information within their response, and you analyse this to check your engagement for each platform.

    Please note that because Snap Surveys is two words, you need to use the HTML code for a space. This is %20. You cannot use a space within the URL, as anything after the space is ignored.

    The post Seeding data from the survey URL to identify where the participant accessed the questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Descriptive Statistics tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/descriptive-statistics-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:59:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11340 Statistic Description Count The number of data cases Mean This is often called the average. It is defined as the sum of the items divided by the number of items. For example, for ten responses Mean = (1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + […]

    The post Descriptive Statistics tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Descriptive Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog

    Statistic

    Description

    Count

    The number of data cases

    Mean

    This is often called the average. It is defined as the sum of the items divided by the number of items. For example, for ten responses

    Mean = (1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + 2) = 34 10 = 3.4

    Mode

    The mode of a distribution is the most frequent or most popular item. If two values tie for the mode, Snap chooses the lower. With the same ten responses: 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 6

    Mode = 4, since 4 is the most frequently occurring value (three occurrences).

    Quartile 1

    25% through a range of values

    Median

    The midpoint or 50% through a range of values. To calculate the median, the items of the distribution are arranged in order of magnitude starting with either the smallest or the largest, then:

    if the number of items is odd, the median is the value of the middle item.

    if the number of items is even, the median is the mean of the two middle items.

    1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 6

    Median = (3 + 4) ÷ 2 = 3.5

    Quartile 3

    75% through a range of values.

    Sum

    The sum is calculated by adding all the values of a distribution.

    Sum = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 4 + 6 + 2 = 34

    Minimum

    The minimum is the smallest value of the distribution.

    Minimum = 1

    Maximum

    The maximum is the largest value of the distribution.

    Maximum = 6

    Range

    The range shows the spread of the distribution and is calculated by subtracting the smallest value (minimum) from the largest value (maximum).

    Range = 6 – 1 = 5

    Standard Deviation

    The standard deviation is a measure of dispersion of values in a distribution. It gives an indication of how much the values deviate from the mean. Thus, a distribution with a large range would have a larger standard deviation than one with a small range. The standard deviation is calculated as:

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15530.bmp

    where xi is each value in the distribution, https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/15531.bmp is the mean of the values and n is the number of cases. For the sample in question:

    Standard Deviation = 1.428286

    Variance

    The variance is another measure of dispersion of values in a distribution and is used in the calculation of the standard deviation:

    Snap calculates the standard deviation and variance by assuming the data represents a sample rather than an entire population.

    Standard Error of the Mean

    The standard error of the mean is calculated by dividing the standard deviation by the square root of the number of items in the sample. It is defined as the standard deviation of the distribution of the sample mean and gives an indication of how far individual scores deviate from the mean score shown. The larger the sample, and/or the closer the individual scores are to the mean score, the smaller the standard error.

    Standard Error of the Mean = 1.428286 ÷ √10 = 0.451664

    Skewness

    A distribution that is not symmetrical but has more cases toward one end of the distribution than the other is called skewed.

    The measures of central tendency (mean, mode and median) can vary considerably. If the mean is larger than the mid point of the range (the median) and the most frequently occurring value (the mode), the sample is said to be positively skewed.

    If the mean is smaller than the mid point of the range (the median) and the most frequently occurring value (the mode), the sample is said to be negatively skewed.

    A small skewness value (close to 0) indicates that the data is evenly distributed about the mean. With this type of distribution it would be expected that the values for mean, mode and median be similar. The skewness of the example is 0.098843 indicating a small positive skewness.

    Kurtosis

    Kurtosis also gives an indication of the shape of a distribution in the form of the extent to which, for a given standard deviation, the data clusters around a central point.

    A positive value for kurtosis indicates a distribution that is more peaked than usual. A distribution of this type would typically have most of the values clustered around a central point.

    A negative value for kurtosis indicates a flatter or more widely dispersed distribution. The kurtosis for the example is -0.75202

    Average Absolute Deviation

    The average of the absolute deviations. It is a and tends to ignore distant outliers. It is a summary statistic of statistical dispersion and would normally only be displayed if specifically requested

    Sample Standard Deviation

    An estimate of the population standard deviation based on the sample.

    Sample Variance

    An estimate of the population variance based on the sample.

    The post Descriptive Statistics tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Summary Statistics tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/summary-statistics-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:59:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11338 Area Description Available List of statistical data you can add to your chart/table Used List of statistical data you have added to your chart/table Statistical data   <Body> The analysis/break information given in definition Confidence (mean) Specify the confidence level and display the confidence interval level for the mean (using the defined scoring system) Confidence […]

    The post Summary Statistics tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Summary Statistics tab in the Analysis definition dialog

    Area

    Description

    Available

    List of statistical data you can add to your chart/table

    Used

    List of statistical data you have added to your chart/table

    Statistical data

     

    <Body>

    The analysis/break information given in definition

    Confidence (mean)

    Specify the confidence level and display the confidence interval level for the mean (using the defined scoring system)

    Confidence Bottom Box

    Specify a low-end group of values to be calculated and displayed. If confidence interval selected as an option, display the level of confidence that sample matches target population.

    Confidence Difference

    Display (top box percentage total) – (bottom box percentage total)

    Confidence Top Box

    Specify a high-end group of values to be calculated and displayed. If confidence interval selected as an option, display the level of confidence that sample matches target population.

    Mean

    Average value of the analysis variable(total divided by base) using the defined scoring system

    Median

    Central value (equal number of cases to each side

    Significance (t-test)

    Compare mean scores of columns with mean scores of the base to distinguish whether or not the difference between the groups’ averages would most likely reflect a “real” difference in the population from which the groups were sampled. The significance is shown as a percentage.

    Standard Deviation

    Display standard deviation (measure of dispersal of values and hence deviation from mean)

    Standard Error

    Display standard error (indication of how far individual scores deviate from the mean score)

    t-test

    Compare mean scores of axis-defined groups to see if difference is significant. Display significance letters by column values

    U test

    Compare median scores of axis-defined groups to see if difference is significant. Display significance letters by column values

    Variance

    Display variance (measure of dispersion of values in a distribution)

    This table shows the meaning of the options which appear when a given statistic is selected. These options specify how the statistic is calculated and displayed. The default options are set in the Analysis tailoring dialog.

    Statistic

    Option

    Meaning

    Mean

    Standard Error

    Standard Deviation

    Variance

    Median

    Score

    Name of weight matrix, calculation, or name of variable to apply

     

    Decimal places

    Number of decimal places used in calculation

    Confidence (mean)

    Confidence Level

    The level of certainty that the answer lies within the range given

    Confidence Top Box

    Confidence Bottom Box

    Use the x y responses out of z to calculate q

    Select the range of responses used to calculate the confidence top or bottom box. These will be the high-end responses for the top box and the low-end responses for the bottom box

     

    Ordered values

    Check to only use displayed (ordered) values in calculation and omit any suppressed zero values

     

    at a confidence level of

    (gap between sample and population) at the specified confidence level

     

    Show confidence intervals

    Check to display the confidence interval results

     

    z-test

    Check to display the z-test results with the confidence intervals

     

    Multiplier

    Allows you to modify the confidence interval if the sample is weighted or drawn from a small (or finite ) population. Set to sqrt(1-n/N) where n = sample size and N = population

    Significance (t-test)

    Comparison

    Base used when comparing the mean of base to the mean of each category on your table. Either use:

    Base: the mean for all respondents

    Base less current: the mean for respondents that are not included in the category being compared.

     

    Score

    Name of weight matrix, calculation, or name of variable to apply (same as that used for Mean, Standard Error, Standard Deviation, Variance, Median)

     

    Decimal places

    Number of decimal places used in calculation

    t-test

    U test

    Upper Level

    Set the upper significance level

     

    Lower Level

    Set the lower significance level

     

    Labels: Grouped
    Labels: Continuous

    Specify how the figures are shown for tables with more than one break variable

     

    Show:

    All
    Higher
    Lower
    Left
    Right

     

    Select whether result is shown in both columns it affects, or whether it is only shown in one column. The column it is shown in may be:

    column with the higher/lower value

    column in the left-most/right-most position

     

    Show:

    Hyphen
    Index

     

    Check to show hyphens for non-significant results

    Check to label columns with the letter used as index

     

    1-Tail
    2-Tail

    Select type of test (crudely, 1-tailed when looking for increase/decrease between results;2-tailed when looking for difference between two mean scores)

     

    Apply Tukey’s Correction (t-test only)

    Apply Tukey’s Honestly Significant Difference (HSD) correction to take account of carrying out multiple t-tests

     

    Results exclude the x y codes (U test only)

    Enables you to exclude codes (eg, Don’t Know ) from the calculation

    The post Summary Statistics tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Auto Coding tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/auto-coding-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:58:37 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11336 Area Description Auto Coding   Quantity Set to None for no auto coding Set to Clusters to auto categorise the data using a k-means cluster analysis Set to Values to sort the quantity responses into code bands with one code per unique value Literal Set to None for no auto coding Set to Values to […]

    The post Auto Coding tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Auto coding tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    Area Description
    Auto Coding  
    Quantity

    Set to None for no auto coding


    Set to Clusters to auto categorise the data using a k-means cluster analysis


    Set to Values to sort the quantity responses into code bands with one code per unique value

    Literal

    Set to None for no auto coding

    Set to Values to create a code for each unique response (so “I like apples” and “I love apples” would have different codes.)

    Set to Words to create a code for each unique word in a response (so “I like apples” and “I love apples” would have four codes, one each for “I”, “like”, “love” and “apples”)

    Date

    Set to None for no auto coding

    Set to Values to sort date responses into code bands with one code per unique value

    Time

    Set to None for no auto coding

    Set to Values to sort time responses into code bands with one code per unique value

    Words and Values

     

    Case sensitive

    Create separate codes if responses use different cases.

    Stop default words

    Do not code words that are included in the stop list

    Stop default values

    Do not code values that are included in the stop list

    Modify case

    Change the case of words or phrases to the selected style

    Limit codes

    Set the maximum number of codes to be used (maximum number of 2000)

    Clusters

    Specify how open-response quantities will be coded into clusters

    Clusters

    Set the number of clusters to create

    Iterations

    Set how often the algorithm is repeated (higher numbers give greater accuracy but are slower)

    Running means

    Check to calculate the cluster centres every time a data case is allocated to a new cluster, rather than waiting until all cases have been evaluated.

    Initial Centres

    Specify the starting point of the calculations

     

    Set to Zero (default) to start at 0 (in the n-dimensional space). Since the data has been standardised, this should be the centre point of all the variable data

     

    Set to First case to use the data in the first respondent case as the starting point

     

    Set to Evenly spread to spread the start points evenly across the n-dimensional space

    The post Auto Coding tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Cells tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/cells-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:58:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11334 Area Description Decimal places Specify the number of decimal places shown on the following values Counts Defaults to 0 Means Defaults to 0 Percentages Defaults to 0 Sums Defaults to 0 Show % sign Select or clear the check box to display percentage sign. Defaults to on Accuracy Significant figures Maximm number of significant figures. […]

    The post Cells tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>

    Area

    Description

    Decimal places

    Specify the number of decimal places shown on the following values

    Counts

    Defaults to 0

    Means

    Defaults to 0

    Percentages

    Defaults to 0

    Sums

    Defaults to 0

    Show % sign

    Select or clear the check box to display percentage sign. Defaults to on

    Accuracy

    Significant figures

    Maximm number of significant figures. Defaults to 13 (including decimal places). If calculations exceed this number, the word OVERFLOW is shown.

    Calculations d.p

    The number of decimal places used in the calculations. Defaults to 2.

    Suppress zeroes on specified axis

    Remove rows and/or columns (as specified) in a table or chart where all responses are 0. (If you still wish to use them in confidence calculations, you will need to clear the Ordered values box on the Summary statistics tab)

    Thresholds

    Body cells appear as when is

    Check box to specify the conditions under which an entire row or column is suppressed and the character to be used to replace the values field

    Any cell appears as
    when is

    Check box to specify the conditions under which any individual cell in the table is suppressed. The default setting is to replace all zero (or less) values with a hyphen (-)

    Body t-test/Body z-test

    Displays t-test for Means and Significances analysis selected on the Definition tab and z-test if z-test is checked on the Definition tab for Counts and Percents.

    Upper Level

    Upper significance level

    Lower Level

    Lower significance level

    Labels

    Select Grouped or Continuous to choose how multiple break variables will be labelled

    Show

    Select which column the significance levels will be displayed in:

    All: All columns where they apply
    Upper: Only show the columns with the upper significance level


    Lower: Only show the columns with the lower significance level
    Left: Only show the left-most column showing the significance level


    Right: Only show the right-most column containing the significance level

    Apply Tukeys correction Check to apply correction to the t-test formula which takes account of carrying out multiple t-tests (t-test only)
    Apply Yates correction Check to apply correction to the z-test formula which increases the precision of the test (z-test only)
    Tail Select two-tailed test when looking for a difference between two mean scores

    Select one-tailed test when looking for an increase or a decrease between results

    Hyphen Check to display hyphens for non-significant results
    Index Check to label columns with the letter used as an index

    The post Cells tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Report Styles tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/report-styles-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:57:51 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11332 Area Description Reports Include Description Include the detailed description defined in the Results Report dialog when you print an analysis from an analysis window Notes Include the notes entered in the Notes tab Analysis text Include the question text of the Analysis expression Title Include the title text entered in the Notes tab

    The post Report Styles tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Report styles tab in the Analysis definition dialog

    Area

    Description

    Reports Include

    Description

    Include the detailed description defined in the Results Report dialog when you print an analysis from an analysis window

    Notes

    Include the notes entered in the Notes tab

    Analysis text

    Include the question text of the Analysis expression

    Title

    Include the title text entered in the Notes tab

    The post Report Styles tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Base/Labels tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/base-labels-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:57:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11330 Area Description Base Responses include all valid replies which may be greater than respondents in a multi-response survey. Respondents include all respondents Update Display Define when the analysis view is updated On request: update when is pressed On text change only: update if variable labels change On any change: update whenever respondent data changes Show […]

    The post Base/Labels tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Base and Labels tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    Area Description
    Base
    • Responses include all valid replies which may be greater than respondents in a multi-response survey.
    • Respondents include all respondents

    Update Display

    Define when the analysis view is updated

    • On request: update when 1 2 3  button is pressed
    • On text change only: update if variable labels change
    • On any change: update whenever respondent data changes
    Show  
    Language Select the survey language for any labels and analysis fields. This defaults to the system language. When there is no text defined in survey for that language, text will not be displayed.
    Analysis base as Enter text for label in field.
    Break base as Enter text for label for base section in field
    Unweighted as Select or clear the check box to display the unweighted and weighted break bases separately. This is only available if a weight is applied. Enter text for label in field.
    Weighted as Enter text for label in field.
    Missing as Title for the group of No Reply, Not Asked and Errors. Automatically included if any of these included
    Other as Group heading for quantity variables
    Errors
    Not asked
    No reply
    You can choose whether non-valid responses are included in the calculations for the analysis and break values. You can also choose whether to display a line of information about these responses
    • Show to include the responses in analysis or/and break and display information on them. Enter text for label in field
    • Hide to include the responses in analysis or/and break but do not show the information.
    • Exclude to remove the responses from the analysis or/and break

    Templates

    Use Insert to insert one of

    • base Current base value
    • label The label of the analysis variable (grid or code)
    • name The number or ID of the question used for analysis (headings only)
    • score The weights placed on the different responses to a multi-choice question (labels only)
    • unweighted unweighted base values (only useful if the base is weighted).
    • You may also include free text, either on its own or to separate inserted fields.

    Analysis Heading

    Title for analysis group of rows. Defaults to the variable label (analysis question grid label).

    Analysis Label

    Title for analysis rows. Defaults to the analysis question code label.

    Break Heading

    Title for break group of columns. Defaults to the variable label (break question grid label)

    Break Label

    Title for break columns. Defaults to the break question code label.

    Expand axis labels

    If multiple variables are used, provide separate labels for each of the variables that appear on one axis. (Charts only). You can define the content of these labels in the Analysis and Break Heading and Label template fields.

    The post Base/Labels tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Notes/Titles tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/notes-titles-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:57:07 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11328 Area Description Title Defines the title for table window and text report. This defaults to a summary of the analysis. Insert Insert an Image, Variable field, Survey field, Date/Time field, HTML field, Analysis field or Cell value field at the current cursor position. Chart Axis titles Specify the titles for the chart axes Analysis Defaults […]

    The post Notes/Titles tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Notes and Titles tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    Area Description
    Title Defines the title for table window and text report. This defaults to a summary of the analysis.
    Insert Insert an Image, Variable field, Survey field, Date/Time field, HTML field, Analysis field or Cell value field at the current cursor position.
    Chart Axis titles Specify the titles for the chart axes
    Analysis Defaults to the analysis definition as title
    Break Title for the x-axis (not for pies or doughnuts) Defaults to the break definition
    Value Title for the y-axis (not for pies or doughnuts)
     Use Defaults Set the chart axis titles back to the default values.
    Text style area Specifies the font typeface, size, colour and formatting used in notes.
    Insert Insert an Image, Variable field, Survey field, Date/Time field, HTML field, Analysis field or Cell value field at the current cursor position.the note
    Notes panel Enter text for more information about the current analysis. Text entered here can be viewed and edited in a text panel below the window displaying the result (visible by clicking Notes button in the display window toolbar). It will be included in exports and printed results.

    The post Notes/Titles tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Definition tab https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/definition-tab/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:51:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11326 Area Description Type Specifies the analysis as a table, chart, list, cloud or map. Style Selects the style template appropriate to the defined type. Content   Analysis Specifies one axis for the data to be analysed (normally the rows of a table). This can contain: A list or range, consisting of comma separated variable names […]

    The post Definition tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Definition tab in the Analysis definition dialog
    Area Description
    Type Specifies the analysis as a table, chart, list, cloud or map.
    Style Selects the style template appropriate to the defined type.
    Content  

    Analysis

    Specifies one axis for the data to be analysed (normally the rows of a table).

    This can contain:

    • A list or range, consisting of comma separated variable names or TO ( ~)
    • A survey expression, consisting of variable names separated by keywords WITH (:), AND(&), PER (%), NOT(!))
    • Pre-defined tables such as Statistics table, Grid table, Holecount table

    Break

    Specifies the other axis used to split the data into subgroups.

    This can contain:

    • A list or range, consisting of comma separated variable names or TO ( ~)
    • A survey expression, consisting of variable names separated by keywords WITH (:), AND (&), PER (%), NOT (!))

    Pre-defined tables such as Statistics table, Grid table, Holecount table

    Transpose

    Switch the positions of Analysis and Break

    Calculate

    Specifies the type of analysis together with a field specifying the analysis data. There are six Calculate values.

    • Counts & Percents (default option)
    • Means & Significances
    • Means & Differences
    • Sum & Percents
    • Means & Percents
    • Means & %Differences

    The variable entered in the Calculate box adjacent to the Calculate list box is used to calculate the means and sums.

    Base If no Base is specified then all respondents in the survey will be included in the analysis.
    Filter Defines the subset of data to analyse given as a logical expression.

    Weight

    Defines how to alter the calculation to represent a different group of respondents. This can be
    • the name of a variable
    • the name of a weight matrix and the variable to which it refers (e.g. WT1(Q10))
    • a numeric value

    Allow additional filters

    Permits other filters to be applied to this analysis when used in reports. Clear this option if you always want this analysis to appear exactly as defined.

    Show Options

    The options available depend on the type of analysis selected in Content and Calculate.

    All

    Show all rows or columns in table or equivalent in chart

    Top rows (or columns)

    Display following number of rows (or columns) from start of table

    Bottom rows (or columns)

    Display following number of rows (or columns) to end of table

    Rows (or columns) above

    Display number of rows (or columns) above a specified value

    Rows (or columns) below

    Display number of rows (or columns) below a specified value

    Retain ‘Other’ row (or column)

    Creates ”Other’ category if rows (or columns) are limited

    Order by

    Defines the order in which the analysis data appears

    • Default where items appear in the order they appear in the questionnaire
    • Analysis Label sorts in alphabetical order by label
    • Analysis Base sorts with the most popular reply first, based on the number of counts for each of the codes in the analysis variable.
    • Score sorts on the statistics that have been added to the table, e.g. mean. If multiple statistics are selected, the one used will be the highest statistic in the list that can be sorted.
    Reverse Order Select the check box to reverse the selected order
    Hide Table Select the check box to hide the analysis display in a report so that only the notes are visible
    Name A name by which each analysis can be saved for later recall/reference
    Display Name The name that will be used for the analysis when displayed in Snap Online.
    Available Enter a condition under which the analysis is visible in Snap Online. Set to No to make the analysis unavailable and leave blank for it to be available.

    The post Definition tab appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Text Grid instruction https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/text-grid-instruction/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:51:13 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11324 Add a grid table, containing words or images, to a report using the Text Grid Instruction. This can be used to create recommendations dynamically.

    The post Text Grid instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Add a grid table, containing words or images, to a report using the Text Grid Instruction. This can be used to create recommendations dynamically.

    Insert a text grid instruction containing a table of text or images
    1. In Title enter a name for the Instruction.
    2. In N/A enter a condition where the Text Grid is not shown in the report.
    3. Adjust the size of the grid in Rows and Columns.
    4. Select Style to change the look of the Text Grid.
    5. Click TextGridMenu.PNG and select Edit Styles to change the Text Grid style and Sizing to change the column sizing.
    6. In each grid cell enter text or click Insert to add an image, variable field, survey field, date or time, HTML field or cell value.
    7. Click Reset to set the font settings back to the defaults.
    8. Click OK to save the Text Grid.

    The post Text Grid instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Information instruction https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/information-instruction/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:50:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11322 Content containing words and images can be included in the report using the Information Instruction.

    The post Information instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Content containing words and images can be included in the report using the Information Instruction.

    Insert an information instruction containing text and images
    1. In Title enter a name for the Instruction.
    2. In the N/A enter a condition where the Information is not shown in the report.
    3. Enter text in the contents box.
    4. Click Insert to add an image, variable field, survey field, date or time, HTML field or cell value.
    5. Click Reset to set the font settings back to the defaults.
    6. Click OK to save the Information.

    The post Information instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Window Size https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/window-size-instruction/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:50:25 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11320 Use the Window Size dialog to change the size of the window and change where the report is placed in the window. Setting the window size Setting the analysis placement Example Scale the plot to 80% of the Column resizes the analysis to fill 80% of the current column. Limit the plot to 80% of […]

    The post Window Size appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Use the Window Size dialog to change the size of the window and change where the report is placed in the window.

    Window size instruction

    Setting the window size

    1. To use the default window size select Standard in the Size box.
    2. To set custom window dimensions click Set Custom.
    3. In the Set Window Size dialog, change the size of the dialog by dragging the sides or bottom corners.
    4. When you have set it to the required size click Save SaveIcon.png .

    Setting the analysis placement

    1. Resize the analysis to always fit the specified space, select Scale in the box.
    2. Resize the analysis only if it is larger than the specified space, select Limit in the box.
    3. Set the percentage of the Page or Column that the analysis occupies.

    Example

    Scale the plot to 80% of the Column resizes the analysis to fill 80% of the current column.

    Limit the plot to 80% of the Page reduces the size of the analysis if it is larger than 80% of the page.

    The post Window Size appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Report Fonts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/report-fonts/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:49:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11318 On the Report Fonts tab, select the fonts for the Instruction Titles and the Instruction Content.

    The post Report Fonts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    On the Report Fonts tab, select the fonts for the Instruction Titles and the Instruction Content.

    A page layout instruction showing how to change the report fonts

    The post Report Fonts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Page Setup https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/page-setup-instruction/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:49:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11316 On the Page Setup tab, modify the page orientation, modify columns, and set page margins, borders, headers, footers and thumb text

    The post Page Setup appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    On the Page Setup tab, modify the page orientation, modify columns, and set page margins, borders, headers, footers and thumb text

    A page layout instruction showing the page setup

    The post Page Setup appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Page Breaks https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/page-breaks-instruction/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:48:54 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11314 The post Page Breaks appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A page layout instruction showing the page breaks
    1. Select the Start New Page check box to create a page break and put the subsequent content on a new page.
    2. There are three types of Page Breaking.
      • Unchanged uses the existing method of page breaking.
      • Break between items puts a page break between every instruction.
      • Continuous report starts a new page if the next item does not fit on the current page.
    3. Select the Restart Page numbers check box to start the page number from the entered number.
    4. Select the Start New Document check box to put the subsequent content in a new file. This is normally used when creating multiple reports.
    5. Use Insert to use one of the fields as part of the filename.

    The post Page Breaks appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Page Layout instruction https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/page-layout-instruction/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:48:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11312 The Page Layout dialog contains three tabs.

    The post Page Layout instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Page Layout dialog contains three tabs.

    • Page Breaks
    • Page Setup
    • Report Fonts

    The post Page Layout instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Execute instruction https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/execute-instruction/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:47:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11310 Saved analyses and other reports are run using the Execute instruction.

    The post Execute instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Saved analyses and other reports are run using the Execute instruction.

    Execute report instruction to execute another report or analysis
    1. Enter an Analyses or Report in the Execute box.
    2. Click View Analysis VariablePropsIcon.png to see the selected analysis or report.
    3. If you have selected a report, enter the range of instructions to be executed in the Instruction box.
    4. Filter your report or analysis data by entering an expression in the Filter box.
    5. Specify a condition which stops the report or analysis executing by entering an expression in the N/A box.
    6. Click OK to create the Instruction.

    The post Execute instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Tailor Analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/tailor-analysis/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:47:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11308 The Tailor Analysis instruction sets the default options for the analysis while the report is running. When a report is created it contains one Tailor Analysis instruction. The Analysis Tailoring dialog is similar to the Analysis Definition dialog used to create Analyses. The Tailor Analysis has six tabs. Base/Labels Define the base used for the […]

    The post Tailor Analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Tailor Analysis instruction sets the default options for the analysis while the report is running. When a report is created it contains one Tailor Analysis instruction. The Analysis Tailoring dialog is similar to the Analysis Definition dialog used to create Analyses. The Tailor Analysis has six tabs.

    Base/LabelsDefine the base used for the analysis; select the bases to display and set templates for the labels.
    Report StylesSelect or clear the report style check boxes to show or hide titles and descriptions in the report and to select the horizontal alignment.
    CellsDefine how the data appears in the table cells.
    Auto CodingDefines how to automatically generate variables for analyses, especially word clouds, built from open response questions
    Summary StatisticsChoose the advanced statistics that are displayed for the analysis.
    Descriptive StatisticsChoose the descriptive statistics that are displayed for the analysis.
    Analysis Definition showing the Report Styles tab

    The post Tailor Analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Results Definition https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/results-definition/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 16:46:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11306 Tables, Chart, Cloud, List and Map Results Definition The Results definition window is a simplified version of the Analysis Definition window that includes the Definition and Notes/Titles tabs. Definition tab This tab defines the name and style of the analysis (table, chart, cloud, list or map) and the data analysed. The values in the Analysis, […]

    The post Results Definition appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Tables, Chart, Cloud, List and Map Results Definition

    The Results definition window is a simplified version of the Analysis Definition window that includes the Definition and Notes/Titles tabs.

    Results Definition dialog used to add a table, chart, list, word cloud or map to the report
    Definition tabThis tab defines the name and style of the analysis (table, chart, cloud, list or map) and the data analysed. The values in the Analysis, Break and Filter fields can be used to produce multiple tables, charts, lists and maps in the report.
    Notes/Titles tabDefines the titles and note text that appears on the analysis.

    The post Results Definition appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Texts settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/texts-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:30:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11304 The Text section specifies the text for common strings in Snap XMP Desktop. Select Choose a previously saved file of text strings to use. Save As Save all the current text strings to a new file that can be used in a different survey. List of text strings The list of text strings show text […]

    The post Texts settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Text section specifies the text for common strings in Snap XMP Desktop.

    QP-Texts.PNG

    Select

    Choose a previously saved file of text strings to use.

    Save As

    Save all the current text strings to a new file that can be used in a different survey.

    List of text strings

    The list of text strings show text that is used in your current survey. You can change the strings to ones in a different language or using a different vocabulary by clicking Select then selecting the new library.

    Current string

    An editable field showing how the original string will be represented for this survey

    >

    Click to display appropriate fields to embed in the text message. For example {question} will insert the question name.

    English original

    Displays the default message text in English.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Texts settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Alerts settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/alerts-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:30:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11302 The Alerts section allows you to set up email alerts when a participant meets a condition while completing the response, such as entering contact details to receive further information. Click New to create a new email alert or click Clone to create a copy of an existing alert. Select an alert then click Edit to edit an […]

    The post Alerts settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Alerts section allows you to set up email alerts when a participant meets a condition while completing the response, such as entering contact details to receive further information.

    QP-Alerts.PNG

    Click New to create a new email alert or click Clone to create a copy of an existing alert.

    Select an alert then click Edit to edit an existing alert or Delete to remove the alert.

    See also Setting up email alerts.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Alerts settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Paradata settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/paradata-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:29:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11299 The Paradata settings contain system variables containing information about how the survey was conducted, the participant and their data response. This information is available for analysis along with the data response that the participant submits. To include a paradata variable, select the system variable, then select Display in questionnaire. Paradata settings Case Provides a unique identifier for […]

    The post Paradata settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Paradata settings contain system variables containing information about how the survey was conducted, the participant and their data response. This information is available for analysis along with the data response that the participant submits.

    To include a paradata variable, select the system variable, then select Display in questionnaire.

    QP-Paradata.PNG

    Paradata settings

    CaseProvides a unique identifier for a case or data response.
    CompletedSet to Completed when the respondent has submitted the survey.
    Duration Records the time that the respondent takes to complete an interview. The calculation is the difference between the start time and the end time. The unit is minutes to 2 decimal places, for example, 3.25 which gives 3 minutes and 15 seconds.
    End Date Records the date that the respondent completes the interview.
    End Time Records the time that the respondent submits the interview.
    GeolocationAllows an online survey to store the geographic location that a mobile interview takes place.
    Interviewer Selecting the Display in questionnaire box creates a new question in the questionnaire, allowing you to select the interviewer. This is set once when the interviewer opens the survey to collect responses. This is the login name on the Interviewer app.
    Language Available in an online multi-language survey. Selecting Display in questionnaire creates a language question, which respondent uses to select the language that they wish to use.
    PageThe Page paradata variable is a single choice question which you can use to define the number of pages.
    Panel
    This is an optional pre-defined variable that can be used for the survey panel index. This must be set up or pre-seeded from a database.
    ParticipantThis stores the unique participant id, which is the login name for the survey. This must be pre-seeded from a participant in a participant database.
    Password This stores the password for password regulated surveys. This must be pre-seeded from a password in a participant database.
    RecordingAllows you to record the whole interviewer in the Interviewer app.
    Site Selecting the Display in questionnaire box creates a new question. This allows you to set the Site. This is set once each time the survey is opened to collect responses.
    Start Date Records the date that the respondent starts the interview.
    Start Time Records the time that the respondent starts the interview and the first question displays.
    Survey Index Records the subject for Group questionnaires.
    URLThis is an optional pre-defined variable that can be used for the URL of the calling site. This must be set up or pre-seeded from a database.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Paradata settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    SOI settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/soi-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:29:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11297 The SOI section contains the settings for the Interviewer app, including timeouts and image size shown for questions with attached files.

    The post SOI settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The SOI section contains the settings for the Interviewer app, including timeouts and image size shown for questions with attached files.

    QP-SOI.PNG

    The post SOI settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Accessibility settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/accessibility-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:29:03 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11295 The Accessibility settings are used to force your questionnaire to conform to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) accessibility guidelines. These are designed to ensure that those who are visually impaired and those who use electronic readers to read web content are able to read the questionnaires. For more information on the options, go to the Accessibility section. Surveys to […]

    The post Accessibility settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Accessibility settings are used to force your questionnaire to conform to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) accessibility guidelines. These are designed to ensure that those who are visually impaired and those who use electronic readers to read web content are able to read the questionnaires.

    For more information on the options, go to the Accessibility section.

    QP-Access.PNG

    Surveys to Produce

    Select how the surveys will be published

    Standard Version Only

    Publish as designed including images and other HTML features

    Plain Version Only

    Publish a plain text version that complies with the priority 1 section of the W3C guidelines.

    Standard and Plain Versions

    Publish both.

    Web links

    Only available if Standard and Plain Versions selected

    Link to plain text

    Places the specified text as a link to the plain text version at the top of the normal version. Text defaults to “text only”.

    Link from plain text

    Places the specified text as a link to the normal version at the top of the plain text version. (No default text.)

    W3C Accessibility options

     

    Plain version uses no colours

    Check this to change coloring to black on a white background.

    Plain version has no images

    Check this to remove all images from the output. Only needed if using a background image or animated graphics.

    Plain version has no dynamic routing

    Check this to disable dynamic routing and masking. Other dynamic content such as variable substitution, code rotation etc. is always disabled

    Use strict rules

    Use rules specified in the dialog which appears when you click on Details. These are further described in the Strict Rules section of the Snap website.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Accessibility settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Layout settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/layout-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:28:41 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11293 Layout The Layout section allows you to specify which standard components, such as a logo or title, appear on every page of your survey and how they look. Use the first title as the main title on all pages: Check to make the title on the first page appear on all subsequent pages. Add progress […]

    The post Layout settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Layout

    The Layout section allows you to specify which standard components, such as a logo or title, appear on every page of your survey and how they look.

    QP-Layout.PNG
    Use the first title as the main title on all pages: Check to make the title on the first page appear on all subsequent pages.
    Add progress text to browser tabAdd progress text to the header of the browser tab
    Other components Specify which components appear on every survey page, and how they look.
    Divider Text or a graphic (normally a line) that separates the questions from the button area (left right or centred). Selecting this unselects Tool Bar.
    Tool Bar A background color or image used to define the area where the buttons are. Selecting this unselects Divider.
    Progress Bar A graphic or text showing respondents how far through the survey they are (appears where specified).
    Logo Company logo that appears on the tool bar (left right or centred).
    End of Page Text, a line or a graphic that appears below the tool bar (left, right or centred).
    Use in survey Check to use the selected component in the survey.
    Use Image If checked, use the image specified in Image to represent the component. If clear, use the text specified in Text.
    Image Specify the image used to represent the selected component.
    Text Text that is used to represent the selected component. You can insert HTML codes between angle brackets. E.g., to insert an HTML horizontal line, type <<hr>>. If the Image box has been checked, this text is used as the ALT text for the image (displayed if the image is not available).
    Alignment Specify the position of the selected component (image or text) on the toolbar. You can specify the position of the Progress Bar on the page using the secondary drop-down list.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Layout settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Buttons settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/buttons-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:28:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11291 The Buttons section specifies the buttons that are used in the interview and the appearance of the buttons. Button Specify which buttons appear on the survey page, and how they look. They always appear in the following order. Back Go to previous page. Reset Page Clear all respondent’s entries on this page. Restart Close the […]

    The post Buttons settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Buttons section specifies the buttons that are used in the interview and the appearance of the buttons.

    QP-Buttons.PNG
    Button Specify which buttons appear on the survey page, and how they look. They always appear in the following order.
    Back Go to previous page.
    Reset Page Clear all respondent’s entries on this page.
    Restart Close the current interview and restart the survey.
    Print Print the current page.
    Save Save the current state of the survey.
    Next Go to the next page. This is always used.
    Submit Submit the survey. This is always used.
    Use in survey Check to use the selected button in the survey.
    Text Plain text that appears on a basic button.
    Alternative text If an image is used, this text is used as the ALT text for the image which is displayed if the image is not available.
    Pages Select which pages of the interview the selected button is displayed.
    Appearance Specify an individual image used to represent the selected component. You can also select a plain text representation of the button. You do not need to specify individual images if you are using a design.
    Alignment Position of the buttons on the toolbar (the same setting applies to all the buttons).
    Design Open the Navigation Design dialog to specify the scheme used for the tool bar area (button and toolbar colours, and whether the progress bar is present).

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Buttons settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Interview settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/interview-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:27:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11289 The Interview section allows you to control aspects of validation, routing and mandatory questions during the interview. A new interviewer that runs the live survey interviews has been introduced in build 12.10. This was previously set in the Interview section by selecting the option Use new interviewer (beta). The new interviewer is used by default on all […]

    The post Interview settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Interview section allows you to control aspects of validation, routing and mandatory questions during the interview.

    A new interviewer that runs the live survey interviews has been introduced in build 12.10. This was previously set in the Interview section by selecting the option Use new interviewer (beta). The new interviewer is used by default on all new surveys. The legacy interviewer settings are accessed using the Advanced button. The legacy options are set on for any previously created survey where Use new interviewer (beta) was not selected.

    New features will only be implemented in the new interviewer. These include question carousels and displaying calculations on the same page without enforced page breaks. If a new feature, such as a question carousel, is added to a survey, the new interviewer will be used automatically.

    To use the new interviewer, click the Advanced button and clear the options Use legacy interviewer engine and Generate legacy HTML layout.

    Interview settings

    Enforce “must answer” setting

    Select to enforce that all questions that have Must Answer set in the variable properties are answered.

    Follow routing

    Select to enable the routing.

    Validate responses

    Select this option to validate responses against the information given in the Variable properties (Pattern, Valid range and Max/Min for multiple responses).

    Allow ordering of codes and grids

    Uncheck to keep the position of codes and grids constant (disable the Ordering property of the variables).

    Drop a cookie

    Select this to saves a cookie on the participant’s device that records their position in the survey. This should prevent them completing multiple copies of the questionnaire until the cookie expires.

    Display usage warning.

    Select this to display a warning that the survey uses cookies.

    Advanced This displays the interview options:
    Use legacy interviewer engine runs interviews using the interviewer engine used in Snap 11 and the default engine used in Snap XMP Desktop prior to build 12.10.
    Generate legacy HTML layout generates the HTML layout for interviews as used in Snap 11 and the default used in Snap XMP Desktop prior to build 12.10. This will result is a less accessible layout.
    These settings are not recommended for new surveys as you will not be able to take advantage of some new features but may be used for older upgraded surveys where the survey should behave in the same way as previous interviews.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Interview settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Submit settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/submit-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:26:58 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11287 The Submit section allows you to set the action performed when the participant submits or saves their response. The available options are Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Submit settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Submit section allows you to set the action performed when the participant submits or saves their response.

    The available options are

    • Default which displays a default thank you page provided by Snap Surveys
    • Web page which allows you to specify a web page that the participant is taken to after they submit or save their response. This option can be left blank, in which case participants will receive the default thank you page.
    • Close which closes the web browser window after the participant submits their response when the survey is displayed in a pop up window. Please note this will not work when the survey is being displayed in a normal web browser. In this case, the default page is displayed.
    QP-Submit.PNG

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Submit settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Margins settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/margins-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:26:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11285 The Margins section contains settings that specify page margins and the number of page columns to use. Different settings are available for online editions and paper editions. Left Top Right Bottom Define the distance between the text and the specified margin. The distance is given in pixels (px) for screen output and in centimeters (cm) […]

    The post Margins settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Margins section contains settings that specify page margins and the number of page columns to use. Different settings are available for online editions and paper editions.

    QP-MarginsPC.PNG

    Left
    Top
    Right
    Bottom

    Define the distance between the text and the specified margin. The distance is given in pixels (px) for screen output and in centimeters (cm) for printed output.

    Swap on even page

    Check to swap the left and right margins between odd and even pages. Set margins used for odd pages, reversed margins for even pages. Paper output only

    Columns

    Set the number of columns on screen and paper

    Column Gap

    Set the space between the columns. This is set as a fixed width in cm for paper outputs, and a percentage of the window in screen outputs.

    Column Separator

    Open the Separating Line dialog to set the style of vertical line separating the columns. Paper output only

    Justify Vertically

    Check to align the top and bottom of the columns. Paper output only

    QP-MarginsPaper.PNG

    In paper editions, click the Column Separator button to set the appearance of the column separator.

    QP-ColSeparator.PNG
    • Style selects the type of vertical line with <none> set as the default.
    • Width selects the width of the printed line
    • Colour selects the color of the printed line.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Margins settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Page settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/page-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:26:05 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11283 The Page section contains the page settings, with different options available for online and paper editions. In paper editions, you can In online editions, you can Changing the page or screen size This changes the questionnaire page layout for online editions or page size for paper editions. In online editions, the page size determines which […]

    The post Page settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Page section contains the page settings, with different options available for online and paper editions.

    In paper editions, you can

    • set the page size
    • set the background colour and picture
    • choose the page orientation as portrait or landscape
    • choose to print the questionnaire as a booklet
    • set the headers and footers on each page
    QP-PagePaper.PNG

    In online editions, you can

    • set the screen size
    • set the background colour and picture
    • choose whether to allow scrolling
    QP-PagePC.PNG

    Changing the page or screen size

    This changes the questionnaire page layout for online editions or page size for paper editions. In online editions, the page size determines which edition is displayed on a device, letting you produce adaptive questionnaires.

    1. In the Questionnaire window, change to the edition for the required output, for example, Paper, Phone or PC/Laptop.
    2. Click Questionnaire Properties QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to open the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
    3. In Section, select the Page section.
    4. In online editions, in Width, enter the screen width of the device you want this edition to display. The screen width will be different if the device in held in landscape and portrait mode, so choose the appropriate value. Alternatively, select a standard screen size in the drop-down.
    5. In paper editions, in Width and Height, enter the page width and height you want to print this edition on. Alternatively, select a standard paper size in the drop-down.
    6. Click OK to save your changes.

    If the questionnaire will be used on a specific devices then you can test the questionnaire works as expected on that device. Often, participants will use a variety of devices and you will need to test on a number of different sized devices to ensure the layout of each edition is correct.

    Note that if you change the page size for one edition, it may affect which of the other questionnaires is delivered to a device.

    Adding a picture to the background

    Snap Surveys provides a range of background images for surveys that you can download and use in your surveys.

    1. Select Background in the topic drop-down.
    2. In the next drop-down, select the area to apply the background. To apply the background to the entire question, select (All). To apply the background to the all pages, select (Page).
    3. Click the Picture button. This displays the Picture dialog.
    4. Select a picture from the file name drop-down or click Browse to browse for the picture file. The picture path name is shown in the drop-down. Click Remove to clear the picture.
    1. You can align the picture horizontally using the Horizontal drop-down, with Left, Centre and Right options. You can align the picture vertically using the Vertical drop-down, with Top, Centre, Bottom options.
    2. The area assigned for the selected part of the question determines the size of the picture. For an online edition you can select Tile or Fixed to repeat or fix the image. For a paper edition you can select Stretch or Fit to resize the image or Tile and Zoom to repeat or scale the image. This can be done both horizontally and vertically.
    3. If available, you can colourize the GIF file by selecting a color from the drop-down.
    4. Click Zoom and enter a percentage value to resize the image in the background.
    5. Click OK to save the changes.

    Using a picture with a background

    If the background uses a color and a picture, the color shows in areas where the picture does not fill the space. The background preview area on the toolbar shows a split view with the color in the top half and the picture in the bottom half.

    Changes to the background are the same in all language editions for a single output edition, but will not change other output editions as this affects the style.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Page settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Edition settings https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/edition-settings/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:23:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11280 This section provides details about the edition, publication medium and language for the selected edition in the Questionnaire window. These details are read only. The editions can be edited in the Editions and Style Templates window, available from the Questionnaire toolbar. Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Edition settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This section provides details about the edition, publication medium and language for the selected edition in the Questionnaire window. These details are read only.

    QP-Editions.PNG

    The editions can be edited in the Editions and Style Templates window, available from the Questionnaire toolbar.

    Explore more about the questionnaire properties here.

    The post Edition settings appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Reporting on variables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/reporting-on-variables/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:14:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11344 You can print summary reports and full reports including all variables in a survey or from a specified list. Title The title appears at the top of the report. All This includes all variables in the Variables window in the report. When the selection field is cleared All is automatically selected. Specify selection This includes […]

    The post Reporting on variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can print summary reports and full reports including all variables in a survey or from a specified list.

    1. Click PrintIcon.PNG on the Variable window toolbar to display the Print Variable Details dialog. You can also select File | Print Report, or press Ctrl + P.
    Print the details of the survey variables
    1. Select the report settings you would like.
    Title The title appears at the top of the report.
    All This includes all variables in the Variables window in the report. When the selection field is cleared All is automatically selected.
    Specify selection This includes the selected list of variables in the report. When you enter a selection Specify selection is automatically selected. You can use a comma-separated list or the word to for a range. Selecting a group of variables in the Variables window prior to opening the Print Variable Details dialog will automatically enter this selection.

    Style

    You can choose from Summary, Details (single column), Details (double column). Summary prints a list of the variables as shown in the Variables window. The Details report prints the variable details, including codes and values for each variable. The format selected determines whether the data is printed in a single column or double column format.
    Print Prints the selected report.
    Setup

    Opens the Page Setup dialog to specify the layout of your report.

    1. When your selection is complete, press Print to output the required report.

    The post Reporting on variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Viewing sources and dependencies https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/viewing-sources-and-dependencies/ Thu, 15 Feb 2024 15:10:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11342 You cannot delete a variable if its definition refers to another variable as there is a dependency. This happens when a variable is: You can view Sources and Dependencies by clicking . In the example below, the variable Q3a depends on Q3, as Q3a is only asked if the respondent answers Other to Q3. You […]

    The post Viewing sources and dependencies appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You cannot delete a variable if its definition refers to another variable as there is a dependency.

    This happens when a variable is:

    • used in routing
    • used by a derived variable
    • inserted in the label of a variable
    • used in an analysis variable

    You can view Sources and Dependencies by clicking SourceDependIcon.PNG .

    1. Click VariablesIcon.png to open the Variables window.
    2. Highlight the variable you wish to inspect and click SourceDependIcon.PNG .
    3. The Sources/Dependencies window opens, showing the selected variable together with any source variables (variables that it depends on) and any variables, reports or analyses that depend on it.

    In the example below, the variable Q3a depends on Q3, as Q3a is only asked if the respondent answers Other to Q3. You cannot delete Q3 until the Not Asked condition in Q3a is removed.

    Source and dependencies of the selected variable

    In the Sources/Dependencies window you can

    • check the details of a dependent by selecting it and clicking VariablePropsIcon.png
    • display the sources/dependencies of a variable by selecting it and clicking SourceDependIcon.PNG or double-clicking the variable
    • move to the previous view in the Sources/Dependencies window by clicking UndoIcon.png
    • move forward by clicking RedoIcon.png

    The post Viewing sources and dependencies appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Show or hide questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/show-or-hide-questions/ Thu, 01 Feb 2024 16:10:26 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11163 You can show or hide a question in a questionnaire using the Show topic in the Questionnaire window. Showing or hiding the question When the question is hidden you can still access it by selecting the Hidden label. Showing or hiding part of a question You can also use the Show topic to display a question in a […]

    The post Show or hide questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can show or hide a question in a questionnaire using the Show topic in the Questionnaire window.

    Showing or hiding the question

    1. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
    2. Select (All) from the question element list.
    1. Clear the Show box to hide the question. Select the Show box to display the question.

    When the question is hidden you can still access it by selecting the Hidden label.

    Showing or hiding part of a question

    1. Select Show from the toolbar topic menu.
    2. Select the question element from the element list.
    1. Clear the Show box to hide the question element. Select the Show box to display the question element.

    You can also use the Show topic to display a question in a different format and to insert a separating line between questions.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Show or hide questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the position relative to the question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-position-relative-to-the-question/ Thu, 01 Feb 2024 15:17:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11161 The Positions topic determines the relative position of the question text, associated code boxes and footnote. The question text can be placed above or beside the question. The default setting is for the question text to appear above the list of codes and the footnote to appear below the list of codes. When you select Beside, the […]

    The post Changing the position relative to the question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Positions topic determines the relative position of the question text, associated code boxes and footnote.

    The question text can be placed above or beside the question. The default setting is for the question text to appear above the list of codes and the footnote to appear below the list of codes.

    When you select Beside, the question text is to the left of the question codes.

    When you change the position of the code box, it is changed relative to the code label. This is usually set to Left or Right for single or multi-choice codes, and Below for the first row of a grid.

    The footnote text can be placed below or beside the question. When you select Beside, the question text is to the right of the question codes.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the position relative to the question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the question margins https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-question-margins/ Wed, 31 Jan 2024 15:58:35 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11155 The Margins determine the amount of space around individual elements of a question. You can spread the questions elements further apart to make the text easier to read. You can make the question elements closer together to reduce the amount of space needed for the question. The elements of the question that you can alter in Margins are: […]

    The post Changing the question margins appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Margins determine the amount of space around individual elements of a question. You can spread the questions elements further apart to make the text easier to read. You can make the question elements closer together to reduce the amount of space needed for the question.

    The elements of the question that you can alter in Margins are: (All), Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Position, Code Label, Code Value, Data, Check Mark, Code GoTo and Footnote.

    MarginsBar.PNG

    You can alter the left, right, top and bottom margins by using the up and down buttons, or typing in new values.

    Using (All)

    If (All) is selected, the entire question, including the name, text and all of the codes and code labels, moves. Adjusting the left margin moves the entire question to the right. When you increase the top margin, the spacing at the top of each question element increases. The effect is to space out the entire question.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the question margins appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the font https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-font/ Wed, 31 Jan 2024 14:30:40 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11137 You can change the way any text in a question looks, using the Font topic in the Questionnaire window. The Font topic is the default topic when you open the Questionnaire window. Changes made to the text affects all language editions for the same publication but does not change editions for different publications. Change the […]

    The post Changing the font appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can change the way any text in a question looks, using the Font topic in the Questionnaire window. The Font topic is the default topic when you open the Questionnaire window. Changes made to the text affects all language editions for the same publication but does not change editions for different publications.

    Change the font type and size

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text, or position the cursor at the start of the change.
    3. Select the font type from the drop-down list of fonts available on the device.
    1. Select the font size from the drop-down list of font sizes available for the selected font type.

    Bold, Italic and Underline

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text, or position the cursor at the start of the change.
    3. Click TextBoldIcon.png to make your text bold, TextItalicIcon.png to make it italic or TextUnderlineIcon.png to underline it.

    Highlight the text

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text, or position the cursor at the start of the change.
    3. Click TextHighlightIcon.png to highlight it in the highlight colour.
    1. Change the highlight colour by right-clicking to show the colour palette. Select the highlight colour or click No Highlight at the top of the colour palette.

    Change the text colour

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text, or position the cursor at the start of the change.
    3. If you wish to change the text colour, select a different colour in the drop-down list.

    Clear all formatting

    1. In the Questionnaire window, select Font in the topic drop-down list.
    2. Select the text that you want to change.
    3. Click Reset to clear all formatting from the selected text.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the font appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the column layout for a question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-column-layout-for-a-question/ Tue, 30 Jan 2024 16:56:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11124 In the Questionnaire window, you can set different column layout using the Columns topic. Setting the column layout Setting a multi column layout The default settings are Columns set to 1 and Down set on. The codes are displayed underneath in each other in one column. In this example, there are 2 columns and the order […]

    The post Changing the column layout for a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Questionnaire window, you can set different column layout using the Columns topic.

    • Columns where you can display the answer choices or codes over one or more columns.
    • Grid sets the number of columns equal to the number of codes in the question.
    • Down or Across selects the display order of the codes in the columns.
    • Full Page sets the question text and code list to the full-page width.
    • Semantic shows the grid rows in a semantic style format.
    • Compound places adjacent grids in a column layout horizontally across the page.
    • None shows the codes adjacent to each other with no columns.

    Setting the column layout

    1. Select the question or questions that you want to change.
    2. Select Columns in the Questionnaire topics menu.
    1. In Columns, set the number of columns to display the answer codes. The default is 1 column. You can choose from 1 column to a maximum of 20 columns. When you have a large number of columns, check that the labels are easy to read. The Columns option is only available for single and multiple-choice questions only.
    2. Click Grid to show the answer codes as a single line across the page. The number of columns is always the same as the number of codes. If you have a large number of codes, check that the label text shows fully in the available space. The Grid option is only available for single and multiple-choice questions only.
    3. Click Full Page to show the both the question text and answer list using the full-page width. This ignores the columns settings specified in the Page section of the questionnaire properties. This is available for all questions.
    4. You can toggle between Down and Across. Down orders the codes with the first code at the top of the first column, the second code underneath it. Across orders the codes with the first code at the top of the first column and the second code at the top of the second column. The Down and Across option is only available for single and multiple-choice questions only.
    5. You can only use Compound when there are adjacent Grid questions. This places the grids in a column layout horizontally across the page.

    Setting a multi column layout

    The default settings are Columns set to 1 and Down set on. The codes are displayed underneath in each other in one column.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    In this example, there are 2 columns and the order is set to Down. The codes are positioned below each other before starting the next column

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    Setting a grid layout

    Selecting the Grid option sets the number of columns equal to the number of codes in the question.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    When the number of codes is high, you may not be able to see all the code labels or boxes. To resolve this, you can use Full Page, reduce the length of the label text, or organise the question into a number of columns.

    Setting the layout down or across

    When the codes are displayed in columns, the order can be determined using the Down or Across buttons. The default is Down. The order shows the first code at the top of the first column with the second code underneath it. This continues until the column is broken and the next code is displayed at the top of the next column.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    When you select Across, the order of the codes shows the first code at the top of the first column with the second code at the top of the second column, which continues to the maximum number of columns. Then the next code is displayed second in the list of the first column.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    Setting a full-page layout

    When you select Full Page, the layout of the question uses the entire width of the page and will ignore the columns settings in the questionnaire page setup. This is useful where you require some questions, such as instructions, to be full width and other questions to be a smaller width. If you set the page width as the full width, then the layout will not change.

    Semantic layout

    Semantic scale questions use contrasting adjectives or objects where each pair of items is at opposite ends of a bipolar scale, such as Good to Poor. When you add a Semantic Scale question, this automatically selects the Semantic option in the Columns topic.

    You can also display grids as a semantic scale by selecting the Semantic button.

    This takes the first and last grid headers and displays the option boxes in between the two opposite descriptions. Note that the code labels need to be visible for each grid row.

    Compound

    When you select Compound ,the live interview shows the grids next to each other. The grids do not change position in the Questionnaire design window. There are more options available using the Compound topic.

    A screenshot of a survey

Description automatically generated

    Setting a no columns layout

    This settings removes the column layout. The codes labels display adjacent to each other with no columns. This setting is usually used with questions that show as buttons.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the column layout for a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Finding text in the questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/finding-text-in-the-questionnaire/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:42:42 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11107 You can find text in the questionnaire window when you are in Design or Style mode. Use the controls Find Next   to find the next occurrence and Find Previous   to find the previous occurrence. The box containing the search text will store any previous searches in a drop-down list, so you can repeat searches without retyping the text. This […]

    The post Finding text in the questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can find text in the questionnaire window when you are in Design or Style mode.

    1. Select Find in the toolbar topics drop-down list.
    2. Type in the search text in the empty box to the right of the topics drop-down list.
    1. Press Enter to search the questionnaire, from the current cursor position to the end of the questionnaire.This highlights the first example of the search text.
    2. Press Enter again and to search for the next example.
    3. At the end of the questionnaire, confirm to continue the search from the beginning of the questionnaire.

    Use the controls Find Next   to find the next occurrence and Find Previous   to find the previous occurrence.

    The box containing the search text will store any previous searches in a drop-down list, so you can repeat searches without retyping the text. This is cleared when the Questionnaire window is closed.

    Replacing text

    Click Find/Replace to open the Find dialog where you have more options to find and replace text.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Finding text in the questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding borders to a question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-borders-to-a-question/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:42:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11099 You can make a question stand out by adding a border. You can choose the style, width and colour of the question border. Add the border Style Specify the type of line used as a border. Width Specify the width of line used as a border. Colour Specify the border color. This change affects all […]

    The post Adding borders to a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can make a question stand out by adding a border. You can choose the style, width and colour of the question border.

    Add the border

    1. Select the question or questions in the Questionnaire window.
    2. In the topic drop-down, select Border.
    3. Choose the style, width and colour of the border. This changes all sides of the border. You can see the border changes in the Questionnaire window.
    StyleSpecify the type of line used as a border.
    WidthSpecify the width of line used as a border.
    ColourSpecify the border color.
    1. Click the Advanced button to set the appearance of each side of the border.

    This change affects all language edition of the same publication, such as all online editions, but the change is not shown in other publication editions, such as paper editions.

    Advanced border settings

    Set the border properties for each side of the border. You can see the border changes in the Questionnaire window.

    Click Close to return to the Questionnaire window.

    EdgeChoose the border edge to change (you can also click the image).
    StyleSpecify the type of line used as a border.
    WidthSpecify the width of line used as a border.
    ColourSpecify the border color.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Adding borders to a question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the question background https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-the-question-background/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:42:00 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11087 You can change the background of the page, all the question elements or a single question element, to show a plain color and/or an image as the background. The picture below shows some of the elements that can have a background color or image. Changing the background color Adding a picture to the background If […]

    The post Changing the question background appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can change the background of the page, all the question elements or a single question element, to show a plain color and/or an image as the background. The picture below shows some of the elements that can have a background color or image.

    Question elements with labels

    Changing the background color

    1. Select Background in the topic drop-down.
    2. In the next drop-down, select the area to apply the background. To apply the background to the entire question, select (All). To apply the background to the all pages, select (Page).
    3. Click the Colour button, and select a color from the palette.
    Topics toolbar showing background settings

    Adding a picture to the background

    1. Select Background in the topic drop-down.
    2. In the next drop-down, select the area to apply the background. To apply the background to the entire question, select (All). To apply the background to the all pages, select (Page).
    3. Click the Picture button. This displays the Picture dialog.
    4. Select a picture from the file name drop-down or click Browse to browse for the picture file. The picture path name is shown in the drop-down. Click Remove to clear the picture.
    1. You can align the picture horizontally using the Horizontal drop-down, with Left, Centre and Right options. You can align the picture vertically using the Vertical drop-down, with Top, Centre, Bottom options.
    2. The area assigned for the selected part of the question determines the size of the picture. For an online edition you can select Tile or Fixed to repeat or fix the image. For a paper edition you can select Stretch or Fit to resize the image or Tile and Zoom to repeat or scale the image. This can be done both horizontally and vertically.
    3. If available, you can colourize the GIF file by selecting a color from the drop-down.
    4. Click Zoom and enter a percentage value to resize the image in the background.
    5. Click OK to save the changes.

    If the background uses a color and a picture, the color shows in areas where the picture does not fill the space. The background preview area on the toolbar shows a split view with the color in the top half and the picture in the bottom half.

    Changes to the background are the same in all language editions for a single output edition, but will not change other output editions as this affects the style.

    Adding highlighting in online editions

    Highlighting a row makes it clear to the respondent which choice they are selecting. When a respondent moves the mouse over a question, the question label and answer box are highlighted in this color.

    Row highlight for selected questions

    1. Select the question or questions to highlight.
    2. Select Background in the topic drop-down.
    3. Select Row Highlight in the second drop-down list.
    4. Click the Colour button, and select a color from the palette.
    Highlighting a question

    The selected question(s) will now have a highlight when the respondent selects them in an online survey.

    Row highlight for all questions

    1. Select the question to highlight.
    2. Click Style mode StyleModeIcon.png on the Questionnaire window toolbar. This changes to style mode and the selected question highlight changes to red.
    3. To make highlighting available on all questions, select All Styles from the style menu on the left.
    4. Set the toolbar topic to Background.
    5. Select Row Highlight in the second drop-down list.
    6. Click the Colour button, and select a color from the palette.
    Applying a highlight to questions in Style mode

    All styles will now be highlighted when selected in an online questionnaire.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Changing the question background appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Aligning text https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/aligning-text/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:41:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11069 The Alignment topic controls the justification of the question elements that contain text. You can choose to align all the elements in the selected question or align an individual element. You can select the element in the drop-down or click the area of the question you want to align. The available elements are: Name, Text, Grid Name, […]

    The post Aligning text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Alignment topic controls the justification of the question elements that contain text. You can choose to align all the elements in the selected question or align an individual element. You can select the element in the drop-down or click the area of the question you want to align.

    The available elements are: Name, Text, Grid Name, Grid Label, Code Label, Code Value, Data, Code Box, Code GoTo, Footnote and Answer Area.

    • You can specify the horizontal alignment as Left, Centre or Right.
    Left alignment of code label text
    Right alignment of code label text
    • You can specify the vertical alignment as Auto, Top, Middle or Bottom. 

    The alignment set in the question style determines the default settings of the horizontal and vertical alignment.

    The alignment can be set for each edition in the survey, for example, you can change the appearance to fit a paper or online survey.

    Explore more ways of customising questions here.

    The post Aligning text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire topics: Customising questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/questionnaire-topics-customising-questions/ Mon, 29 Jan 2024 09:40:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11064 You can customise the questions in your questionnaire using the topics menu in the Questionnaire window.

    The post Questionnaire topics: Customising questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can customise the questions in your questionnaire using the topics menu in the Questionnaire window.

    • Alignment sets left, centre or right alignment for each question element.
    • Background sets the colours and patterns of the background for question elements.  To set backgrounds for the entire questionnaire use page set-up.
    • Border allows you to apply borders to questions.
    • Boxes sets the shape and size of the boxes for the question codes.
    • Break inserts a page break, column break or a section break.
    • Columns sets the number of columns used to display the question codes.
    • Compound specifies whether the grid is part of a compound grid. This is only available in Design mode.
    • Find allows text to be found and/or replaced with questionnaire text.
    • Font sets the font type,size andcolor, with settings for bold, italics, underline.
    • Margins sets the left, right, top and bottom margins for each element of a question or text item.
    • Numbering shows the method of question numbering for each question, together with inclusion and exclusion of Q’s, full stops and brackets.
    • Positions sets the position of question text and code boxes relative to each other.
    • Response sets the response type of each question to either single, multiple, quantity, literal, date or time.
    • Show enables you to select which elements you wish to display on the questionnaire, and which you would like to hide.
    • Tabs specifies the relative spaces apportioned to individual elements within a question.

    The post Questionnaire topics: Customising questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting up your online account details https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-up-your-online-account-details/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 17:35:42 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11051 Before you can create or view the online surveys in Snap XMP Desktop you will need to set up a link with a Snap XMP Online user account. You will need to enter your Snap XMP Online account details to link the surveys created in this Snap XMP Online account to Snap XMP Desktop.

    The post Setting up your online account details appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Before you can create or view the online surveys in Snap XMP Desktop you will need to set up a link with a Snap XMP Online user account. You will need to enter your Snap XMP Online account details to link the surveys created in this Snap XMP Online account to Snap XMP Desktop.

    1. Close any open surveys in Snap XMP Desktop using File/Close Survey.
    2. Click the Tailor menu and click Online Account to open the Log in to Snap XMP Online dialog.
    Log in to Snap Online with the entered user details
    1. In the Select Server section there are two options
      • Select Snap XMP Online if your account is run by Snap Surveys. Select the Snap XMP Online server to log in.
      • Select Own Server if your organisation is running Snap XMP Online on their server. Select the server URL to log in.
    2. In the User Details section enter the Email Address and Password to connect to the server.
    3. Check Remember my credentials if you would like the Password to be remembered every time you use Snap XMP Desktop.
    4. Click OK to log in to the online surveys via Snap XMP Desktop.

    The post Setting up your online account details appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Data entry tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/data-entry-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 17:30:44 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11044 The Data Entry Tailoring contains the default data entry settings for the current survey. It is split into three main areas: You can access the Data Entry Tailoring dialog by: Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Data Entry Option Description Default mode This is the default data entry mode […]

    The post Data entry tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Data Entry Tailoring contains the default data entry settings for the current survey. It is split into three main areas:

    • The way you enter data.
    • The date format and two digit date ranges.
    • The way data is verified.

    You can access the Data Entry Tailoring dialog by:

    • Clicking the Tailor | Data Entry menu item.
    • Opening the Data Entry window DataEntryIcon.png and clicking Tailor TailoringIcon.PNG .

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    Data Entry

    OptionDescription
    Default mode This is the default data entry mode shown when the Data Entry window opens. You can choose from Questionnaire, Interview or Prompted modes.
    Answer Questions There are two ways to enter the data. Continuously automatically moves to the next question for single responses. You need to press Enter to move on from Multiple, Literal, Date, Time or Quantity questions.
    Choose Individually to press Enter each time to move to the next question.
    Follow Question Routing Use the routing rules to skip over questions which are not applicable.
    Ignore Notes Skips over all Note type variables. Notes are not usually required in prompted mode but are needed in Questionnaire Mode and Interview Mode for CATI, CAPI and other questionnaires carried out using on-screen interviewing techniques.
    Allow No Replies No Reply values can be entered.
    Confirm No Replies You need to confirm No Reply is entered by confirming a warning message. This prevents accidental No Reply values being entered.
    Enforce max open length The entry for open-ended questions with a maximum length cannot exceed this maximum.
    Rotate Codes This rotates the order in which the codes of a question display. This is only suitable for online interviewing and for questions in which possible responses are read out to respondents.

    Dates

    OptionDescription
    Date formatChoose the default format for entering dates. The options are DD/MM/YYYY and MM/DD/YYYY.
    2 Digit YearsThis sets the default for any dates entered with a 2 digit years. For example with the range 1930 to 2029, the 2 digit year “30” will be treated as 1930.

    Verification

    OptionDescription
    Filter Enter a filter expression to reduce the response data to a smaller, specified group. For example, to verify the first 100 cases, specify filter CASE<=100.
    Selection Number of cases to be verified, which can be a number or a percentage. To verify all cases, enter 100% rather than the number of cases, then if more cases are added, they will automatically be verified, when required.
    Selection typeAt Random: Cases to be verified are chosen at random from those available after the filter and the selection have been applied.
    In Random Steps: Cases to be verified are chosen in case-number order at random intervals. For example, if 10% of 100 cases are to be verified in random steps the program will choose one case at random out of each group of ten, e.g. 5, 17, 21, etc.
    In Fixed Steps: Cases to be verified are chosen in case number order and at fixed intervals. For example if 10% of 100 cases are to be verified in fixed steps then cases 1, 11, 21, 31, 41, etc. will be chosen.
    Erroneous data Selects the response to replace the original data if a verification mismatch occurs.
    Remain Unchanged: This leaves any incorrect data as it is until you confirm the data. If an incorrect entry was made in a multi-punch field, it would remain as is for confirmation or alteration.
    Replaced by No Reply: This changes any incorrect data to No Reply until you confirm it.
    Ignore Literals This ignores all Literal Response variables during verification.
    Ignore paradata This ignores all paradata variables during verification.
    Paper Editions only The tailoring is only for paper editions of the questionnaire.

    The post Data entry tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring: Content https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring-content/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:49:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11007 The Content tab shows settings for HTML publishing and images in all surveys. Option Description Modify file names to Select the case for the file names, Unchanged, Lower Case and Upper Case. NR in drop down Enter the display text that is used to show that there is no reply in a drop-down. JPEG Compression […]

    The post Advanced tailoring: Content appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Content tab shows settings for HTML publishing and images in all surveys.

    OptionDescription
    Modify file names to Select the case for the file names, Unchanged, Lower Case and Upper Case.
    NR in drop downEnter the display text that is used to show that there is no reply in a drop-down.
    JPEG CompressionSelect the percentage compression of JPEG images.
    PNG transparencyChoose the PNG images transparency, Masked or Blended.

    Other Advanced Tailoring options

    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Embedding with settings for using embedded data.
    • Updates with settings and details on the Snap XMP Desktop software updates.

    The post Advanced tailoring: Content appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring: General https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring-general/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:49:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11005 These default settings apply to all the surveys used in Snap XMP Desktop. The General tab allows you to set the default settings for the way Snap XMP Desktop opens. Option Description Initial window to display Select the window that displays when you open a survey. The default is the Questionnaire window. You can also select None. […]

    The post Advanced tailoring: General appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    These default settings apply to all the surveys used in Snap XMP Desktop.

    The General tab allows you to set the default settings for the way Snap XMP Desktop opens.

    OptionDescription
    Initial window to display Select the window that displays when you open a survey. The default is the Questionnaire window. You can also select None.
    Default publicationSelect the default edition when you create a new survey.
    Separate code lists using Enter the text used between variables for text substitution with multiple variables. For example, “and” gives code1, code2 and code 3
    Auto generated label length This is the default length for code labels
    Don’t paste special unicode charactersWhen this is selected special Unicode characters will not be pasted in the Variables and Variable Details windows. This is on by default.
    Use colours in export to RTF Include colours when exporting to rich text format files
    Limit printed reports to a maximum number of pages This limits a printed report to a maximum number of pages, which is helpful for reports that contain many literal responses. The default is 500.

    Other Advanced tailoring options

    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Embedding with settings for using embedded data.
    • Updates with settings and details on the Snap XMP Desktop software updates.

    The post Advanced tailoring: General appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring: Embedding https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring-embedding/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:48:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11009 The Embedding tab displays the embedded tailoring options. This specifies how the survey data is stored in the survey. If you are sharing a survey with a different Snap XMP user, you can reduce the file size by excluding objects which come with Snap XMP. Option Description Embed Automatically Choose whether data is embedded automatically, with options […]

    The post Advanced tailoring: Embedding appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Embedding tab displays the embedded tailoring options. This specifies how the survey data is stored in the survey. If you are sharing a survey with a different Snap XMP user, you can reduce the file size by excluding objects which come with Snap XMP.

    OptionDescription
    Embed AutomaticallyChoose whether data is embedded automatically, with options Never, New Objects and Always.
    Use Embedded DataChoose to use embedded data, Never, If File Missing or Always.
    ExportChoose to export embedded data, with options No Data, File Paths Only and All Embedded Data.

    Other Advanced Tailoring options

    • General with default system settings for all surveys.
    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Updates with settings and details on the Snap XMP Desktop software updates.

    The post Advanced tailoring: Embedding appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring: Updates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring-updates/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:48:27 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=11012 In the Updates tab you can enable updates to automatically download when a new version is available. The Details section shows the update status. Other Advanced Tailoring options

    The post Advanced tailoring: Updates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In the Updates tab you can enable updates to automatically download when a new version is available. The Details section shows the update status.

    Other Advanced Tailoring options

    • General with default system settings for all surveys.
    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Embedding with settings for using embedded data.

    The post Advanced tailoring: Updates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Advanced tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/advanced-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:48:06 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10950 The Advanced Tailoring dialog contains advanced settings in four areas: You can open the Advanced Tailoring dialog using the Tailor | Advanced menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    The post Advanced tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Advanced Tailoring dialog contains advanced settings in four areas:

    • General with default system settings for all surveys.
    • Content with settings for HTML publishing and images.
    • Embedding with settings for using embedded data.
    • Updates with settings and details on the Snap XMP Desktop software updates.

    You can open the Advanced Tailoring dialog using the Tailor | Advanced menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    The post Advanced tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire design tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/questionnaire-design-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:47:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10944 These are the settings that give the default behaviour of the Questionnaire design window. You can open the dialog from the Tailor | Questionnaire Design menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Smart mode switching These settings turn on shortcuts to switch quickly between Design mode and Style mode in the […]

    The post Questionnaire design tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    These are the settings that give the default behaviour of the Questionnaire design window. You can open the dialog from the Tailor | Questionnaire Design menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    QuestionDesign.PNG

    Smart mode switching

    These settings turn on shortcuts to switch quickly between Design mode and Style mode in the Questionnaire window.

    OptionDescription
    Switch to Design Mode when typingSelect to automatically change to Design mode from Style mode when you type.
    Switch to Design Mode by double-clickSelect to automatically change to Design mode from Style mode when you double-click.
    Switch to Style Mode by double-clickSelect to automatically change to Style mode from Design mode when you double-click.

    Smart style settings

    These settings default the behaviour for creating a new style when changes are made to a question.

    OptionDescription
    Favour style changes for font settingsIf whole field selected, change the style when you change a font.
    Prompt for extended style assignmentsSelect to open Extended Style assignments dialog if you re-apply a style to a changed version of that style. This allows changing the style to match the changes or over-writing the changes.

    Renumbering

    Automatically renumber questionnaireSelect to update the numbering so it runs in sequence if questions are re-ordered. Clear to keep the numbers as they are.

    Display options

    OptionDescription
    Mode and ColourSet the selection colour highlight for the specified mode.
    Expand dropdownsSelect to display all dropdown lists in full, uncheck to only display selected list.
    Hide boxes with dataSelect to conceal the box outline around data in Data View.

    Diagnose layout

    OptionDescription
    Show formatting marksDisplay space and paragraph markers.
    Show field borders Use dotted lines to show the edges of the question components.
    Underline fallback font If a specified character is not available in the selected font, underline the font used to display the character.
    Fallback InfoClick the Fallback Info button to view any fallback fonts that have been used to display any text.

    The post Questionnaire design tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Variable tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/variable-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:47:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10937 The Variable Tailoring dialog contains the default settings for the Variables and Variable Details windows. You can open the dialog from the Tailor | Variables menu or by clicking the Tailor icon on the toolbar in the Variables or Variable Details windows. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Variable […]

    The post Variable tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Variable Tailoring dialog contains the default settings for the Variables and Variable Details windows. You can open the dialog from the Tailor | Variables menu or by clicking the Tailor icon TailoringIcon.PNG on the toolbar in the Variables or Variable Details windows.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    VariableTailor.PNG

    Variable order

    The Variable Order section selects the order that the Variables window displays the variables, by variable name or by the variable’s sequence number.

    OptionDescription
    NameSelect to display the variables in alphanumeric order by name.
    SequenceSelect to display the variables in ascending order of sequence number. When ordering by sequence, you can check the allocation of the sequence numbers.

    The Questionnaire window and Data Entry window display the variables by sequence number, so ordering by sequence displays the variables in the same order in the Variables window.

    Show overview columns

    The Show Overview Columns section contains options to add or remove content in the Variables window. The Variables window always shows the Name, Label, Type, Response and Codes columns.

    OptionDescription
    CountsSelect to display the response counts in the Variables window, which adds the columns: Sequence, Valid, No reply, Not asked and Errors.
    Routing and MaskingSelect to display the routing and masking columns in the Variables window, which adds the columns: Not Asked, Goto, Skipped by and Mask.
    Unique IdsSelect to display the variable id column in the Variables window, which adds the column Id.

    Show counts in details

    The Show Counts in Details section contains options to add or remove response counts in the Variable Details window. The Variable Details window loads more quickly when you do not display the counts, especially when there are a large number of responses.

    OptionDescription
    NeverDoes not display the counts, which is the best option for large surveys. The routing is displayed in the Not Asked column when this option is selected.
    If variable is activeCounts will be displayed if the selected variable is already active (showing counts). 
    AlwaysAlways displays a count of data responses for each code, if available.
    Show code valuesDisplays code values in brackets next to the values in the Code list.

    Save options

    The table shows the buttons to save or cancel changes in the tailoring dialog.

    OptionDescription
    KeepKeep or save the changes as part of the current survey.
    Use Uses the changes for the duration of the session. The setting reverts to the original settings after closing the survey.
    Cancel Cancel any changes and close the dialog.

    The post Variable tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Reference tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/reference-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:46:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10948 The reference tailoring allows you to specify: The Reference tailoring is available by clicking the Tailor | Reference menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Topic language The Reference window displays the topic names in the preferred topic language. This is the same for all language versions. The options […]

    The post Reference tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The reference tailoring allows you to specify:

    • the language used to display the topic names
    • how the preview pane appears

    The Reference tailoring is available by clicking the Tailor | Reference menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    reftailor.PNG

    Topic language

    The Reference window displays the topic names in the preferred topic language. This is the same for all language versions.

    The options are:

    • Automatic, where the topic name appears in the same language as the variables within the topic. You can set this on the Reference window toolbar.
    • A language in the SurveyPak, where the topic name always appears in the specified language.

    Preview Pane

    You can specify how the selected variable is shown in the Preview pane.
    The options are:

    • Not scaled, appears as the same size and proportions as it appears in the Questionnaire window.
    • Scaled to fit window, appears in the same proportions as it appears in the Questionnaire window, but scaled to fit in the preview pane.
    • Scaled if too wide, appears in the same proportions as it appears in the Questionnaire window, but only scaled if too wide to appear in the preview pane.
    • Drawn to fit window, appears as the same size as it would in the Questionnaire window, but with proportions suitable to the preview pane.

    The post Reference tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Analysis variables tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysis-variables-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:46:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10946 The Analysis Variables Tailoring dialog provides settings which control the overall presentation of analyses and dictate how missing data is to be handled. The Analysis Variables Tailoring dialog is available by clicking the Tailoring | Analysis Variables menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop. Tailoring options Option Description Results Set to the […]

    The post Analysis variables tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Analysis Variables Tailoring dialog provides settings which control the overall presentation of analyses and dictate how missing data is to be handled.

    The Analysis Variables Tailoring dialog is available by clicking the Tailoring | Analysis Variables menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/an_var_tail.png

    Tailoring options

    OptionDescription
    Results Set to the number of significant figures used in the results
    Percentages Set to the number of decimal places used to display percentages
    Calculations Set to the number of significant figures used in calculations
    % Sign Select to display the percentage (%) signs
    Exclude case Completely exclude a case if one of its variable responses is missing
    Substitute mean If a case has a missing variable response, substitute the mean of the other valid responses to the variable

    Save options

    The table shows the buttons used to save or cancel changes in the tailoring dialog.

    OptionDescription
    Keep Apply the tailoring and keep it as the default setting for the current survey.
    Use Use the changes only for the duration of the session. The setting reverts to the original settings when the dialog is closed.
    RestoreCancel changes but leave the dialog open.
    Cancel Cancel changes and close the dialog.

    The post Analysis variables tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Reports tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/reports-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:46:14 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10939 The Reports Tailoring dialog sets the defaults used to export the report to a printer or file. If exporting to a file, you can import the results into a spreadsheet or other available file type. The Reports Tailoring dialog is available from the Tailoring | Reports menu. Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap […]

    The post Reports tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Reports Tailoring dialog sets the defaults used to export the report to a printer or file. If exporting to a file, you can import the results into a spreadsheet or other available file type.

    The Reports Tailoring dialog is available from the Tailoring | Reports menu.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    ReportTailor.PNG

    Tailoring options

    OptionDescription
    Reports will be output to Printer: Send the report to the printer in the specified layout
    Export: Write the report to a file of the specified format and in the specified directory
    Page Details Open the Page Setup dialog to specify how the report will be printed.
    File Details Open the File Details dialog to specify how the report files will be numbered, and whether the data will be appended or overwritten
    Export file type Specify the format of the file required by the package that you are exporting.

    Save options

    The table shows the buttons to save or cancel changes in the tailoring dialog.

    OptionDescription
    Keep Keep or save the changes as part of the current survey.
    Use Use the changes only for the duration of the session. The setting revert to the original settings when the dialog is closed.
    Cancel Cancel any changes and close the dialog.

    The post Reports tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Spellings tailoring https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/spellings-tailoring/ Mon, 22 Jan 2024 12:45:57 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10941 Spell checking is essential to make sure that the text throughout your survey is accurate. The spell checking settings determine how the text is spell checked in each survey. They are set in the Spell Checker Options dialog, which is accessible from the Tailor | Spelling menu in Snap XMP Desktop. Tailoring survey settings are […]

    The post Spellings tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Spell checking is essential to make sure that the text throughout your survey is accurate. The spell checking settings determine how the text is spell checked in each survey. They are set in the Spell Checker Options dialog, which is accessible from the Tailor | Spelling menu in Snap XMP Desktop.

    Tailoring survey settings are available for other windows in Snap XMP Desktop.

    https://www.snapsurveys.com/help/spl_chk_opt.png

    Spelling options

    OptionDescription
    Always suggest corrections Always check text and suggest possible correct spellings from the selected dictionaries.
    Suggest from main dictionaries only Check text from the main dictionaries selected and ignore the custom dictionary
    Ignore words in UPPERCASE Do not spell check words that are all capitals or uppercase letters.
    Ignore words with numbers Do not spell check words that include digits, e.g. frog1, rel8.
    Ignore internet and file addresses Do not spell check word combinations that look like file path names or internet addresses

    Custom dictionary

    A further dictionary, named “Custom.dic” is provided with Snap XMP Desktop. The custom dictionary stores the user’s own library of regularly used words that may not appear in the standard dictionaries. You can also create further specialist dictionaries to keep organisation-specific or industry-specific words in their own dictionary.

    Click the Dictionaries button from the Custom dictionary section. This opens the Custom Dictionaries dialog.

    • Click New to create a new custom dictionary and Remove to delete the selected custom dictionary
    • Click Edit to add words to the selected custom dictionary.
    • Click OK to save the changes.

    Main dictionaries

    Snap XMP Desktop comes with 13 standard dictionaries covering a range of different languages. The Main dictionaries section contains the list of standard dictionaries. During spell checking, if the standard dictionaries do not contain the word, then the spell check searches the custom dictionary. If the word is valid, then you can add it to the custom dictionary for future use.

    Click the Dictionaries button from the Main dictionary section. This opens the Main Dictionaries dialog, where you can select additional standard dictionaries or add an extra language dictionary.

    The post Spellings tailoring appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding a CAPTCHA style question https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-a-captcha-style-question/ Thu, 16 Nov 2023 09:53:52 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10755 CAPTCHA is a term that stands for Completely Automated Public Turing Test to Tell Computers and Humans Apart. It is a type of challenge-response test that is used to determine whether the user of a website or online service is a human or a bot. CAPTCHAs are designed to be easy for humans to solve, […]

    The post Adding a CAPTCHA style question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    CAPTCHA is a term that stands for Completely Automated Public Turing Test to Tell Computers and Humans Apart. It is a type of challenge-response test that is used to determine whether the user of a website or online service is a human or a bot. CAPTCHAs are designed to be easy for humans to solve, but hard for bots and other malicious software to figure out. By using CAPTCHAs, websites can prevent spam, abuse, and automated attacks from bots.

    Some examples of CAPTCHAs are:

    • A checkbox that says, “I’m not a robot”.
    • A set of images that the user has to select based on a given criteria (e.g., select all the traffic lights).
    • A distorted text or audio that the user must type or speak.
    • A mathematical equation or a logic puzzle that the user must solve.

    This help page shows you how to create a CAPTCHA , by adding a mathematical calculation image to your survey, which will automatically show a different image based on the time that the participant starts the survey. However, you can create a CAPTCHA that can change at different rates or using different criteria. We have supplied you with various images to allow for an image change every five seconds. The calculation can be as complex as you require.

    The CAPTCHA works best at the start or end of the survey. We recommend that the CAPTCHA is displayed on a separate page, using a page break.

    Please note:

    • CAPTCHA is not currently available on text only accessible surveys where the strict rules and no dynamic content are set.
    • This CAPTCHA option does not detect bots, however it may slow them down.

    Downloading the sample CAPTCHA images

    To help use a CAPTCHA in your survey we have provided some sample images.

    Download the sample CAPTCHA images here: captcha-images.zip

    Example CAPTCHA style question

    Create the derived variable

    1. Once you have created your survey, you will need to create a derived variable based on the ID.start paradata variable.
    2. Select the Variables icon on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
    3. Click on the New Variable button
    4. Give the variable the name ‘time’.
    5. Select the Type as Derived and the Response as Single.
    6. In the Code list, add the following, with each on a separate line:
      • Label ‘1’ and Value ‘ID.start second<16’
      • Label ‘2’ and Value ‘ID.start second<31’
      • Label ‘3’ and Value ‘ID.start second<46’
      • Label ‘4’ and Value ‘true’
    1. Save the derived variable and return to the Questionnaire design window.

    Add the CAPTCHA images

    1. In the Questionnaire design window, add four Open Ended style questions at the start or end of the questionnaire.
    2. In each of the questions, add a conditionally asked routing rule based on each code label in the derived variable. For example, in the first question set time = 1, the second question set time = 2 and so on.
    1. To insert the CAPTCHA image, place the cursor in the question text area of the first Open Ended question then click the Insert | Image menu.
    2. Enter the image file name or click Browse to select the image file. Set the Zoom and Alt Text as required. Click OK.
    3. Repeat this for each question, inserting a different CAPTCHA image for each question. This example uses four of the calculation images.
    4. On each of the Open Ended questions make sure the following are set in the Questionnaire Properties
      • Must Answer set to Yes
      • Box Scaling set to Fixed
      • Valid set to the answer to the image question.
    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated
    1. Change the position of the Open Ended box so that is next to the calculation image.
      • Click on Positions from the second drop down box.
      • Change the Question to Beside.
    1. Save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Invalid CAPTCHA during the interview

    If the wrong answer is given, a warning is shown to alert the respondent that they need to re-enter the CAPTCHA response.

    The post Adding a CAPTCHA style question appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using Google fonts in a survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/installing-google-fonts-in-survey/ Tue, 14 Nov 2023 13:56:55 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=10742 Google Fonts are open source and you can use them in any non-commercial or commercial project. They are free to use in your surveys. Find out more at: Google Fonts Frequently Asked Questions. Finding the Google Font Using the Google Font in a survey After you have installed the Google Font, you can use it […]

    The post Using Google fonts in a survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Google Fonts are open source and you can use them in any non-commercial or commercial project. They are free to use in your surveys. Find out more at: Google Fonts Frequently Asked Questions.

    Finding the Google Font

    1. Search Google Fonts or enter “https://fonts.google.com/” in your web browser. This page shows a list of available fonts with example text showing how the font looks.
    2. Once you have found your desired font, click on the font to see all the different styles, for example, bold or italic. Click ‘Download Family’, found in the upper right-hand corner. This will download the font file to the downloads area on your device.
    3. Install the fonts on your device. This is dependent on the device’s operating system and your organisation’s security procedures.
    4. Select the appropriate font style by clicking on the Select option on the right of the font (in this case we have used Roboto Condensed Regular 400)

    Using the Google Font in a survey

    After you have installed the Google Font, you can use it in your surveys.

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select the Style Mode icon .
    3. Select All Styles from the first drop down menu.

    .

    1. Select Font from the second dropdown.
    2. Select (All) from the third dropdown.
    3. Replace the font in the fourth dropdown to the desired font. This will replace the font for all the text in the survey.

    Linking the Google Font for interviewing

    1. In your web browser, open Google Fonts again and select the View Selected Fonts icon in the upper right-hand corner of the page. (This may also be called View Selected Families with a different icon in the upper right-hand corner.)
    2. A new panel will appear, copy the Use on the Web text, making sure the <link> option is selected.
    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the survey in the Questionnaire window in Design mode. You need to add the Google Font using a custom html field at the beginning of your logo.
    2. Insert the cursor at the start of your logo.
    3. Right click then select Insert|HTML Field from the pop-up menu.
    4. Select Custom HTML.
    5. Paste the code from Google Fonts in the HTML field.
    6. Click OK.

    If you have different logos or title fields on each edition, you will need to repeat this for each edition.

    Questionnaire Design View

    The Questionnaire design view of your survey should look like this:

    Save your survey and upload to Snap XMP Online.

    Remember to check all editions of the questionnaire where you want the new font to be used.

    Interviewing with the Google Font

    Your online survey should appear with the Google Fonts.

    The post Using Google fonts in a survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Command Lines for Snap XMP Desktop https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/command-lines-for-snap-xmp-desktop/ Mon, 11 Sep 2023 11:18:33 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=9901 Opening a survey Option Online/Offline Description Example “filename” offline Opens with the survey filename. This is equivalent to double-clicking on the file. The operation distinguishes between MDF, ADF, TMDF files. “snap Desktop.exe” “snSurvey.mdf” /S Opens the last used survey “snap Desktop.exe” /S /S “filename” offline Opens the named survey. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” “snap Desktop.exe” […]

    The post Command Lines for Snap XMP Desktop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Opening a survey
    Option Online/Offline Description Example
    “filename” offline Opens with the survey filename. This is equivalent to double-clicking on the file. The operation distinguishes between MDF, ADF, TMDF files. “snap Desktop.exe” “snSurvey.mdf”
    /S Opens the last used survey “snap Desktop.exe” /S
    /S “filename” offline Opens the named survey. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf”
    “snap Desktop.exe” /S “c:\myfolder\snSurvey.mdf”
    /S “path\” offline Opens with the current survey overview folder set to path Make sure to include the trailing ‘\’. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “c:\myfolder\”
    /S {surveyid} online Opens an online survey using the SOL id (a guid).
    Requires the server and account details to be set up first (including “remember credentials”)
    The {surveyid} can be found from “Tailor|Online Details…” when the survey is open.
    “snap Desktop.exe” /S {541963AE-B5AF-4D6D-95E8-804B196E5687}

    Make sure that you don’t use quote marks unless you have an offline survey named after a guid
    /S #”filename” online Use # to open an online survey using the display name in the root folder (“my work”)
    Requires the server and account details to be set up first (including “remember credentials”)
    “snap Desktop.exe” /S #”snSurvey”
    /S #”path\filename” online Use # to open an online survey, specify folder names from the root folder using backslash(\) Requires the server and account details to be set up first (including “remember credentials”) “snap Desktop.exe” /S #”folder\snSurvey”
    /S #”\filename” online Use # with a leading backslash to open an online survey in any online folder.
    Requires the server and account details to be set up first (including “remember credentials”)
    If there is more than one match then the command line will fail.

    “snap Desktop.exe” /S #”\snSurvey”

    “snap Desktop.exe” /S #”\folder\snSurvey”

    Repairing a survey

    Option

    Secondary option

    Online/Offline

    Description

    Example

    /S /R offline Repair the named survey. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /R

    Updating a survey

    Option

    Secondary option

    Description

    Example

    /S /U Update the named survey. Opens, upgrades (if needed), syncs data cases if online, then closes. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /U
    “snap Desktop.exe” /S “c:\myfolder\snSurvey.mdf” /U

    Exporting and Importing a SNIF file

    Option

    Secondary option

    Online/Offline

    Description

    Example

    /S /EX offline Export the named survey to a SNIF file.
    If no SNIF filename is specified, then the survey is exported to the clipboard.
    “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /EX “snSurvey.sif”
    /IS “filename”

    offline Import a SNIF file. “snap Desktop.exe” /IS “snSurvey.xml”

    Run a report

    Option

    Secondary option

    Additional options

    Description

    Example

    /S /B “batch”

    Execute the named batch report.
    The export method is specified by the current tailoring.
    “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /B “bt1”

    /F “expression” Apply a filter. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /B “bt1” /F “Q1=1”

    /N “printname” Specify the Name of the print job. Only useful when using a program like Ghost script to turn the job name into a file name “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /B “bt1” /N “output.pdf”
    /C q = “val” Specify the value of q@context “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /C q1=1 /C q2=”example” /B bt1

    /XS “filename” Specifies the eXternal Survey when running a suitable batch report “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /XS “snBenchmarks.mdf” /B bt1

    Print from the Questionnaire window

    Option

    Secondary option

    Additional options

    Description

    Example

    /P “filename” Print questionnaire design window “snap Desktop.exe” /P “snSurvey.mdf”
    /S /P

    Print questionnaire design window “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /P
    /V Print values from the raw data (data view of design window, all cases) “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /P /V
    /V “dbLink” Print values from the named data base link (Panel data view of design window, all cases) data link must be an ‘import all cases’ type. dbLink name is case sensitive. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /P /V “Customer Details

    /V /F “expression” Apply a filter. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /P /V /F “case <= 10”
    /V /O sep “dbLink” Print panel view data cases separated into separate print jobs “snap Desktop.exe” /S “Survey.mdf” /P /V /O sep

    /ED “edition” Specify the edition to use in the design window. The name must be an exact match, including any spaces. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /P /ED “Paper: Keyed”
    /L “lang” Specify the Language to use in the design window.
    Use either the name of the language or the 2 letter code.
    “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /P /ED “Paper: Keyed” /L “French”

    /N “printname” Specify the Name of the print job. Only useful when using a program like Ghost script to turn the job name into a file name “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /P /N “output.pdf”

    Run a database link

    Option Secondary option Description Example
    /S /DB “dblink” Execute a named database link from the data entry window. dbLink name is case sensitive. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /DB “Customer Details”

    Open with a specified window

    Option Secondary option Additional options Description Example
    /S /Q

    Open survey with the Questionnaire design window open “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /Q
    /ED “edition” Specify the edition to use in the design window. The name must be an exact match, including any spaces. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /Q /ED “Paper: Keyed”
    /L “lang” Specify the language to use in the design window. Use either the name of the language or the 2 letter code. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /Q /L “fr”
    /D Open survey with the Data entry window open “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /D
    /B Open the Batch reports overview “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /B
    /T Open survey with the results overview window open (Tables) “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /T
    /W Open survey with the weights overview window open. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /W

    Running options

    Option Description Example
    /y Suppress message boxes without logging “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /B bt1 /y
    /Y Suppress message boxes and record the messages and default answers in file SnapMessageLog.txt.
    The output file is in the “all users public documents” area, typically C:\Users\Public\Documents\Snap Desktop\SnapMessageLog.txt, provided that the user has write access
    “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /B bt1 /Y
    /Y “filename” As above, but the user can specify the location of the log file. “snap Desktop.exe” /S “snSurvey.mdf” /B bt1 /Y “c:\myfolder\mylog.txt”
    -#num Selects a licence when multiple licences are available. ‘num’ is the index of the licence file. “snap Desktop.exe” -#1

    General considerations

    You may leave out speech marks, but they are always required if the value contains either a space or a forward slash ‘/’. Note that “snap desktop.exe” contains a space, and so must appear within quotes.

    Speech marks are always double quotes, single quotes are not supported.

    Most options ignore case; however the case-sensitive options are: /y, /Y, /DB “dbLink”, and /V “dbLink” where the correct case has to be used for the “dbLink” name.

    Return values

    The program returns 0 if the command line is successful.

    • 0: Success
    • 1: Unspecified Error
    • 2: File Not Found
    • 3: File Access Error
    • 4: Data Error
    • 5: Object Not Found
    • 6: Process Aborted
    • 7: Licence Error
    • 8: Terminal Error
    • 9: Repair Failed
    • 10: Validation Failed (eg SOL login)
    • 11: Action Not Supported (eg some command line options do not work with online surveys)
    • Other value: Unexpected Error

    The post Command Lines for Snap XMP Desktop appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Question Styles https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/question-styles/ Thu, 13 Jul 2023 13:08:32 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=9565 Snap XMP comes with an extensive number of question styles that you can use in your questionnaire design. Sample survey showing Snap XMP question styles To help you design your questionnaire we have created a survey explaining all the question types and letting you see how they look in an interview. This survey gives an […]

    The post Question Styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP comes with an extensive number of question styles that you can use in your questionnaire design.

    Sample survey showing Snap XMP question styles

    To help you design your questionnaire we have created a survey explaining all the question types and letting you see how they look in an interview. This survey gives an example of each question type available in Snap XMP. You can select the question types that you are interested or view the survey in full.

    Links to help on question styles

    The post Question Styles appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Randomising the order of your questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/randomising-order-of-questions/ Mon, 26 Jun 2023 10:24:35 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=9425 Showing the questions in the same order for every interview can introduce biases in the responses to the questionnaire. Answers are often influenced by the order in which questions are asked, often favouring the first and last items, or questions asked earlier in the interview may influence answers given to later questions. If you have […]

    The post Randomising the order of your questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Showing the questions in the same order for every interview can introduce biases in the responses to the questionnaire. Answers are often influenced by the order in which questions are asked, often favouring the first and last items, or questions asked earlier in the interview may influence answers given to later questions. If you have blocks of similar questions, respondents sometimes answer all the blocks in the same way. Randomising the order that the questions appear in an interview helps to reduce any answer biases.

    Snap XMP provides a number of ways to randomise the order of your questions:

    • You can define a group of consecutive questions that will be randomised. This is called a randomised block of variables.
    • You can randomise several blocks of variables and this may contain further combinations of fixed blocks of variables or randomised blocks of variables
    • Advanced options let you build complex randomisation with nested blocks.

    In Snap XMP, you can also randomize the order of question choices in a closed question or the order of rows in a grid question.

    Adding the randomised blocks

    The randomised question blocks are created and edited in the Randomisation dialog, available in the Questionnaire Design window.

    1. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire Design window.
    2. Click the Randomise icon on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Randomisation dialog. In this dialog, you can create blocks of variables that randomise the question order in the questionnaire.
    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated
    1. Click the Add button to start defining your randomisation blocks. This opens the Block Details dialog.
    2. There are 2 block types available:
      • A randomised block of variables: This lets you randomise a block of consecutive questions or variables.
      • Randomise several blocks of variables: This lets you build randomisation blocks containing more than one block of variables.

    A randomised block of variables

    This option lets you define one block containing consecutive questions or variables that will be shown in a random order.

    1. Select the Block Type: A randomised block of variables. This enables the First variable and Last variable drop-down lists.
    2. In the First variable drop-down, select the variable that starts the block.
    3. In the Last variable drop-down, you will see all the variables that come after the First variable. Select the variable that finishes the block.
    1. Click OK. The block appears in the list of Questionnaire blocks.
    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    Randomise several blocks of variables

    This option lets you define multiple blocks containing consecutive questions or variables that are shown in a random order.

    1. Select the Block Type: Randomise several blocks of variables. This defines the main block that will contain other child or nested blocks.
    2. Click OK. The block appears in the list of Questionnaire blocks. Now you can add other blocks of variables.
    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated
    1. To add a block, select the Randomise several blocks item in the list of Questionnaire blocks then click the Add button. This opens the Block Details dialog.
    1. There are 2 block types available. (You may see 4 block types when the advanced option is on.)
      • A fixed block of variables: This lets you define a block of variables that will be shown in the order set in the questionnaire.
      • A randomised block of variables: This lets you randomise a block of consecutive questions or variables.
    2. Select the required block Type. The First variable and Last variable drop-down lists become enabled.
    3. In the First variable drop-down, select the variable that starts the block.
    4. In the Last variable drop-down, you will see all the variables that come after the First variable. Select the variable that finishes the block.
    5. Click OK. The block appears in the list of Questionnaire blocks.
    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated
    1. Repeat this process until you have entered all the required blocks.

    Fixed Variables

    When creating a group of randomised variables, you may wish to fix the position of some of the variables, such as headings or instructions that need to be shown at the top.

    Variables within the randomised block can be set as fixed using the Fixed Variable setting.

    1. In the Randomisation dialog, select the Block Type: A randomised block of variables. This enables the First variable and Last variable drop-down lists.
    2. In the First variable drop-down, select the variable that starts the block.
    3. In the Last variable drop-down, you will see all the variables that come after the First variable. Select the variable that finishes the block. This enables the Select button.
    1. Click the Select button. This shows a list of all the variables in the randomised block.
    1. Select the variables that you want to stay in the fixed position.
    2. Click OK to save the changes.
    3. The Details section shows the block information, including the fixed variables.

    Removing blocks

    1. In the Randomisation dialog, select the block that you wish to remove. If you select a block with child blocks, then this action removes all the child blocks as well as the block selected.
    2. Click the Remove button.
    3. You are asked to confirm the deletion. Click OK to remove the blocks, otherwise click Cancel.

    Editing blocks

    1. In the Randomisation dialog, select the block that you wish to edit.
    2. Click the Edit button.
    3. Edit the Block type, First variable and Last variable.
    4. Click OK to save the changes, otherwise click Cancel.

    Errors

    When there are errors in the questionnaire blocks, you will see a red cross next to the blocks that have an error. If you save the blocks with an error, then the Randomise icon is shown with a red cross .

    For example, the randomisation blocks cannot contain overlapping groups of variables. If this happens, a red cross is displayed next to the questions that overlap. When you select the block with an error, a description of the error is shown in the Details section.

    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated

    Conflicts with routing and text substitution

    If your survey uses routing or text substitution, you need to consider the effects of randomising the question order, as routing and text substitution use the answers to previous questions.

    For example, if you create a randomisation block containing three questions: Q1, Q2 and Q3 where there is also routing set on the questionnaire that Q2 and Q3 are shown only when the first answer is selected in Q1 (Q1=1).

    Here are all the possible combinations:

    • Q1, Q2, Q3: randomisation OK (because it is the original sequence)
    • Q1, Q3, Q2: randomisation OK
    • Q2, Q1, Q3: randomisation cancelled because Q2 needs to be after Q1
    • Q2, Q3, Q1: randomisation cancelled because Q2 and Q3 need to be after Q1
    • Q3, Q1, Q2: randomisation cancelled because Q3 needs to be after Q1
    • Q3, Q2, Q1: randomisation cancelled because Q3 and Q2 need to be after Q1

    In this example, you can see that routing is prioritised and the randomisation is cancelled when Q1 is not first in the randomisation sequence. Removing Q1 from the randomisation block, would allow both randomisation of Q2 and Q3, and routing to work.

    Examples

    In these examples, the question numbers have been included to show the randomisation. Usually, you would not show the question number so the respondent is unaware that the questions are randomised.

    Creating a randomised block of variables

    This is a group of individual, consecutive questions that are shown in a random order when the respondent is completing the questionnaire.

    1. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire Design window. This example has 5 questions about an instructor’s performance.
    1. Click the Randomise icon on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Randomisation dialog.
    2. Click the Add button to start defining the randomised block of questions. This opens the Block Details dialog.
    3. Select the Block Type: A randomised block of variables. This enables the First variable and Last variable drop-down lists.
    4. In the First variable drop-down, select the variable that starts the block.
    5. In the Last variable drop-down, you will see all the variables that come after the First variable. Select the variable that finishes the block.
    1. Click OK. The block appears in the list of Questionnaire blocks.

    When the questionnaire is completed by a respondent they will see the questions in a random order. From the question numbers you can see that the questions are in a different order than the questionnaire design.

    Randomising several blocks of variables

    You can randomise blocks of questions. The two options are

    1. Randomising the blocks, but keeping the questions within those blocks in the original order
    2. Randomising the blocks, and also randomising the questions within those blocks

    Randomising several blocks that contain questions in the original order

    1. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire Design window.
    2. Click the Randomise icon on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Randomisation dialog.
    3. Click the Add button to start defining your randomisation blocks. This opens the Block Details dialog.
    4. Select the Block Type: Randomise several blocks of variables. This defines the block that will contain the other blocks.
    1. Click OK. The block appears in the list of Questionnaire blocks. Now you can add other blocks of variables.
    2. To add a block, select the Randomise several blocks item in the list of Questionnaire blocks then click the Add button. This opens the Block Details dialog.
    1. Select the block type: A fixed block of variables. The First variable and Last variable drop-down lists become enabled.
    2. In the First variable drop-down, select the variable that starts the block.
    3. In the Last variable drop-down, you will see all the variables that come after the First variable. Select the variable that finishes the block.
    4. Click OK. The block appears in the list of Questionnaire blocks.
    1. Repeat this process until you have entered all the required blocks.

    Randomising several blocks that contain questions in a random order

    1. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire Design window.
    2. Click the Randomise icon on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Randomisation dialog.
    3. Click the Add button to start defining your randomisation blocks. This opens the Block Details dialog.
    4. Select the Block Type: Randomise several blocks of variables. This defines the block that will contain the other blocks.
    1. Click OK. The block appears in the list of Questionnaire blocks. Now you can add other blocks of variables.
    2. To add a block, select the Randomise several blocks item in the list of Questionnaire blocks then click the Add button. This opens the Block Details dialog.
    3. Select the block type: A randomised block of variables. The First variable and Last variable drop-down lists become enabled.
    4. In the First variable drop-down, select the variable that starts the block.
    5. In the Last variable drop-down, you will see all the variables that come after the First variable. Select the variable that finishes the block.
    6. Click OK. The block appears in the list of Questionnaire blocks.
    1. Repeat this process until you have entered all the required blocks.

    The post Randomising the order of your questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Technical summary https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/technical-summary/ Wed, 19 Apr 2023 13:12:09 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=9097 Questionnaire design Maximum number of questions/variables 65,000 Maximum number of codes per question or variable 2,000 Maximum length of variable label 1,000 characters Maximum length of routing and validation expressions 1,000 characters Maximum length of name 16 characters Maximum length of question text 1,000 characters Maximum length of each code label 1,000 characters Maximum length […]

    The post Technical summary appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Questionnaire design

    Maximum number of questions/variables

    65,000

    Maximum number of codes per question or variable

    2,000

    Maximum length of variable label

    1,000 characters

    Maximum length of routing and validation expressions

    1,000 characters

    Maximum length of name

    16 characters

    Maximum length of question text

    1,000 characters

    Maximum length of each code label

    1,000 characters

    Maximum length of each grid label

    1,000 characters

    Maximum length of each code “go to” label

    1,000 characters

    Maximum length of “literal” responses

    9,999 characters

    Maximum value of quantity responses

    2^31

    Data entry

    Maximum number of cases

    100,000 in the standard version

    100 million in the extended version (DBX)

    Maximum size of each case

    2,000,000 characters (number of positions) 1,000,000 student 32,000 evaluation

    Data analysis

    Maximum size of tables

    2,000 codes for one-way tables

    5,000,000 cells for cross-tabulations, with a maximum of 2,000 codes as a row or a column

    Maximum length of analysis/break field

    1,000 characters

    Maximum length of filter field

    1,000 characters

    Maximum number of digits in a table cell

    8 digits

    Maximum instructions in a report

    225

    Data import/export

    Import of survey datatriple-s format files from survey and statistical packages
    SAV format files from SPSS
    Tab or comma separated files
    SnIF (Snap Interchange Format)
    Export of survey data/resultstriple-s format files from survey and statistical packages
    SAV format files from SPSS
    Tab or comma separated files
    Enhanced metafile
    Rich text format (Questionnaire window)
    SnIF (Snap Interchange Format)
    Analyses may be exported to HTML and BMP format

    The post Technical summary appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Changing the colour of the default Summary Reports https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/changing-colour-of-default-summary-reports/ Thu, 19 Jan 2023 11:41:10 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8540 The charts within the Summary and Summary Dashboard reports use a Chart Style that is saved within the Styles folder of Snap XMP Desktop. In order to edit the format of the charts within these 2 reports, the Horizontal Bar Summary Report chart style needs to be edited. Steps 1. Create a chart using the […]

    The post Changing the colour of the default Summary Reports appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>

    The charts within the Summary and Summary Dashboard reports use a Chart Style that is saved within the Styles folder of Snap XMP Desktop.

    In order to edit the format of the charts within these 2 reports, the Horizontal Bar Summary Report chart style needs to be edited.

    Steps

    1. Create a chart using the Horizontal Bar Summary Report style
    2. Make the required styling edits to the chart
    3. Save the chart style, replacing the original
    4. Run the reports to check the are reports are as expected

    1. Create a chart using the Horizontal Bar Summary Report style

    2. Make the required styling edits to the chart

    Double click on a blue bar, open the Series1 folder and select Datapoint Defaults

    Edit the Fill Color, using the RGB (Red / Green / Blue).

    3. Save the chart style, replacing the original

    Right click to Save Style

    Save the chart style (using the original name of Horizontal Bar Summary Report) in the Styles folder of Snap XMP Desktop.

    This will replace the original file.

    As a backup, you might wish to store a copy of the original file elsewhere, should you wish to go back to the original style at a later date.

    4. Run the reports to check the are reports are as expected

    The post Changing the colour of the default Summary Reports appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using placeholder text https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-placeholder-text/ Tue, 10 Jan 2023 11:14:43 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8522 Placeholder text, also known as ghost text, lets you display initial text which describes the expected type of response. This helps the respondent reply to the question with relevant information. Once a respondent starts entering text in the question box, then this removes the placeholder text. Placeholder text is available for all open-ended questions. Adding […]

    The post Using placeholder text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Placeholder text, also known as ghost text, lets you display initial text which describes the expected type of response. This helps the respondent reply to the question with relevant information. Once a respondent starts entering text in the question box, then this removes the placeholder text. Placeholder text is available for all open-ended questions.

    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

    Adding placeholder text

    1. Select the open-ended question in the questionnaire.
    2. Select Show from the second dropdown.
    1. Select Placeholder in the third drop-down then select the Show checkbox. This enables the from drop-down.
    2. Select the label that will provide the placeholder text.
    3. If the label is visible, select the label and enter the placeholder text.
    4. If the label is hidden, click the Variable Properties icon on the Questionnaire toolbar. This opens the Variable Properties dialog. Enter the placeholder text in the Value column for the selected label. Click OK.
    Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated

    The placeholder text is shown in a light grey color.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Using placeholders in an interview

    In an interview the question shows the placeholder text as it is displayed in the Questionnaire design window.

    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

    When the respondent enters the first character in the text box then the placeholder text is removed and replaced with the respondent’s response.

    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated

    The post Using placeholder text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating database links to upload participants https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-database-links-to-upload-participants/ Wed, 14 Dec 2022 18:01:37 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8471 Database links can be used to link a file or database containing participant information to a survey. The participant information can include logins, details used to seed the questionnaire, as well as email addresses and seeding used to send email invitations. Creating a database link lets you Database links are created using the database link […]

    The post Creating database links to upload participants appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Database links can be used to link a file or database containing participant information to a survey. The participant information can include logins, details used to seed the questionnaire, as well as email addresses and seeding used to send email invitations.

    Creating a database link lets you

    • provide the participants’ names and email addresses
    • set up a requirement to login and seed the survey with participants’ login data
    • seed the questionnaire with participants’ data
    • create email invitations and reminders

    Database links are created using the database link wizard.

    There is initial setup that is necessary for all database links.

    1. Create the participant data file with the correct data. This may be a database or data file, such as a CSV or Excel file.
    2. Create the database link
    3. Select the participant data file.

    There are several options available for linking participants following the initial setup stages.

    1. Sending email invitations only with the option to seed the email invitation
    2. Using Logins only with the option to seed the questionnaire
    3. Using Logins and sending email invitations with the option to seed both the email invitation and the questionnaire

    Following the database link set up you need to run the database link to upload the participant data to the survey.

    Creating the participant data file

    What you need in your database (for seed data, email invites and/or logins)

    To send emails

    To login participants

    To seed data into your survey

    A unique email address for each respondent

    A unique login for all participants (this can be their email address)

    A database field for each survey variable that you want to load with data

    This table shows the required elements for each database record for the different operations.

     

    Unique email address

    Unique participant login

    Participant password

    Fields containing data

    Send email invitations

    Image: tick

     

     

     

    Participant’s login

     Emails do not have to be unique for login

    Image: tick  (May be email address)

    If required

     

    Seed data

     

    Image: tick  (May be email address)

     

    Image: tick  One database field per survey variable to load with data

    An example of an Excel database file is shown below.

    Example of an Excel spreadsheet used to import data

    This database file contains

    • unique email addresses used to send email invitations
    • usernames and password data used for participant logins
    • two columns that contain seed data, First name and Age (from a single choice age range question)

    Creating the database link

    1. Open the survey in Snap XMP Desktop.
    2. Click Database Links   on the toolbar or select File | Database links to display the Database Links dialog box.
    3. Click New to create a new database link. The Database Linkage Wizard is displayed.
    4. Select the Online Invites/Logins/Seeding radio button as the Linkage Type. This is the default option.
    Create a database link for uploading participants
    1. Click Next to move to the Select Database page.

    Selecting the participant database or file

    1. In the Select Database page, you can select the link to your participants’ data. There are two choices depending on the format in which your data is stored.
      • Click Select Database File and browse to the Excel or MS Access file containing the participants’ data. This needs to include a unique id, such as a username or login id.
      • Click Build Data Link to build a link to an Oracle or SQL Database containing the participants’ data. This needs to include a unique id, such as a username or login id.
    Select the database file or build a database link
    1. The Select the Table to use drop-down automatically displays a table name. If this is not the table you require, select a different table from the list. If you wish to filter the participants so that this survey is only available to some members of the database, set an appropriate filter in the Where condition box. Click Next.
    2. The next step depends on the options required for the survey. Click on the link that matches your required choice and follow the instructions given:

    Sending email invitations only

    1. On the next page select the option Send email invitations only. Click Next.
    Send email invitations only
    1. The next step in the wizard is to create the email invitation and reminder. Here you can design your email invitation and reminder.
      • Set the email address field to be the appropriate database field in the drop-down list.
      • You will need to insert the Survey Location into the main body of the email. This will let your participants know where your survey is located.
      • You can add seeding by inserting a Database Field in the main body of the email or the Email subject.
    Create an email invitation
    1. Click Next. You will see a summary of what the database link does.
    2. Enter a name for the link and click Finish.
    3. The next step is to run the database link.

    Using Logins only

    1. On the next page select the option Log in respondent. 
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. If you want to add seeding to the questionnaire, select Seed database data into questionnaires and follow these instructions to add questionnaire seeding, otherwise click Next to see a summary of what the database link does.
    2. Enter a name for the link and click Finish.
    3. The next step is to run the database link.

    Using Logins and sending email invitations

    1. On the next page select the option Log in respondent. 
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Select Send email invitations and reminders. This option allows you to create invitations and reminders in the Email editor page.
    2. If you want to add seeding to the questionnaire, select Seed database data into questionnaires.
    3. Click Next.
    4. The next step in the wizard is to create the email invitation and reminder. Here you can design your email invitation and reminder.
      • Set the email address field to be the appropriate database field in the drop-down list.
      • You will need to insert the Survey Location into the main body of the email. This will let your participants know where your survey is located.
      • You can add seeding by inserting a Database Field in the main body of the email or the Email subject.
    Create an email invitation
    1. If you have selected Seed database data into questionnaires, follow these instructions to add questionnaire seeding, otherwise click Next to see a summary of what the database link does.
    2. Enter a name for the link and click Finish.
    3. The next step is to run the database link

    Questionnaire seeding required

    1. The questionnaire seeding page is displayed if you have selected Seed database data into questionnaires. Click Next. (If you want to seed group questionnaires click Setting up a database link for group questionnaires)
    Log in respondents
    1. To seed (transfer) data from a database field to a question variable in the survey, click in the area to the right of the field and select the survey variable from the drop-down list.

    1. Single and multiple-response questions in Snap XMP Desktop have a code for each possible answer. You can seed data directly into one or more codes.

    Column

    Description

    Database values

    The possible values for the selected field in the database.

    Counts

    The number of cases in the database with the specified value.

    Snap code index

    The different possible responses to seed into.

    Mapping database fields and field values to the survey variables
    1. Select the code that you wish to seed for a given value of the database field. The example shows different age range fields in the database being seeded into the single-multiple response question Age. If the Age field in the database is set to 2 the age range 25 to 44 will be seeded into the field.
    2. Click Next. You will see a summary of what the database link does.
    3. Enter a name for the link and click Finish.
    4. The next step is to run the database link.

    Running the database link

    When you have set up the participants, invitations and seeded data for your survey you need to run the database link. This will generate the participant and invitation data for the online survey making it available in Snap XMP Online.

    Instructions to run the database link

    1. Select File | Database Link to display the Database Links dialog.
    2. Select the link that contains the participants’ data.
    Database links dialog listing the links for the survey
    1. Click Run to generate the new participant data. The Run Database Link dialog appears.
    Run the database link and upload the results to Snap Online
    1. Choose an option for Participants and Seeding.
    OptionDescription

    Do nothing

    Does not load any participant or seeding data changes to Snap XMP Online.

    Add new participants onlyParticipants in the spreadsheet that are not already in the list will be added. The survey options for sending invitations and tracking the response cannot be changed.
    Update participantsParticipants in the spreadsheet that are in the list will be updated (seeding properties will also be replaced). Participants in the spreadsheet but not in the list will be added. The survey options for sending invitations and tracking the response cannot be changed.
    Replace all participantsNew participants will be added. Participants in the spreadsheet that are in the list will be updated (seeding properties will also be replaced). Participants that are in the list but absent from the spreadsheet will be deleted. Existing response data will NOT be deleted. The survey options for sending invitations and tracking the response can be changed.
    Delete participantsAll current participants will be deleted. The response data will NOT be deleted.
    1. Choose an option for Invites and Reminders.

    Option

    Description

    Do nothing

    There are no changes made. The process will not upload any invitation or reminder changes to Snap XMP Online.

    Define or replace

    This will add the invitation and reminder when they are generated for the first time. When there are already uploaded invitations and reminders this option will remove all the existing invitations and reminders to replace them with the new invitation and reminder set up in Snap XMP Desktop.

    1. Click OK to upload the participant data to Snap XMP Online.

    The post Creating database links to upload participants appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Multi-factor authentication (MFA) https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/multi-factor-authentication/ Tue, 06 Dec 2022 13:51:59 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8305 Please upgrade to Snap XMP Desktop version 12.11 or later to enable MFA support. Multi-factor authentication is a security measure for online software. In addition to your username and password, this requires you to authenticate your login by providing additional information that proves your identity. This is usually provided by a code generated in an […]

    The post Multi-factor authentication (MFA) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Please upgrade to Snap XMP Desktop version 12.11 or later to enable MFA support.

    Multi-factor authentication is a security measure for online software. In addition to your username and password, this requires you to authenticate your login by providing additional information that proves your identity. This is usually provided by a code generated in an email or in an authenticator app. This makes your account more secure as it requires multiple pieces of information to log on with.

    Multi-factor authentication is often abbreviated to MFA and is used in the rest of this article.

    Configure MFA

    You configure the MFA in Snap XMP Online.

    1. To set up MFA on your account log in to Snap XMP Online.
    2. Select Your account in the side menu.
    3. Select Security.
    1. In the Security tab, click the Configure MFA button.
    1. There are 3 options available: None, Email or Authenticator app. You can choose either Email or an Authenticator app to receive the 6-digit verification code. Examples of authenticator apps are Microsoft Authenticator or Google Authenticator. Select None to turn off MFA.
    1. Click Next.
    2. The next action depends on the option selected.
      • None – the MFA settings are cleared. Additional information will not be requested when you log in.
      • Email – an email will be sent to the email address associated with the logged in account with the 6-digit code. Enter the code and click OK.
      • Authenticator app – follow the instructions on the dialog to set this up. Enter the 6-digit code and click OK.
    3. When the multi-factor authentication is set up you will be prompted for the code when you next log in.

    Log in using MFA

    Snap XMP Online

    1. When you next log in, enter your username and password as usual and click Log in.
    2. Snap XMP Online prompts you for a code. Enter the 6-digit code from email or the authenticator app.
    1. If you wish to set your current device as a trusted device, select Remember browser. You will not need to enter the code each time you log in using the same browser on your device. If you use a different device or browser, you will need to enter the code.
    2. Click Submit to log in to Snap XMP Online.

    Snap XMP Desktop

    Once you have set up MFA in Snap XMP Online, the next time you use Snap XMP Desktop you will need to enter a code. Make sure you are using Snap XMP Desktop 12.11 or later for MFA support.

    1. Open Snap XMP Desktop.
    2. The message ‘Could not validate account’ appears. Click OK to remove the message.
    3. Enter the password for the user account shown.
    4. Snap XMP Desktop prompts you for a code. Enter the 6-digit code from email or the authenticator app.
    1. If you wish to set your current device as a trusted device, select Trust this device. You will not need to enter the code each time you log in on the same device. If you use a different device or browser, you will need to enter the code.
    2. Click OK to log in to Snap XMP Online.

    Change the type of MFA

    You change the MFA settings in Snap XMP Online.

    1. Log in to Snap XMP Online.
    2. Select Your account in the side menu.
    3. Select Security.
    1. In the Security tab, click the Configure MFA button.
    1. You can choose either Email or an Authenticator app to receive the 6-digit verification code. Examples of authenticator apps are Microsoft Authenticator or Google Authenticator.
    2. Click Next.
    3. The next action depends on the option selected.
      • Email – an email will be sent to the email address associated with the logged in account with the 6-digit code. Enter the code and click OK.
      • Authenticator app – follow the instructions on the dialog to set this up. Enter the 6-digit code and click OK.
    4. When you next log in, enter the 6-digit code when prompted.

    Clear the MFA settings

    You can clear the MFA settings in Snap XMP Online, when you no longer require multi-factor authentication.

    1. Log in to Snap XMP Online.
    2. Select Your account in the side menu.
    3. Select Security.
    1. In the Security tab, click the Configure MFA button.
    1. There are 3 options available: None, Email or Authenticator app. Select None to clear the MFA settings.
    2. Click Next which clears the MFA settings. When you log in, you do not need to enter any additional information.

    The post Multi-factor authentication (MFA) appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inline questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/inline-questions/ Wed, 19 Oct 2022 14:04:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8188 Inline questions are questions that can be inserted into any text in the questionnaire. As with other types of questions, inline questions use the variable properties, such as setting the response type and adding a pattern to validate the response. You can also show or hide them using routing. Using inline questions can give the […]

    The post Inline questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Inline questions are questions that can be inserted into any text in the questionnaire. As with other types of questions, inline questions use the variable properties, such as setting the response type and adding a pattern to validate the response. You can also show or hide them using routing. Using inline questions can give the questionnaire the flexibility to create forms, providing areas where the respondent can enter information.

    Graphical user interface, application, Teams

Description automatically generated

    All the questions included as inline questions must be created before they can be used in an Inline Question field. Inserting an Inline Question field to any text in the questionnaire creates an inline question. When an Inline Question field is created, it is shown in the questionnaire as the variable name inside double angled brackets << >>, for example, <<Q1.1>>. During the live interview, the inline question is displayed so that the respondent is shown the inline question instead of the placeholder seen in the questionnaire design window.

    Setting up the questions

    When setting up the questions, you need to create a main question then create a number of subsequent questions that will become the inline questions. In the example used in these instructions, the main question is a multi-choice question which asks the respondent to supply further information, when a selection is made, using inline questions.

    1. Open the survey in the Questionnaire design window.
    2. Click New Question to add a new question in the questionnaire.
    3. In the question style menu, select Multi Choice.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the area marked “Click here for text”, enter the question text. For example, “How did you find out about us?”
    2. Press the Tab key and the cursor moves into the first code label. Enter the first of your answer codes. Press Tab to create and move to the next answer code. Continue with the text for the other code labels and press Tab after each one.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Next, create two Other style questions for use as the inline questions. Make sure there are no page breaks between the main question and the inline questions.
    2. Click New Question to create the first Other question. In this example, the question name is set to Q1.1 using a naming convention that helps to show these questions are grouped together.
    3. In the question style menu, select Other. Enter the text “which channel?”
    4. Click New Question to create the second Other question.
    5. In the question style menu, select Other. Enter the text “which site?”
    A picture containing table

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save   to save the changes made to the questionnaire.

    Inline questions with routing

    When you add routing to the inline questions, it only shows, during the live interview, if the answer is selected.

    1. Select the Other question “which channel?” and click Routing Rules on the Questionnaire window toolbar to set up the routing.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Add to create a new routing rule.
    2. In Type, select Conditionally Ask Question and click OK.
    New routing instruction
    1. The Routing Rules dialog expands and fills with information. (You can also see this by clicking Details>> on the Routing Rules dialog and hide it by clicking Details<<.)
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the If box. Enter the routing condition. In this example, “Q1=2”. The “2” refers to code 2 (Radio Ad) of Q1.
    2. Click OK to save the routing rule.
    3. Repeat the process for the second inline question “which site?”.

    Inserting Inline Question variable fields

    1. Position the cursor in the text at the location where you require the inline question.
    Diagram

Description automatically generated
    1. Check that the Topic drop-down is Font which shows the Insert button.
    1. Click the Insert button and select Variable Field from the menu. This displays the New variable field dialog.
    1. Complete the fields to define the dynamic text:
      • The Variable list contains all the variables and paradata for the questionnaire. Select the variable to insert from the list.
      • In Aspect, select Inline Question.
      • In Modify case, choose the case used to display the text: Normal, UPPER CASE, lower case, Sentence case, Title Case.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK. The question number is displayed inside double angled brackets, e.g., <<Q1.1>>, this will be replaced by the inline question when a respondent is answering the questionnaire.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save   to save the changes made to the questionnaire.
    2. You can test the inline questions by publishing the survey and launching a preview in Snap XMP Online or Snap XMP Desktop.

    During the live interview the Inline Question is displayed in the question.

    Graphical user interface, application, Teams

Description automatically generated

    Formatting inline questions

    Inline questions use the formatting of the question, at the point of insertion of the Inline Question variable field.

    This is shown in the following example where the question asking, “which channel?” is shown in blue with a larger font size, but the Inline Question variable field is shown in a smaller, red font.

    When the question is formatted in an interview the inline question is shown in the smaller, red font using the Inline Question variable field formatting. This results in an inline question that integrates with the question text.

    As a result, the inline question may lose any of the original text formatting, such as, bold, italic, colour and size.

    The inline questions may also have their controls, such as boxes and text boxes resized for a better integration with the surrounding text or questions.

    Example 1: Creating a form using inline questions

    In this example, an instruction question contains three inline questions requesting personal details from the respondent.

    The inline questions are provided by the three following questions: an open-ended question asking for the respondent’s name, a drop down asking for gender and another open-ended question asking for their email address.

    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

    During the interview the demographic questions are inserted into the instruction question providing the inline question format.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Example 2: Creating a conversational style form

    Inline questions can also be used in a conversational style form with the inline questions included as part of the text rather than formatted underneath each other.

    The inline questions are provided by the same three following questions: an open-ended question asking for the respondent’s name, a drop down asking for gender and another open-ended question asking for their email address. These questions are positioned to follow on after each other rather than underneath each other as in a standard form.

    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated

    During the interview the demographic questions are inserted into the instruction question providing the inline question format.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Example 3: Creating calculations as the respondent answers questions

    Another use is to create calculated inline questions to build up results as the respondent answers questions.

    In this example, the respondent is asked how much they spend on different categories and the total spend is calculated as well as the percentage of that total that each represents.

    Table

Description automatically generated

    During the interview the total spend and percentages are calculated as the respondent fills in their answers.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Example 4: Creating forms that ask for parts of a date separately

    Use inline questions to ask for the day, month and year parts of a date separately.

    Inline questions are set up for different parts of a date separately. These are used in an instruction to ask for the respondent’s date of birth.

    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated with medium confidence

    During the interview the date questions are inserted into the instruction question providing the inline question format.

    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Inline questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Compound Grids https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/compound-grids/ Thu, 22 Sep 2022 09:41:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=8032 A compound grid combines multiple grids into a single grid. This allows a grid to contain different question styles such as single choice, multiple choice and open series. With this feature, you can create grids with rows that allow the respondent to select a choice, then add associated comments, dates, times or amounts, as part […]

    The post Compound Grids appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A compound grid combines multiple grids into a single grid. This allows a grid to contain different question styles such as single choice, multiple choice and open series. With this feature, you can create grids with rows that allow the respondent to select a choice, then add associated comments, dates, times or amounts, as part of the response.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    To combine the grids into a compound grid, they must:

    • follow each other in the questionnaire
    • not have page breaks between the grids
    • contain the same number of questions or rows
    • contain grids or open series. These are the question styles Grid First, Grid Next and Open Series First, Open Series Next or styles that are based on them.
    • have the same Show settings for Space before and Line before

    Create the first grid

    The first grid or open series question sets the questions that are used for each row. You can add question text in subsequent grids but when they are combined in the compound grid only the question text from the first grid will be shown.

    In this example, a Grid First question starts the compound grid.

    1. Click New Question to add a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Grid First. This will allow you to set up the headings for the first of a series of grid questions.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the area marked Click here for text, enter your question text, for example “Please tell us about your experience today.”
    2. Press the Tab key on your keyboard and enter the first answer, such as “Good”. Press Tab to create the next code and enter each subsequent answer. After the last code press the Down arrow  Down Arrow  instead of Tab.
    3. The cursor will move to the text of the first Grid Label. Type the first item, such as “Coffee Shop” and press Tab.
    4. This creates the next grid row automatically changing the style to Grid Next for the second and subsequent rows. Enter the next Grid Label.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    1. Press Tab to create another grid row or press Enter to complete the grid and move to a new question.

    Create subsequent grids

    Create the other grids that form part of the compound grid in the same way. Multiple grids can be added to the compound grid, but consideration should be given to the layout of the questionnaire.

    When adding the grids make sure there are no page breaks between them.

    In this example, an open series question asks the respondents how much they spent.

    1. Click New Question to add a new question.
    2. In the style selection drop down list change the style to Open Series First. This will allow you to set up the heading for the first of a series of questions, each of which can contain numbers or text.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the area marked Click here for text, enter your question text.
    2. Press Tab and enter the text for the first row.
    3. Press Tab. and enter the text for the next row. This automatically changes the style to Open Series Next for the second and subsequent rows.
    4. Press Tab. and enter the text for the next row. This automatically changes the style to Open Next for the second and subsequent rows.
    5. If you need more questions press Tab again and repeat the process.
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated with medium confidence
    1. If you wish to change the response type, select Response in the toolbar and select the response type. In this example, the response type is Quantity. Any following questions will keep the new response type.
    A picture containing graphical user interface

Description automatically generated

    Combine the grids

    The next step is to combine the grids and open series questions to create the compound grid.

    1. If you do not want the question number showing across the compound grid, remove the question numbers on the grids by selecting Show and clearing the Show option for the Name.
    A picture containing arrow

Description automatically generated
    1. Select the first row of the second or subsequent grid.
    2. In the menu, select Columns from the second drop-down.
    3. Click the Compound button to set this grid as part of the compound grid. The display of the grids in the Questionnaire design window will not change.
    Graphical user interface, text, table

Description automatically generated
    1. Repeat this for any further consecutive grids that are part of the compound grid.

    When this compound grid appears in a live interview, the open series question (Q2) displays adjacent to the grid question (Q1).

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Adjusting the proportional width used by each grid

    By default, the grids within the compound grid are automatically spaced across the web page. You can adjust the width of each grid set up in the compound grid.

    After you have set up the compound grid, you can set the widths in the Questionnaire design window.

    1. Select the grid in the questionnaire.
    2. Select ‘Compound’ in the toolbar and you then have the option to specify whether the grid is the starting point for a compound grid or whether it continues to be a part.
    1. To turn the setting off, you can select the option Not a compound grid. This is the setting shown if the grid question is not part of a compound grid.
    2. The sizing defaults to Auto. With this setting, the grid width is automatically calculated during the live interview.
    3. To set the proportional width, clear the Auto checkbox. This displays a percentage width the grid will use. Enter the percentage required.
    4. Repeat this for each grid set up in the compound grid.
    5. Test that the compound grid display in the required way by previewing the questionnaire.

    If one of the grids is set to auto, and the other grids have a percentage specified, then the automatically sized grid is displayed with the minimum size required. The other grids will be displayed in the specified ratio across the rest of the available page width.

    If you set the combined percentages to more than 100%, Snap XMP Desktop will set them in the ratio they are specified in. For example, if you have 3 grids and you set them all to 50%, Snap XMP Desktop will set them to around 33% each.

    Different Editions

    In a survey that has multiple editions you will need to consider how the layout of the questionnaire will look for each edition during the live interview.

    You must set up the compound grid for each edition. Editions used for smaller screens such as for a phone or tablet may not be suitable for larger compound grids.

    Customising the compound grid

    The appearance of each grid or open series can be customised individually. When the grids are combined in a compound grid, each grid is displayed with its own styling, including fonts, colours and background.

    If you want to create a uniform grid with the same styling, customise each grid in the same way. Creating a question style for the compound grid helps make sure that all the grids have the same appearance.

    If you want each section of the grid to be distinct then style each grid as required.

    Please note: The line spacing settings given by Space before and Line before (found in the Show option) must be the same for all grids regardless of styling.

    Testing the compound grid

    The compound grid does not show in the Questionnaire design window, only the individual grids are available.

    When you test the compound grid appearance, publish the questionnaire as a preview. In Snap XMP Desktop, more information is available at Testing the questionnaire online and in Snap XMP Online more information is available in the Previewing the published survey section in Publishing your survey.

    Please note: The compound grids are only available with the new interviewer. If the grids are not showing as a compound grid, make sure you are using the new interviewer. You can check this in the Questionnaire properties. Select the Interview section and click the Advanced button then clear both interview settings.

    The post Compound Grids appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap Surveys software terminology https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/snap-software-terminology/ Mon, 18 Jul 2022 08:20:55 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7735 Analysis Table A table showing the data from a survey, displayed using rows and columns. They usually have column headings across the top of the table and row headings along the side of the table describing the data contained in the table. Analysis Chart Charts are a graphical way of presenting and analysing your survey […]

    The post Snap Surveys software terminology appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Analysis Table

    A table showing the data from a survey, displayed using rows and columns. They usually have column headings across the top of the table and row headings along the side of the table describing the data contained in the table.

    Analysis Chart

    Charts are a graphical way of presenting and analysing your survey data. A common chart used is a bar chart which displays the results using horizontal or vertical bars where the bar size represents a specific result, often the number or percentage of responses to a question answer.

    Analysis List

    Lists allow you to itemize the responses to one or more variables in your survey. They usually contain information from open-ended questions that ask for comments or any other free format text.

    Analysis Cloud (Word Cloud)

    Word clouds display responses to a question in a graphic and provide a quick way to see the most common responses. The words in the cloud appear larger the more popular the response for that word. You can create word clouds from any type of variable, although they are most often used for displaying open-ended literal responses to see how often particular words appear in comments.

    Analysis Map

    An Analysis Map uses an image that is relevant to the data, such as the map of a country, to show the responses to single and multiple response questions. An example is showing the results based on the geographical area of a country.

    Analysis Variables

    Analysis Variables are derived from other variables defined in the survey and are used for statistical analysis. These include auto-category variables, group variables, factor analysis and cluster analysis.

    Archive

    Create a backup copy of a survey.

    Attach-It

    The ability to let you upload a file photo, audio clip or signature on a survey within our platform, Snap XMP.

    Audit Log

    This lets you see who has made a change to a survey and what kind of change they made. When you are collaborating as part of a large team, this helps you know which shared user has made a particular change to the survey.

    Auto Category Variables

    Auto category variables are used to analyse open-ended questions, such as comments, dates, times and quantities by categorising the responses. For example, when creating a word cloud from the respondents’ comments an auto category variable is automatically created to determine how frequently the words are used. The word cloud displays the words that appear most often as the largest so you can see what was most important to your respondents.

    Calibration (Scanning)

    The process of marking the four tick boxes, which represent the four corners of each page of a questionnaire used in the scanning process.

    Carousel

    When there is a core question about multiple things – such as “What do you think about these holiday destinations?”. Each destination will appear on separate slides of a carousel. The respondent clicks a rating out of 10 for the first destination then clicks ‘next’ and the second destination will appear.

    Code Rotation

    To avoid any interview bias, it is possible to rotate the codes of a question, according to pre-defined rules, so that the codes are re-ordered each time the question is shown in an interview. 

    Cloning

    Making a copy of an item in Snap Surveys. This can be a survey, variable, question, weight, analysis, report. This is equivalent to using “Save As”

    Closed Question

    Closed questions give respondents a choice of predefined answers. The questions can allow multiple answers. Answers can be presented in random orders to prevent bias. Answers can be masked (see “Masking”), answers can also be set as exclusive, so if you asked which of the following you use: A/B/C and you want to include None as a forth option then set that as exclusive.

    Confidence Interval

    A confidence interval displays the probability that a parameter will fall between a pair of values around the mean. Confidence intervals measure the degree of uncertainty or certainty in a sampling method. Typically, confidence levels of 95% or 99% provide a good confidence level.

    Confidence Level

    A percentage to outline how confident you are that the survey results accurately reflect the wider population. Usually, the confidence level is set to either 90%, 95% or 99% confidence that the survey is accurate. If it’s any lower, it could be argued that the sample size needs to be reconsidered before progressing further.

    Data Picker

    A Data Picker allows the addition of an on-screen clock, calendar, keyboard, or numeric keypad on a questionnaire to help respondents enter their answers.

    Database Link

    You may have an external file (such as an Excel spreadsheet) of participants’ names and contact details, which can then be uploaded to a survey platform. The platform can then send the surveys out to all contacts in a matter of seconds.

    Derived Variables

    These are variables where the output is created from the answers to previous questions. For example, if a respondent says they have 5 cats and 6 dogs, a derived variable could be used to show the total number of pets (11). The most common use of derived variables is to group responses into categories for analysis.

    Editable URL

    When sharing surveys, editing the URL to include your brand name helps participants to trust the link.

    Editions

    An edition of a questionnaire defines the publication output, such as PC, phone, tablet or paper, and the language of the questionnaire. A questionnaire can be shown in different output formats and languages. The structure of the questionnaire remains the same for each edition, but the appearance, language and the published output can be different.

    Errors

    One of the three categories of missing data In Snap XMP. Data takes on an error value when it doesn’t fall into any of the remaining categories (of No Reply, Not Asked or Valid).

    Filter

    Highlight specific answers or results – such as how you might filter a certain brand or shoe size when shoe shopping on an e-commerce website. For surveys, you can filter to see results for specific sub-groups of respondents, for example to show results only for younger respondents.

    Folder

    Folders are used to store and organise online surveys, templates and sub-folders.

    Group Questionnaires

    Use group questionnaires when a respondent needs to complete the questionnaire a number of times, each time for a different subject. 

    Group Variables

    Link similar questions (such as those around someone’s personality in the workplace) into a group so that the group of questions can be analysed as a whole, used as a single axis for tables for charts.

    Kiosk Mode

    These are fixed stations in a public place for people to give feedback in person, although the survey is run online. When someone completes the survey (or abandons it) the survey will reset in time for the next respondent.

    Map Control

    Clickable images in a survey that respondents use to answer questions. For example, clicking an image of British flag to indicate their nationality.

    Masking

    Ensuring only relevant answers are shown based on responses to previous questions. For example, if someone selects 2 out of 5 supermarkets that they regularly shop at, the 3 supermarkets that weren’t selected will not appear in further questions on the topic.

    Min/Max Response

    In Snap’s validation the min/max response is used in multiple choice questions where the respondent can select more than one answer, to set the range of answers e.g., a minimum of 1 answer but a maximum of 3 answers in a question with 5 choices. The description you’ve given sounds more like a quota – although they only have a maximum number of responses.

    Multi-language

    The ability to present your questionnaire in multiple languages opens the survey up to a wider audience. This can lead to a better response rate and ensure a broader range of opinions are given.

    No Reply

    One of the three categories of missing data in Snap XMP. No Reply is used to represent the situation in which a respondent could have given an answer to a question but did not.

    Not Asked

    One of the three categories of missing data in Snap XMP. Not Asked data represents instances where a question is skipped during an interview due to routing because it is considered irrelevant due to replies already received.

    On-premises Servers / Self-hosting Survey Data

    Organisations that run surveys may choose to self-host the data on their own premises, perhaps due to different security requirements in their region. This is an alternative to letting the survey platform providers take care of data security.

    Open-ended Question

    Open-ended questions are questions that require more than simply “yes” or “no” answers – they are designed to delve deeper into the respondent’s opinion.

    Paradata

    Paradata are system variables containing information collected when the during the interview. You can choose whether to include this data in the survey. Some of this information (such as a respondent password or the language a survey is conducted in) may alter how the survey appears. Paradata is defined in the Questionnaire properties dialog.

    Partial Completed

    When someone only fills in a portion of a survey. In regular online surveys, the respondent can pick up their responses so far to complete them at a later time. On kiosk mode, the survey will optionally collate a partial response and reset back to the beginning in time for the next respondent.

    Participants

    The group of people you invite to participate or respond to your survey. (Note – this doesn’t mean they respond.)

    Pre-seed

    Use data from a database or other source to provide final or default answers.

    Preview

    Previewing a questionnaire shows how the questionnaire will run in a live interview without saving any response data. This lets you test the questionnaire and make sure it appears in the correct layout.

    Question

    A specific type of variable used to collect data from the respondent during an interview.

    Questionnaire

    A form made up of a series of questions that respondents fill in to provide their feedback.

    Quota

    A limit set on the number of respondents of a particular type who are permitted to complete the survey.

    Rating Scale Question

    A question that is written in the form of multiple statements that the respondent must select which best suits their feelings, usually to how much they ‘agree’ with a statement. Such as “I strongly agree that I am proud to work for my organisation”.

    Ratings Check

    This is the name we give to the way our software checks that people can only give one answer for first, second, third etc. For example, to the question “what are your top 3 supermarkets?”.

    Respondents

    The people who actually take the time to respond to your survey.

    Response Pattern

    Ensures responses are typed in appropriately. For example, if a respondent is giving their post code, the answer cannot be submitted unless it conforms to the correct styling of post codes. This helps to avoid inaccurate answers and keeps the respondent on task.

    Response Type

    The type of response determines what kind of data can be entered for each question response. The different response types available are: Single, Multiple, Literal, Date, Time and Quantity.

    Routing / Skip Logic

    Routing within the survey means the respondent skips any follow-up questions that are not relevant to them. It’s a way of keeping the survey agile and relevant for each respondent.

    Screenout

    Screening questions are designed to either include or exclude participants from taking the survey. A common screening question excludes participants who work in the marketing industry.

    Shares (Shared with you)

    Setting up shares allow you to give permission to other users to work or collaborate with you on a survey. Shares are set up in Snap XMP Online.

    Slider Control

    A clickable, sliding control that can move left and right or up and down to change a setting – such as the volume on a computer. In a survey, a respondent may drag the slider along a numbered list of 1 to 10 to say how much they enjoyed a holiday or a day at a theme park.

    Smart Reports

    Smart Reports are exclusive to Snap Surveys. They let you dig deep into your feedback and create reports that can be run again and again. Perfect for ongoing projects.

    Snap Offline Interviewer

    Snap Surveys exclusive app for face-to-face interviews that lets you conduct online surveys while out in the field – even when there is no steady internet connection. Your survey automatically syncs when you get back online.

    Survey Template

    A new survey that features pre-fixed elements, such as an organisation’s branding and logo, or specific questions. It helps you get your project underway quicker and to keep things consistent.

    SurveyPak

    SurveyPaks are collections of questions, headings and code frames, which focus on a particular subject area.

    Synchronize

    Synchronize updates the data responses between Snap XMP Desktop and Snap XMP Online so that you can see the latest data.

    Text Substitution

    Text substitution is a feature in online editions that lets you change text in your questionnaire based on the responses entered by the respondent to previous questions. This is also known as dynamic text or piping.

    Upload

    The upload process allows changes that have been made to a survey in Snap XMP Desktop to be transferred to Snap XMP Online. This includes changes to the questionnaire, variables, reports, analyses and data.

    Validation

    Validation makes sure answers are of the correct type before the respondent moves to the next question. This can be done by providing a pattern or range of valid answers to the question. For example, if you are asking for someone’s age, a number in a suitable range should be input as the response, otherwise they won’t be able to move on.

    Variable

    Variables represent questions and derived values recording the views, opinions and parameters of respondents for analysis.

    Verification

    Verification of case data is a method for reducing data entry errors. Usually, data entered by one operator (in the normal way) is verified by another operator who enters some or all of the data for a second time using the Verify option of the Edit menu. The operator entering data first time around could be the one who also verifies their own input but this is not normally recommended since operators have a tendency to repeat their own mistakes. Snap XMP Desktop will prompt for action if errors are found during verification, and will remember which raw data cases have, and which have not, been verified.

    Weight

    Feedback from surveys should reflect a broad population, but sometimes a sample size is not available, and you may not get a balanced group of people. Maybe there’s more women than men, or an unusually high number of affluent people than you expect. To balance this out, you can ‘weight’ an under-represented segment of respondents and have them count as more people than there actually were. For example, if you had twice the number of women respond than men, then each man’s response can count as two people. You can also weight the survey sample up to the population, for example if a theme park surveys 1,000 people out of 10,000 daily visitors, then each respondent can be counted as 10 people.

    Your work

    This is an area in Snap XMP Online that where you can view and organise your folders, surveys and templates. Your work is the first page that you see after you have logged into Snap XMP Online and where you can navigate to the Build, Collect and Analyze sections of your surveys.

    The post Snap Surveys software terminology appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Running the Summary Dashboard report https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/running-summary-dashboard/ Tue, 12 Jul 2022 09:18:58 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7907 The Summary Dashboard report is a new addition to the three standard reports that are already available for surveys in Snap XMP Desktop: Questionnaire, Summary and Summary Tables. The Summary Dashboard report generates an HTML summary report showing images of a chart, table or list for all relevant questions. These are displayed in a double […]

    The post Running the Summary Dashboard report appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Summary Dashboard report is a new addition to the three standard reports that are already available for surveys in Snap XMP Desktop: Questionnaire, Summary and Summary Tables. The Summary Dashboard report generates an HTML summary report showing images of a chart, table or list for all relevant questions. These are displayed in a double column format. This report is available for surveys created using Snap XMP Desktop build 12.10 and after.

    To find more information on all the standard reports, see The standard reports.

    Executing the Summary Dashboard report

    1. Click Reports ReportsIcon.png on the toolbar to open the Reports window.
    1. Select the Summary Dashboard report in the Reports window.
    2. Click the Execute ExecuteIcon.png button on the Reports window toolbar to run the report. This opens the Report Execution dialog showing the report selected in the window title.
    1. In To, select Export as the output type. This exports the report to a file.
    2. In Type, select the file type as Web Format (HTML).
    3. Tailor allows you to set the file details for the exported report
    4. Click OK to export the report. This opens the Export file details dialog.
    5. Enter the file name giving the location where the HTML file saves.
    6. Enter the file numbering, output method, encoding and sizing for the export file.
    7. Click OK to export the file.
    8. From the file location, open the file. The report opens in a web browser displayed in a two-column layout. Each chart or table image can be saved as an image file to be used elsewhere. (This may depend on the web browser used.)

    Changing the standard Summary Dashboard report

    You can change the content of the Summary Dashboard report.

    1. Click Reports ReportsIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Reports window.
    2. In the Reports window, double-click on the Summary Dashboard report to open it. It consists of five instructions. There are three instructions laying the report out, an Information instruction giving the title and a brief description, and a Summary Report instruction.
    3. Double-click the Information instruction to open it. You can change the default description.
    1. Double-click the Summary Report instruction to open it.
    Change the Summary Report settings
    1. Specify a Filter to restrict the data used in the report.
    2. In the N/A box enter a logical expression that refers to a table cell or context value and for which the report is not applicable. You can use this to test if an analysis is empty. For example, if you have an analysis of visitors AN1, you can use the condition AN1 empty. This would only build the report if there were visitors.
    3. In the Content box enter the variables that you wish to include. If the field is left blank, all the question variables will be included. You can include paradata and derived variables in the list.
    4. Click OK to save your changes.
    5. Click Execute Run button on the Report toolbar to run the report.

    The post Running the Summary Dashboard report appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    RIM weighting https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/rim-weighting/ Thu, 30 Jun 2022 16:04:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7827 RIM weighting is used when you wish to provide weighting for more than one variable to achieve an even distribution of results across an entire dataset. It can also be used to produce an analysis in which the proportion of respondents in your sample is adjusted to match more closely to the proportion in the […]

    The post RIM weighting appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    RIM weighting is used when you wish to provide weighting for more than one variable to achieve an even distribution of results across an entire dataset.

    It can also be used to produce an analysis in which the proportion of respondents in your sample is adjusted to match more closely to the proportion in the target population.

    For example, if you wished to weight your samples so that they were 50% male and 50% female, and also 20% in each of five age brackets, the algorithm would calculate the correct weighting that needed to be applied to each table entry (combining age and gender).

    RIM weighting works best for single response variables where there is no missing data, and the counts or percentages are similar to the existing data responses.

    It is not a good idea to use rim-weighting if:

    • Your variables are related to each other (for example, income bracket and dwelling size).
    • The values vary enormously (for example, you have 96 males and four females, and you are attempting to balance it to 50:50).
    • You are applying a very large number of weights.

    Creating a RIM Weight

    1. In the Survey Overview window, open the survey.
    2. Click Analysis Variables on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Variables window which displays a list of the analysis variables.
    3. Click New Analysis Variables Item on the Analysis Variables toolbar. This displays a menu of analysis variables to choose from.
    4. Click New RIM Weight. This opens the RIM Weight window. Note there is an initial error in the status bar as there are no variables references yet.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. In Name, enter a name which describes the RIM weight.
    2. In Label, enter a description of the RIM weight.
    3. In Target total, select the required option.
    4. In Missing data, there are two choices: exclude partial cases or include partial cases. Excluding the partial cases provides the most accurate result as the partial cases have missing data in their responses. The default is exclude partial cases.
    5. In Filter, enter a filter expression to create the RIM weight for a subset of the response data.
    6. Click Add Variable to open the Select variable dialog.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    1. Select a variable from the Name drop-down as the weighting variable.
    1. Click OK. This displays default values for the RIM weight in the grid . The grid shows the ratio, expected count and percentage as well as the actual count and percentage.
    2. Click in the Ratio column to change the ratio or target number depending on the Target total option selected.
    3. Repeat for all the variables you wish to add.
    4. If you wish to remove variables, select a variable in the grid then click Delete Variable to delete the variable.
    5. Click Save to save the RIM weight.

    Target Totals

    There are three options for setting the Target total: Valid cases, From targets and Custom.

    Valid cases

    Valid cases bases the RIM weight on the valid data responses in the survey. The default ratio is 1 to give an equal distribution for all variable codes. The Ratio column can be changed with a proportion or target number for each variable code. For a target number to be used the total numbers in the Ratio column (per variable) must add up to the number of valid cases, otherwise a proportional ratio is used. The Expected column shows the target counts. The total number of valid cases is available next to the drop-down.

    RIM weight with Valid cases selected and an equal ratio distribution

    From targets

    From targets sets a ratio or target number for each code within a variable. This is set in the Ratio column. The target number is available next to the drop down and is the count of the target number for each variable code in the Ratio column. The Expected column shows the target counts for each variable code.

    RIM weight with From targets selected and target numbers set for each code

    Custom

    Custom allows an overall target number to be entered. Selecting this option enables the field next to the drop-down where you can enter the target number. The default ratio is 1 which shows an equal distribution of the target number split across all the codes within each variable. The target number can be edited in the Ratio column. The Expected column shows the target counts for each variable code.

    RIM weight with Custom selected and target numbers set for each code.

    Note: The RIM weighting in Snap XMP Desktop works out whether the number entered in Ratio is a percentage, proportion or target number and does not require a percentage sign (%) to be entered.

    Tailor the RIM Weight

    You can customise the decimal places, maximum iterations and match threshold for the RIM weighting.

    1. Click Tailor on the RIM Weight toolbar where you can edit the number of decimal places, maximum iterations and match threshold for the RIM weighting calculation.
    1. Click OK to save.

    Assess the RIM Weight

    Assessing the RIM Weight gives statistics of how efficiently the RIM weight will meet the target.

    1. Click Assess RIM Weight on the RIM Weight toolbar to assess the RIM weight.
    1. A summary shows the build information. Click OK to close the summary.

    Errors

    If there is an error in the RIM weight the status bar will show an error message. Clicking Assess RIM Weight also shows an error message. For example, when not enough target values are set, the assessment shows an error message and the status also displays this message.

    Build the RIM Weight

    The status of the RIM Weight displays in the status bar at the bottom of the RIM Weight window. When the RIM Weight is created the status shows as Not built.

    1. Click Build RIM Weight on the RIM Weight toolbar to build the RIM weight.
    2. The Status changes to show Built. If there is an error in the RIM weight the status bar will show an error message and the RIM weight is not built.
    3. Click Save to save the RIM weight.

    Using the RIM Weight

    The RIM weight can be included when creating analyses.

    1. Click the required analysis icon on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window.
    2. In Analysis and Break, enter appropriate break and analysis fields.
    3. In Weight, enter the name of the RIM weight.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to build the rim-weighted analysis.

    The post RIM weighting appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Question carousels https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/question-carousels/ Thu, 30 Jun 2022 10:33:50 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7809 A carousel is another way of displaying a question that contains a number of rows, such as a grid or semantic scale. Each row is presented as a card showing the question and the respondent answers the card shown before moving onto the next one. The carousel can be set to move onto the next […]

    The post Question carousels appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    A carousel is another way of displaying a question that contains a number of rows, such as a grid or semantic scale. Each row is presented as a card showing the question and the respondent answers the card shown before moving onto the next one. The carousel can be set to move onto the next question automatically or manually by clicking navigation buttons. The respondent can navigate through all the cards to review their answers. There is also an option to show the count out of the total number of aspects to answer.

    This question style is especially useful to present larger grids on smaller screens, such as smartphones and tablets, as the respondent only sees one question row at a time. This can also be helpful to ensure that a question row isn’t missed in a large grid as the rows are shown one at a time.

    In Snap XMP Desktop, grid and semantic scale questions can be displayed in a carousel format. The question carousels are available for all online editions. The question remains displayed in the grid format in the questionnaire design but is shown as a carousel when run in a web browser as a preview or a live interview. The carousel appearance can be changed by setting the font, background colours and box style.

    There is also a video introducing the question carousel at Question Carousel from Snap Surveys on Vimeo.

    Creating a question carousel

    The questionnaire must contain a grid or semantic scale question that can be shown as a question carousel.

    1. In the Questionnaire design window, select the Grid First or Semantic Scale First question.
    2. Select Show in the Toolbar Topic list
    3. Select As Carousel in the next drop-down menu and check the Show box. The question appearance does not change in the questionnaire design.
    A picture containing calendar

Description automatically generated
    1. Click the Options button to show the 2 settings:
      • Select automatically display to set the next question to display automatically when the respondent has selected an answer for the current question.
      • Select show count to show the current question row being answered out of the total number of questions in the carousel
    2. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each online edition, as required, in the questionnaire.
    3. Click Save to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Note that is advised that grids that display as a dropdown, which is often the case in phone and tablet editions, are changed to the standard grid box format before converting to a question carousel.

    Testing the question carousel

    The grid or semantic scale question appearance does not change when the question is changed to the carousel style. To test that the question carousel is shown in the required format you will need to publish the questionnaire in preview mode.

    1. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser.
    3. Check that the question carousel behaves as expected.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Changing the carousel appearance

    The appearance of the carousel can be changed in the same way as other questions. You can change:

    • Background color of the carousel cards
    • Font of the question, grid label and box text
    • Box style of the answers
    • Show images instead of text

    Changing the background

    The background colour of the carousel cards is determined by the background colour of the grid label.

    1. In the Questionnaire design window, select the rows of the grid or semantic scale question.
    2. Select Background in the Toolbar Topic list.
    3. Select Grid label in the next drop-down menu.
    4. Click the Color button and choose a background colour then click OK
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated with medium confidence
    1. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser. Note that the colour of the cards is the same as the background color of the grid label.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated with medium confidence

    Changing the font

    1. Select the grid label then select Font in the Toolbar Topic list.
    2. Select the font options for the text.
    3. Repeat for each grid label, as required.
    A picture containing graphical user interface

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser. Note that the text of the cards uses the font set for the grid label.
    A picture containing chat or text message

Description automatically generated

    Changing the box style

    1. In the Questionnaire design window, select the rows of the grid or semantic scale question.
    2. Select Boxes in the Toolbar Topic list.
    3. Select Images in the next drop-down menu.
    4. Click the Images button and choose a box style then click OK
    A screenshot of a computer

Description automatically generated with medium confidence
    1. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser. Note that the answer selection options under the carousel cards use the box style.
    A picture containing diagram

Description automatically generated

    Inserting an image on the carousel cards

    1. Select the grid label then select Font in the Toolbar Topic list.
    2. Click Insert then select Image.
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated with low confidence
    1. Browse to the image and click OK.
    2. Repeat for each grid label, as required.
    3. Click Publish icon on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    4. In Method, select Preview only then click the Publish button. This launches a test version of the questionnaire in a web browser. Note that the card image is used from the grid label.

    Explore more question styles here.

    The post Question carousels appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a simple chart https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-simple-chart/ Wed, 25 May 2022 10:02:09 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7679 Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting. They show the response data in a visual format that helps individuals understand the responses to the questions. The chart layouts available include bar charts, pie charts, line graphs and area charts. Chart styles When creating an analysis chart, you need to select the type or […]

    The post Creating a simple chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting. They show the response data in a visual format that helps individuals understand the responses to the questions. The chart layouts available include bar charts, pie charts, line graphs and area charts.

    Chart styles

    When creating an analysis chart, you need to select the type or style of the chart. Snap XMP provides a large number of pre-defined chart styles. These styles define the layout and colors used to display the chart. Some styles define only the color scheme which is useful when you need a specific set of colors, such as for your organisation’s branding. The pre-defined styles can be edited using the Chart Designer.

    Style naming convention

    The chart styles that are supplied with Snap XMP Desktop follow a naming convention that can be used to help set up the analysis definition.

    Chart styles that contain a layout and colors start with the chart name, such as, Bar, Horizontal Bar, Line and Pie.

    If the chart style name contains the word:

    • Counts then select Counts in the Show Options section
    • Percent then select one of the percent options in the Show Options section
    • Transposed then select Transpose otherwise clear Transpose

    For example, for the chart style Horizontal Bar Percent Transposed, select the one of the percent options, such as Analysis Percents, and select Transpose.

    Chart styles that contain only a color scheme start with the word Color and are followed by a description of the color scheme. For example, Color – 5 point Green to Red Stacked.

    Create a simple bar chart

    When an analysis, including a chart, is created, two windows are shown to help define the analysis:

    • Analysis Definition window used to define what response data is shown, the chart style and default text used in the chart.
    • Analysis Display window used to define how the chart is displayed.

    Usually, the first step is to decide which type of chart you are going to use, although the chart style can be changed at any time. In this example, the chart style selected is Bar Counts. This is a bar chart where the bars show the number of respondents that selected each response.

    Instructions

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the survey.
    2. Click Analysis Chart    on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window where you can create a new chart. This also opens the Analysis Display window which is blank for a new chart before the chart style is selected.
    3. In the Analysis Definition window, click the Select button. This opens the Select Analysis Style dialog. A thumbnail image is shown for each predefined chart style, helping you choose the style you want. Click on the image to select the chart style. The style selected in the example is Bar Counts. Click OK to select the style.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. The next step is to define the response data that is shown in the chart. A simple example of a bar chart is to show the responses to a single question. In Analysis, enter Q4, which is a question asking about the items ordered in a café.
    2. Click Apply to show the chart display in the Analysis Display window.
    Graphical user interface, chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
    1. The bar chart shows all the responses to the question Q4 with each bar showing the number of respondents who ordered each item. The legend shows which color corresponds to each question response. The chart title defaults to the Q4 label and the bars are arranged in the order each choice is asked in the question.

    Some default settings for an analysis are set up in Analysis Tailoring and these defaults may vary in your organisation. This is opened by clicking Tailor | Analysis.

    Resizing the chart and chart elements

    Resize the chart by hovering over the move the cursor to any edge or corner of the window until a double-headed arrow appears. When this arrow appears, click and drag to make the window larger or smaller. The chart resizes to fill the chart plot space available. You can see how your chart will look in different display sizes.

    Some chart elements can be resized by clicking on the chart element to select it. Hover the cursor over the black selection markers until a double-headed arrow appears. When this arrow appears, click and drag to make the element larger or smaller.

    Drag and Drop

    Some items in the chart can be moved using drag and drop. This includes the title, legend, chart plot, footnote and datapoint labels.

    1. Click the item in the chart display. The area is shown with small black squares around the selected area.
    2. Click in the selected area and drag to the new position. The chart display changes around the repositioned item.

    Opening the chart designer

    The Chart designer helps you customise the style of your chart. Open the Chart Designer by clicking the Edit Style button   in the toolbar of the Analysis Display window.

    The Chart Designer shows the chart elements on the left-hand panel in the Chart Designer. Selecting a chart element displays tabs that allow you to change different aspects of that element. Some of the chart elements have sub-elements that can be accessed by clicking on the   symbol.

    Chart designer showing the chart type selection

    You may want to change an item but not know what it is called. In this case, double-click on the item in the chart. The Chart Designer opens with the item selected.

    Saving or cancelling changes

    1. As you make changes to the chart elements in the Chart Designer, click on Apply to see the effect they make. Once you have clicked Apply the Cancel button will not reset the changes.
    2. To abandon your changes, as long as you have not clicked on Apply, click on Cancel.
    3. To confirm your changes, click on OK. These updates are made to the Analysis Display window but are not permanently saved as part of the analysis chart.
    4. To save the changes permanently go to the Analysis Display Window. If you wish to cancel all the changes made, click the Cancel icon on the toolbar. To save the changes, click the Save icon on the toolbar.

    Transpose to show labels on axis not legend

    In the Bar chart shown you can change the legend so that the labels are shown on the axis underneath.

    • In the Analysis Definition window, select Transpose. This removes the legend, and the labels show underneath each bar.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

    Excluding No replies

    Not all respondents complete every question when they submit a response to the survey. Often, in the analysis, the responses containing, no reply, are not relevant and you do not want to see them in the chart.

    Note: The default setting to show or hide No reply responses is set in the analysis tailoring. The analysis tailoring dialog opens from the Tailor | Analysis menu. Your organisation may already exclude no reply responses.

    To exclude the no replies:

    1. In the Analysis Definition window, click the Base/Labels tab.
    2. In the No reply drop down, select Exclude.
    Graphical user interface, application, table

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Apply. Check that there are no replies responses shown.
    2. In the Analysis Display window, click Save to save the changes to the chart.

    Ordering

    You can order the bars in several ways

    • Default. This is the order that the choices appear in a question.
    • Analysis Label. This is the alphabetical order of the choice labels in a question.
    • Analysis Base orders by the number or percent of responses in descending order.
    • Column counts
    • (Score) orders by any statistics on the table e.g. mean
    1. If the Analysis Definition window is not open, click on the Properties icon on the Analysis Display window.
    2. In the Analysis Definition window, select Analysis Base in the Order by list.
    1. Selecting Reverse order reverses the order of the items.

    In addition, customised ordering is available in the Chart Designer.

    1. Double-click on a bar to open the Chart Designer.
    2. Click on Series above the selected bar.
    3. Click on the Order tab.
    4. Click the Up and Down buttons to order the bars, as required.
    5. Click Apply to update the chart display.

    Changing the chart title

    You can customise the chart title by

    • changing the font, font size, font style and font color
    • changing the text
    • changing the text alignment
    • changing the title orientation
    • changing the location
    • changing the background color and pattern
    • changing the title frame style and shadow effect
    • adding a background image or replacing the title text with a logo or image

    Double-clicking on the legend opens the Chart Designer.

    Chart

Description automatically generated
    1. Click the Text tab and enter a new title for the chart. Click Apply to update the chart.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click the Font tab and increase the font size and make the text bold. Click Apply to update the chart.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    The chart title is now more noticeable with a clearer description.

    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

    Changing the chart legend

    You can customise the legend by

    • changing the location
    • changing the background color and pattern
    • adding a background image or replacing the title text with a logo or image
    • changing the font, font size, font style and font color

    Double-clicking on the legend opens the Chart Designer.

    • To make the legend text easier to read, click the Font tab and increase the font size. Click Apply to update the chart.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

    Changing bar colours

    The chart style chosen determines whether the bars in a series are different colors or all the same color.

    1. When you click on the bar that needs changing, this selects all the bars in the series with the same color. This shows you which bars will be updated.
    2. Double-click on the bar to open the Chart Designer at the series (bar color) settings.
    3. Click the plus + to expand the bar settings and select Datapoint defaults.
    4. In the Fill tab, select the Pattern, Fill color or Pattern color required.
    1. Click Apply to update the chart display.

    The post Creating a simple chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting up response validation https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-up-response-validation/ Mon, 21 Mar 2022 15:19:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7501 Validation provides a way of checking that the response to each question satisfies the survey’s requirements, such as, in the correct format or within a valid range. This helps to provide more accurate response data for your survey. The validation available in Snap XMP includes: Setting up validation in Snap XMP Desktop More information about […]

    The post Setting up response validation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Validation provides a way of checking that the response to each question satisfies the survey’s requirements, such as, in the correct format or within a valid range. This helps to provide more accurate response data for your survey.

    The validation available in Snap XMP includes:

    • making a question mandatory, where the participant must answer it
    • setting a response type
    • setting the maximum length for a free format text answer
    • adding a pattern, such as a date or email address, that the answer needs to match
    • setting a minimum number of answers for multiple response questions
    • setting a maximum number of answers for multiple response questions
    • setting an initial value for a question
    • making a question read only

    Setting up validation in Snap XMP Desktop

    1. Each variable has a set of individual properties. The properties depend on the type of question. You can examine and change the properties when you are in Design mode   in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select one or more questions and click Variable Properties   on the Questionnaire toolbar. This opens the Variable Properties dialog.
    Variable Properties dialog
    1. Edit the property values by entering or selecting a value for the required property. If you have selected several questions of the same type, you can change any properties they share.

    More information about the variable properties can be found at Variable properties.

    There is also a video available that includes a section on response validation in Snap XMP Desktop at Snap XMP – Survey Logic in Snap XMP Desktop from Snap Surveys on Vimeo.

    Setting up validation in Snap XMP Online

    In Snap XMP Online open the survey in the Build tab to edit the questionnaire. The Validation & Masking menu is in the Build side menu.

    Build side menu with Validation and Masking highlighted

    The validation properties shown depend on the question that is selected.

    More information about the validation options in Snap XMP Online can be found at Validation.

    Some properties such as the response type or pattern are set in the question toolbar.

    More information about the question toolbar can be found at Inserting questions.

    There is also a video available that includes a section on response validation in Snap XMP Online at Snap XMP – Survey Logic in Snap XMP Online from Snap Surveys on Vimeo.

    Making a question mandatory

    When you want to make sure that a respondent answers a question, set the Must answer to Yes in Snap XMP Desktop or select the Mandatory box in Snap XMP Online. The respondent needs to answer the question before they can progress through the questionnaire. The mandatory option is useful when questions further on in the questionnaire rely on an answer to an earlier question.

    Setting the response type

    When you create a question, it has the default response type for the pre-defined question style. You can change the response type according to the question style and the requirements of the questionnaire.

    The response types for Single Choice, Multi-choice and Grid questions are

    • Single for a Single choice, Multi choice or Grid question when the respondent only selects one answer. For example, Yes/No or Age group questions
    • Multiple for a Single Choice, Multi choice or Grid question when the respondent can select one or more answers

    The response types for Open Ended, Open Series questions are

    • Quantity which allows only numbers.
    • Literal which allows any free format text, such as names and comments.
    • Date which allows a range of date formats.
    • Time which allows a range of time formats.

    More information about setting the response type can be found at Setting the response type.

    Initial value

    A question can have an initial value. This value initially shows or selects the initial answer in the question, when a respondent is completing the questionnaire. You can set the initial value to select a code, or show a literal constant or expression using values from the preceding questions.

    More information about setting the initial value can be found at Setting an initial value.

    Read only

    Setting a question as Read only prevents the respondent from answering or overwriting that question during an interview.

    Use the read only property where:

    • the question contains seeded values from a participant database that you do not want the participant to change
    • the question contains an initial value that is based on answers to previous questions in the survey that you do not want the participant to change

    More information about read only questions can be found at Creating a read only question.

    Setting the minimum and maximum number of answers

    You can set the minimum and/or maximum number of answers required for multiple response questions. When the minimum number of answers is set to a value greater than 0, the question automatically becomes mandatory. The maximum number of answers required cannot be greater than the code count.

    Rating Check

    Often you would like to ask the respondents of your survey to rank a number of options in a given order. You can use a grid question to achieve this by setting the Rating Check property. This property ensures respondents answer the question with only one ranking in each aspect or row.

    More information about rating check can be found at Using Rating Check to ensure ranking

    Setting an exclusive response

    When you create a multiple choice question containing a list of items, it is unlikely that the list will contain all available options. You may provide one or more addition codes such as Other, Don’t know or None of the above. When these are selected, none of the other responses are applicable and should not be selected.

    In the Exclusive property, enter the list of the codes that are not available in combination with the other responses. When any of these codes are selected, any other responses to the question are cleared.

    Maximum length or number of characters

    You can set the maximum length or number of characters entered in a free format text question, such as an Open Ended question. The answer cannot exceed the maximum length.

    Valid ranges

    You can add an expression in the Valid field of a variable so that the respondent can only enter data which matches the expression. For complex expressions it is better to use patterns.

    The expression must be a list or range of possible values.

    These can be

    • limited range e.g., 1 TO 5 or 1~5
    • unlimited range using relational operators such as > (greater than) e.g., >10 would include all values greater than 10
    • ranges defined by variables in the questionnaire e.g., <Q9 would include all values less than the response to Q9
    • a list e.g., 1,2,3

    More information about setting valid ranges can be found at Setting valid ranges on a question

    Setting the response format using Patterns

    Patterns define the format of the data that a respondent should enter when completing the questionnaire. Open ended questions use them to check that the entered data is in the correct format.

    In data entry, patterns help to

    • Ensure that respondents or data entry personnel enter the correct format for information such as postcodes, zip codes or National Insurance numbers. Pattern matching checks whether the answer is a possible match in the pattern.
    • Convert the data into a standard form, such as adding currency symbols in quantity data.

    Snap XMP contains a library of pre-defined patterns. You can also create your own using the Patterns dialog in Snap XMP Desktop.

    More information about patterns can be found at Introduction to patterns.

    Scanning validation

    Patterns can also help validate responses from scanned questionnaires.

    There are two types of scanning validation:

    • Spelling validation checks a response against a stored dictionary of words and tries to match responses to words in the dictionary.
    • Pattern validation attempts to match a response against the expected pattern of characters. This is often used to validate responses such as dates, telephone number and zip or post codes.

    More information about patterns can be found at Using scanning validation patterns

    The post Setting up response validation appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Variable properties https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/variable-properties/ Mon, 21 Mar 2022 11:39:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7494 All questions in a questionnaire are a form of variable. When you create a question in Design mode you create a variable used in all editions of the survey. Showing variable properties in the Questionnaire window Each variable has a set of individual properties. The properties depend on the type of question. You can examine and change […]

    The post Variable properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    All questions in a questionnaire are a form of variable. When you create a question in Design mode you create a variable used in all editions of the survey.

    Showing variable properties in the Questionnaire window

    1. Each variable has a set of individual properties. The properties depend on the type of question. You can examine and change the properties when you are in Design mode   in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select one or more questions.
    3. Click   to display the Variable Properties dialog box, or right-click and select Variable Properties from the context menu
    4. The Variable Properties dialog will be displayed
    Variable Properties dialog
    1. You can then edit the property values. If you have selected several questions of the same type, you can change any properties they share.

    Properties for all questions

    Property

    Description

    Name

    Name of the variable you currently have selected, for example: Q1

    Lock Name

    When set to Yes this stops the variable being renumbered

    Label

    This is a full description of the variable that will appear in the data entry and on all analysis reports. By default, this displays the editable variable grid label in grids and semantic scales or as the question text in other question styles.

    Text

    Displays the editable question text

    Response

    Response types shown will depend on the question style selected. The response will determine the number of replies that are possible and the way in which they are recorded when data entry is completed. Single: allow only one answer to be selected Multiple: allow more than one answer Quantity: accept numerical answers Date: accept suitable date formats, e.g., dd/mm/yy Time: accept suitable time formats, e.g., 2.30pm Literal: allow any text

    Must answer

    Yes forces this question to be asked during data entry. No allows the question to be kept blank

    Not asked

    Not Asked conditions are set to assist with the routing in a questionnaire and with survey analysis, by excluding certain categories of respondents

    Initial value

    A default value that will be displayed during the interview or data entry. If read only is set then this can be an expression defining a calculated value.

    Read only

    When set to Yes, prevents the respondents from setting the answer

    Aria role

    Assign a custom role to the question in the published output to improve accessibility

    Properties for closed questions only

    Property

    Description

    Code count

    The number of codes in the variable.

    Ordering

    Select the ordering method to use when rotating codes or grid as data is being entered. Only applies to questions with a fixed list of responses.

    Inverse: question codes alternate between each case in normal and reverse order

    Forward: codes appear in the same order but always start forward one

    Random: codes appear in a random order

    Alphabetic: codes appear in alphabetical order

    Ordering exclude

    Specify the codes that are excluded from ordering. When ordering, the selected codes will always be moved to the end of the list.

    Ordinal

    An ordinal question is a single response question where the answer codes form a sequence. Set to Yes to preserve the order of the question.

    Mask

    Specifies which codes are visible according to previous responses.

    Auto answer

    Automatically answer a masked multi-choice question: if only one response is possible, or if the number of responses available is less than the value set for Min.

    Properties for multi-response questions only

    Property

    Description

    Rating check

    Yes set each grid row or semantic scale entry to accept only one answer. No allows multiple answers per row.

    Min

    Minimum number of codes which respondents have to select before moving onto the next question. The default for Min is 0. If Min is not 0, an error message is shown if a respondent leaves the question blank.

    Max

    Maximum number of codes which can be selected. Default is the number of codes in the question.

    Exclusive

    Specify which codes can only be selected on their own (e.g., Don’t know).

    Properties for open questions only

    Property

    Description

    Max data length

    Maximum number of characters in response.

    Decimal places

    (Quantity responses) Number of decimal places used in analysis (apply a whole number pattern to stop decimal places being entered)

    Box Scaling

    Set to Scaled to make the box length proportional to width of the column or page the box is in. Set to Fixed to fix the length as Box Length. This is the equivalent of Fixed and Proportional on the topic toolbar.

    Box Length

    Length of box given in character spaces if there is no box scaling.

    Box width (%)

    Percentage of column used for box if there is box scaling.

    Box rows

    The number of rows in the open ended answer area.

    Valid

    Range of valid responses (e.g., 0 to 99).

    Pattern

    Defines possible valid ways for the data to be entered.

    Scanning validation

    (Scanning only) Select the validation type for scanning.

    The post Variable properties appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting up filters for Snap XMP Online analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-up-filters-snap-online-analysis/ Wed, 09 Mar 2022 17:03:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7474 This tutorial shows how to filter your survey’s analyses and reports on Snap XMP Online. These allow you and your shared users to quickly filter the data used in the analyses and reports. It also covers how to hide reports and analyses so they cannot be seen on Snap XMP Online. This is only available for online […]

    The post Setting up filters for Snap XMP Online analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial shows how to filter your survey’s analyses and reports on Snap XMP Online. These allow you and your shared users to quickly filter the data used in the analyses and reports. It also covers how to hide reports and analyses so they cannot be seen on Snap XMP Online. This is only available for online surveys created in Snap XMP Desktop.

    Step 1: Creating the filters to use in Snap XMP Online

    The external filters and contexts are defined from the Analyses or Reports windows. Once defined, the filter or context can be applied to reports and analyses in Snap XMP Desktop and Snap XMP Online.

    1. Click Analyses or Reports  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
    2. Click on Define External Filter/Context  . This opens the Define External Filter/Context dialog.
    3. Select the Filter tab to enter a filter or the Context tab to enter a context.
    4. Click Add to add a new filter or context variable to the list. Select from the list of variables in the selected survey and click OK.
    1. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order of the list.
    2. Click OK to save the filters.

    Step 2: Checking the filter in Snap XMP Desktop

    External filters or contexts allow you to filter the cases used in an analysis or report without changing the analysis or report definition. This is useful for testing the filters available in Snap XMP Online.

    1. Click Analyses on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
    2. Double click on an analysis to display it in the Analysis Display dialog.
    3. Click on Apply External Filter/Context  . This opens the Apply External Filter/Context dialog. If this is disabled, then select Allow additional filters on the Analysis Definition dialog.
    4. In the Apply External Filter/Context dialog, select the Filter or Context tab.
    5. Select the code(s) in the selected variable(s) in the list to apply a filter or context. In this example, the location Bristol UK is selected.
    1. If you have applied a mask to the filter, the filter codes displayed will depend on the mask settings.
    2. Click OK to apply the filters to the analysis. This will show the data responses filtered for the Bristol location.

    Step 3: Using the filters in Snap XMP Online

    Any analyses or reports that include external filters can use these to view a filtered subset of the response data. To apply a filter to an analyses, use the following instructions:

    1. In Snap XMP Online, select the survey from Your work.
    2. In the Summary tab, click the Analyze link. The reports and analyses are available here.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Select Tables and Charts in the side menu then select the analysis you want to view.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
    1. To apply a filter to the selected table or chart, select Filter & context in the side menu.
    2. Click Add variable   to add a filter rule.
    3. In the Select a variable list, select a variable to use as the filter then click Next.
    4. Select the answers to use in the filter and click OK.
    Graphical user interface, application, Word

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Apply changes to update the analysis of your response data for the selected filter.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

    Turning external filters on and off in Snap XMP Desktop

    Settings in the analyses can determine whether other users can apply the external filters to an analysis in Snap XMP Online by using settings in Snap XMP Desktop. You can also control whether they can see an individual analysis.

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open your survey and click Analyses to open the Analyses window.
    2. Open the analysis that you want to control and click Properties   on the Analysis Display toolbar to display the analysis definition.
    3. In the Definition tab, select Allow additional filters to enable filters for this analysis in Snap XMP Online. (Clear this to disable external filters in Snap XMP Online.)
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Check that the Available field is clear or says Yes. (Enter No in this field to stop the analysis being available in Snap XMP Online. Enter a condition in this field to allow the analysis to be available in Snap XMP Online if the condition is true.)

    You can set Available conditions on reports in the report definition.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, Word, email

Description automatically generated

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Setting up filters for Snap XMP Online analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Putting counts and percentages on a bar chart https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/counts-and-percentages-on-bar-chart/ Tue, 01 Mar 2022 10:58:49 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7407 Bar charts normally display one value per bar. You can choose whether this is: This tutorial explains how to create a bar chart that shows both the counts and the percentage values on a single chart: Note: To show either counts or percents on a bar chart, use the preconfigured chart styles supplied with Snap XMP […]

    The post Putting counts and percentages on a bar chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Bar charts normally display one value per bar. You can choose whether this is:

    • the count (number of respondents who chose that response)
    • the percentage (number of respondents as a percentage of the total).

    This tutorial explains how to create a bar chart that shows both the counts and the percentage values on a single chart:

    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

    Note: To show either counts or percents on a bar chart, use the preconfigured chart styles supplied with Snap XMP Desktop, such as, Bar Counts Labelled or Bar percent labelled.

    Bar chart styles

    Bar charts are different from tables because you can only display one value for each bar (the height of the bar on the scale).

    You can represent counts and percentage values together in a table.
    Graphical user interface, application, table

Description automatically generated with medium confidence

    For a bar chart, the height of the bar must be either the counts or the percentage. If you want to display both the counts and the percentage value, you need to pass in the counts and use the Chart Designer to calculate the percentages from the counts.

    The following examples use the Bar Counts style to display an item in the Analysis field.

    If you enter a term in the Analysis field, the bar chart styles identify the separate items by colour and use a key to tell you which bar is associated with which question or question code.

    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
    If you enter a term in the Break field, the bar chart styles identify the separate item by labelling the X-axis below the bars. (This also happens if you enter the term in the Analysis field and check Transpose.)
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

    You can enter analysis terms in both the Analysis and the Break fields (as for a cross-tabulation) and see the results displayed as a bar chart.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
    If you are only using a single term, you can choose whether to have your bars identified by a colour key or labelled.

    If you want your chart to give the exact values for each bar, you can display them on the chart.

    Bar chart of counts using the Bar Counts Labelled style. The term is in the Analysis field and the Transpose box is checked.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

    Bar chart percentages

    When you display a percentage, you need to know what it is a percentage of. The base percents shown in the table are calculated as the percentage of all the respondents that gave that response.

    If you are charting a single-response question, the total number of responses is probably the same as the number of respondents. If you are charting a multi-response question, there will be more responses than respondents.

    The Chart Designer can’t work out how many respondents there are from the number of responses, so it can’t calculate the percentages automatically. You must tell it.

    1: Creating a table of the analysis

    1. Open the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.
    2. Click Analysis Table  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to create a table.
    3. In Analysis, enter Q2.
    4. Select Counts and Base Percents.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Apply to display your table. You can use this to confirm that you have displayed the correct values on the chart.
    Graphical user interface, application, table

Description automatically generated with medium confidence

    2: Creating the bar chart

    1. Click Analysis Chart  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to create a chart.
    2. Set the style to Bar Counts and set the analysis to Q2.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Apply to display your chart. This shows a basic bar chart with no figures displayed on the bars.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Edit Style on the chart toolbar. This opens the Chart Designer where you can change the appearance of the chart.
    2. In the chart elements list, click on Series then click on the Daily datapoint. Click on the Datapoint Label defaults.
    3. In the Appearance tab, select Base to display the counts and percent at the top of the bar. In the Datapoint Label section select Automatic, Value and Percent.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the Value Format tab, select Number and 0 to display whole numbers.
    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated
    1. In the Percent Format tab, select As Percentage and 0% to display percentages.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Repeat this for all the datapoints.
    2. Click Apply to update the chart.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
    1. Compare the percentage figures on the chart to the figures on the table. You will see that they do not match. This is because the figures on the chart are calculated automatically using the size of the largest bar. To make the figures display correctly, enter the base figure in the Chart Designer to use to calculate the percentages.
    2. In the Chart Designer click the Y Axis section. The scale is set automatically. Clear the Automatic check box then set the Maximum to the respondent base for the survey: 385 in this example.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Apply to update the chart. The percentage values displayed on the chart are now correct.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated

    3: Changing the labels on the Y-axis

    Sometimes the chart appears with an unnecessarily precise Y-axis labelling. You can choose to not display the Y-axis, or you can change the display of the labels, so they do not show decimal places.

    Chart, waterfall chart

Description automatically generated

    Hide the Y-axis

    You can stop displaying the y-axis by clearing the Show box.

    Graphical user interface, text, application, Word

Description automatically generated

    Changing the number of divisions on the Y-axis

    Change the number of grid divisions to a factor of 385 (e.g., 7), so that no decimal places are needed. This is done by setting the value in the Major box under Divisions.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Format the Y-axis labels

    1. Select Axis Labels under Y Axis in the chart elements pane.
    2. Select the Format tab.
    3. Select the Number category and 0 as the Format Code.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK.

    Saving the style

    You can save the chart style that you have just created by right clicking the chart and selecting Save Style from the context menu.

    Further information

    To find out more about how the Chart Designer works, see Using the Chart Designer.

    There is a worksheet on creating your own chart styles: Use Chart styles to add branding to your charts.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Putting counts and percentages on a bar chart appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating running totals https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-running-totals/ Thu, 24 Feb 2022 15:04:46 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7394 You often have a set of questions where you wish to total the answers. For example: The amount allocated to each option gives the relative importance of each. This gives good numeric data for analysis, but is quite difficult for respondents. This worksheet shows you how to calculate a running total as the respondent completes […]

    The post Creating running totals appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You often have a set of questions where you wish to total the answers. For example:

    • asking how many hours a week respondents spend doing different things
    • asking how much money respondents spent on different activities during a visit
    • asking respondents to share a fixed amount or percentage between a set of options

    The amount allocated to each option gives the relative importance of each. This gives good numeric data for analysis, but is quite difficult for respondents.

    This worksheet shows you how to calculate a running total as the respondent completes the answers. It explains how to create a set of Open Series First and Open Series Next questions for quantity responses and put a running total into the final response. It also shows you how to set a valid range on the total, so that respondents cannot move to the next page if the total has overrun.

    Please note: The Open Series First and Open Series Next question styles are new in Snap XMP Desktop. If you are using a survey that has been upgraded from Snap 11 Professional then the equivalent question style is Open Grid First and Open Grid Next.

    Step 1: Create your set of questions

    The first step is to create the group of questions that need to be totalled. These must be quantity questions.

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Click New Question to create a new question.
    3. Select Open Series First as the question style
    4. Select Response in the next dropdown then select Quantity as the response type.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Enter the question text, for example “How did you spend your day at the activity centre? Please allocate hours to the activities up to a maximum of 8 hours.
    2. Enter the first activity in the grid label.
    3. Press Tab to create the next question in the list. By default, the next question added is an Open Series Next question with a Quantity response. Enter another activity in the grid label. Repeat until you have entered all the activities.
    4. Add an extra grid question to display the running total.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save to save the questionnaire.

    Step 2: Display the total in the calculated field and set the valid range

    1. Select the open series question that will display the total.
    2. Click Variable Properties to open the Variable Properties dialog.
    3. In this example, the total hours have a valid range of 0 to 8. Scroll to the Valid property and enter 0 to 8.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    1. Scroll to the Initial Value property and enter the total: Q1a+Q1b+Q1c+Q1d+Q1e. When the open series entries change the value of the total field is updated when the respondent moves to the next entry. The questions used in the total calculation must always be asked earlier in the questionnaire.
    Graphical user interface, application, table

Description automatically generated
    1. By default, the Read Only property is set to No. This allows the respondent to edit the total field. In this example, the total should not be edited so set the Read Only property to Yes. This renames the Initial Value property to the Calculation property.
    Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK.
    2. Click Save to save the questionnaire.
    3. When the questionnaire is complete. Publish the survey in Snap XMP Desktop or Snap XMP Online.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated

    If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Creating running totals appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Working with rating scale questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/working-with-rating-scale-questions/ Wed, 23 Feb 2022 13:19:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7367 One of the most useful forms of question is a rating scale, where you ask people to mark how satisfied they were with an item or a service. You can then analyse the answers to these questions to see if people are generally satisfied or dissatisfied, so you are more able to judge where to […]

    The post Working with rating scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    One of the most useful forms of question is a rating scale, where you ask people to mark how satisfied they were with an item or a service. You can then analyse the answers to these questions to see if people are generally satisfied or dissatisfied, so you are more able to judge where to put the effort in to improve what you offer.

    For example, here are five rating questions with a five point scale.

    Table

Description automatically generated

    You could use the responses to these questions to help you judge whether you should invest in a larger parking lot or better food.

    This tutorial explains some of the issues about using the data as it stands and describes how to set up a three-column table and a simple bar chart to display whether people are generally satisfied or not.

    Background

    When you are looking at the responses, you need to be careful that you know what is being counted, and that you compare like with like.

    For example, how do you compare people’s satisfaction with parking and cleanliness if forty people answer your questionnaire:

    • ten people answer the parking question, of whom eight select Good
    • forty people answer the cleanliness question, of whom twenty select Good.

    To make the comparison useful, you could:

    • ignore the people who haven’t responded, and compare the percentage of people who responded who think it is good (in this case 80% think parking is good while 50% think cleanliness is good).
    • count the people who hadn’t responded as neutral, and then compare the percentages (20% of all respondents think parking is good while 50% think cleanliness is good)

    You need to then display your conclusions clearly.

    Here are some of the ways you could display the rating data in tables.

    Look at the responses in detail with a grid table

    This tells you how many people and what percentage of people, selected which answer to which question. You can find more information about creating grid tables.
    Table

Description automatically generated

    Compare the questions as a whole

    • You could use confidence boxes to group the Poor and Very poor responses together as Negative, and the Good and Very good responses together as Positive and see which question scored highest on Negative or Positive responses. You can find more information about creating a satisfaction scale tables here.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    • You could work out a value for all the responses for a question and see which question did best on average. One of the clearest ways of showing this is to give the responses a score ranging from negative to positive. You can find more information about creating a scoring system here.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    • You can reduce the table to three columns using derived variables, to make it easy to see the general trends. This worksheet describes how to do this.
    Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated

    This tutorial uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey data supplied with Snap XMP and shows you how to create derived variables from the rating questions, so you can display the ratings in a three-column table, as Positive, OK, or Negative. The rating scale questions in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey are questions Q6.a to Q6.e.

    Step 1: Create derived variables for the three columns

    You need to create a new variable with 3 codes that represent each five-point rating scale to a three-point rating scale: Positive, OK and Negative.

    Create the new variable

    1. Click Variables  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Variables window.
    2. Click New Variable  on the Variables window toolbar to create a new variable.
    3. Set the Name to ThreePointV6a to remind you that it is a three-point rating scale derived from Q6.a.
    4. Set the Type to Derived. (The values in this variable are derived from the answers to the rating scale questions.)
    5. Set the Label to Speed of service.
    6. Set the Response to Single.

    Create the code list

    1. Click in the Label area for code 1 and type Negative. This is going to be the heading of the column in your analysis.
    2. Click Tab to move to the Values column.
    3. Enter an expression to select the Poor or Very poor responses to the rating question. In this example, these are the responses 1 (Very poor) and 2 (Poor). The expression that selects these responses to the appropriate question (Q6a in this example) is Q6a=(1,2). I.e., if the answer to Q6a is either 1 or 2, this variable will have an answer of Negative.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Tab to move to the Label column for code 2 and type OK.
    2. Click Tab to move to the Values column and type Q6a=3 (i.e., the answer to Q6a is code 3, OK).
    3. Click Tab to move to the Label column for code 3 and type Positive.
    4. Click Tab to move to the Values column and type Q6a=(4,5)(i.e., the answer to Q6a is code 4 or 5, good or very good).
    Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated
    1. Click  on the Variables window toolbar to check the number of responses for the parts of your new variable. This displays the correct counts.
    2. Click Save  to save your variable.
    3. Highlight the variable that you have just created in the Variables window and click Clone Variable  to create a copy.
    4. Edit the new cloned variable. Change the variable Name to ThreePointV6b, the Label to Cleanliness and change the question number used in the code values from Q6a to Q6b.
    5. Click Save  to save your variable.
    6. Repeat cloning and editing the variable for Q6c (Parking), Q6d (Quality of food) and Q6e (Choice of food).

    Step 2: Create an analysis table from the derived variables

    You can now create analyses based on the new derived variables.

    1. To create a table, click Analysis Table  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window for a table.
    2. In Analysis, enter ThreePointV6a ~ ThreePointV6e as the analysis expression. (If the variable names are not in sequence, enter them individually, in the format V6a, V6b, V6c, V6d, V6e.)
    3. Select the Analysis Percents box, so you can see what percentage of people chose each answer.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Apply to update the table.
    Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save  to save the analysis table.

    Step 3: Create a stacked bar chart from the derived variables

    Although the table displays all the information you need, it might be easier to see it in a chart. This step shows creating a stacked bar chart to display the same results.

    1. Click Analyses AnalysesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Analyses window.
    2. Click the analysis table that you have just created in the Analyses window and click Clone Analysis  to create a copy. This opens the Analysis Definition window.
    3. In Type, select Chart.
    4. Set the Style to Horizontal Stacked Bar Counts Transposed.
    5. Select Counts and clear Analysis Percents.
    6. Select Transpose.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Select the Notes/Title tab and type Satisfaction ratings as the title of your chart. Clear any values for the Analysis and Break chart axis titles.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Apply to display the chart. (You may need to drag the definition window away from the chart window.)
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save  to save the analysis chart.

    The chart shows the satisfaction ratings as a single bar for each question. From the chart, it is easy to see that people are most dissatisfied with Service and most satisfied with Choice of food. The number of responses for each rating is given on that section of the bar.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Working with rating scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Interlocking quotas https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/interlocking-quotas/ Tue, 22 Feb 2022 13:47:28 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7355 This tutorial explains how to limit respondents in multiple categories, for example, by gender and age, also known as an interlocking quota. You can find these questions in the Reference Survey Pak (Personal demographics) supplied with Snap XMP. Step 1: Create a derived variable To set up an interlocking quota, you first need to set […]

    The post Interlocking quotas appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial explains how to limit respondents in multiple categories, for example, by gender and age, also known as an interlocking quota.

    You can find these questions in the Reference Survey Pak (Personal demographics) supplied with Snap XMP.

    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Step 1: Create a derived variable

    To set up an interlocking quota, you first need to set up a derived variable in your survey.

    1. Open the survey in Snap XMP Desktop.
    2. Click Variables on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Variables window.
    3. Click New variable to create a new variable.
    4. Name the variable AgeGenderGroup, and label it Age and gender groups.
    5. Set the Type to Derived, the Response to Single.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. In the code list add the code labels and values:
    LabelValues
    Males under 25Q1=1 AND Q2=1
    Males 25 and overQ1=1 AND Q2=(2,3,4)
    Females under 25Q1=2 AND Q2=1
    Females 25 and overQ1=2 AND Q2=(2,3,4)
    1. Click Save to save the variable.

    Step 2: Set up the quota for the variable

    1. Select View | Quotas and Screen Outs. This opens the Quota and Screen Outs window.
    2. Click New Quota or Screen Out then select New Quota. This opens the Quota dialog.
    3. In Name, enter AgeGenderQuota.
    4. In Variable, select the variable AgeGenderGroup. When you select a variable, the Details table lists all the answer codes. The target for each category is available as a number or percentage. When you enter a target number, this automatically updates the percentage and overall target. Once interviewing has started Actual and % show the latest response counts.
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated
    1. When the quota is exceeded, the participant is directed to a web page or shown a custom message. In multilingual surveys, select the language then enter the message for the selected language. Further details are available at: Notifying the participant when a quota or screen out is exceeded
    2. Click OK to save the quota. The Quota and Screen Outs window shows the new quota.

    Step 3: Enable the quota

    You can enable quotas individually or at the survey level, which is the default. You can change this in the Quota Control dialog.

    In the Quota dialog, select Enabled to activate the selected quota. Clear Enabled to disable the selected quota.

    If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Interlocking quotas appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Selecting the language in a multi-lingual questionnaire using the map control https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/selecting-language-using-map-control/ Thu, 17 Feb 2022 16:58:31 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7333 When running a multi-lingual survey, you want to make it easy for the respondent to select the language before starting to answer the questions. This can be achieved using images associated with the languages, such as flags. In Snap XMP, a survey can use multiple languages. An edition is created for each language added to […]

    The post Selecting the language in a multi-lingual questionnaire using the map control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When running a multi-lingual survey, you want to make it easy for the respondent to select the language before starting to answer the questions. This can be achieved using images associated with the languages, such as flags.

    In Snap XMP, a survey can use multiple languages. An edition is created for each language added to the survey.

    In Snap XMP, the map control can be used to allow the respondent to answer a question, or in this case, to choose a language by selecting an image.

    Blank multi-lingual survey templates supplied with Snap XMP

    Snap XMP is supplied with a multi-lingual survey template that already has a language edition built into them. The supplied survey templates differ by location and, at present, include:

    • Blank Template with Welsh Edition in UK
    • Blank Template with Spanish Edition in US
    • Blank Template with French Edition in US
    • Blank Template with French Edition in Canada
    • Blank Template with Dutch Edition in Europe
    • Blank Template with Spanish Edition in Europe
    • Blank Template with Dutch and French Edition in Europe

    These are available in the Reference SurveyPak provided in each region.

    Creating a survey using the Blank multi-lingual survey templates

    When you create a new survey in Snap XMP select the survey template with the required language. In this example, the Blank Template with Welsh Edition survey template is used.

    1. Click Survey Overview   on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Survey Overview window.
    2. Click Online Surveys   on the Survey Overview toolbar to show the online surveys.
    3. Click   to create a new online survey.
    4. Choose one of the multi-lingual survey templates as a starting point for the new survey. In this example, the Blank Template with Welsh Edition template is used. Select the survey template and click Next.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Enter the new survey’s name, title and location, then click OK.
    2. This creates a survey with editions for PC/laptop, tablet, phone and paper in English and Welsh. The edition details are shown on the tabs at the bottom of the questionnaire window.
    1. Immediately below the title there is a question asking the respondent to choose their preferred language. This is defined in the survey template by setting the ID.Language paradata as displayed in the questionnaire. This is set up in the Paradata section of the questionnaire properties.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated

    Creating a map control

    This section shows how to convert the multi-choice language question to a map control.

    1. Select the language question and in the questionnaire toolbar, select Show in the second dropdown then select As Map Control in the third dropdown and select the Show checkbox.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. This shows an area under the question text that says Double click to define Map Control. Double click on this area. This opens the Map Control Editor.
    2. The next step is to import an image that contains the visual selection for each language. In this example, an image of the Welsh and British flags is used. Click the File menu then Import image. Browse to the image and click Open. The image is displayed in the Designer tab of the Map Control Editor.
    3. Next, you need to define the shape of the clickable area for each language. First, set the colour of the outline by clicking the Outline pen . Select the colour and width required and click OK.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click the Tools menu then select a shape. In this case, Square is selected. Draw the area around each flag.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Fill then select a colour and intensity, then click OK. This will show as a highlight when the respondent selects the flag.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Use the Preview tab to test how the map control will behave during the interview.
    Graphical user interface, application, Word

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to save the map control. If you wish to save the map control to use in other questionnaires, click the File menu then Save map control from the Designer tab.
    2. Repeat Step 1 for each edition of your survey that requires the map control for the language question.
    3. Click Save to save the changes to the questionnaire.

    Further Information

    The Blank templates are a good starting point but, in Snap XMP, you can also add an additional language as well as create a new language edition.

    There is also a webinar Multi Lingual Surveys and Forms from Snap Surveys on Vimeo  to help you build multi-lingual surveys.

    The post Selecting the language in a multi-lingual questionnaire using the map control appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting up panel exit pages https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-up-panel-exit-pages/ Wed, 16 Feb 2022 12:44:02 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7311 If you are using a bought-in panel of participants, the panel provider may require a participant ID to be passed into the survey, and subsequently passed back out along with a completion status. This allows the panel provider to track if a participant has completed the survey, been screened out, or if they were over […]

    The post Setting up panel exit pages appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    If you are using a bought-in panel of participants, the panel provider may require a participant ID to be passed into the survey, and subsequently passed back out along with a completion status. This allows the panel provider to track if a participant has completed the survey, been screened out, or if they were over quota. They collect this information by sending the participant to a webpage that captures their exit status and ID when they leave the survey.

    Snap XMP allows you to direct participants to a specific web address at the end of the survey. It also enables you to set a web address for screen outs and when a quota is full, using the new screen out and quota feature built into the software. This worksheet describes how to send the respondent to the relevant webpage and to include the participant ID and completion status.

    In this tutorial, the following exit pages are used:

    The participant ID must be added to the end of each URL to send the participant ID back to the panel provider. This enables them to be able to track which participants have completed the survey, and those that have failed to qualify.

    Step 1: Including a participant ID

    For the panel to identify which participants were completed, screened out or over quota, an ID must be assigned for each participant. This ID must be available in the survey for it to be used in the exit URL.

    1. Create an open-ended literal variable at the top of the survey, that will be used to collect the participant ID.
    1. It’s recommended to rename the variable, to avoid any confusion, as currently it will be called Question 1. To rename, right click on the variable and select Variable Properties. Then change the Name to something like ID.
    1. Press OK to confirm the change.
    2. You can then hide this variable, so that your respondents don’t see it in the survey (but this will still allow the data to be passed into the variable, and back out again). To hide the variable right click on it and select Hide Variable. If you have multiple editions in the survey, you will also need to hide the variable in all the editions.

    Step 2: Creating the screen out and quota full exit link

    These steps assume that you have already created your Quotas and Screen outs. If you require information on when to use these, please see our Introduction to quotas and screen outs for a general overview. To learn how to create a Quota, please see Setting up quotas. To learn how to create Screen Outs, please see Setting up screen outs.

    1. Open the survey in Snap XMP Desktop.
    2. Select View then Quotas and Screen Outs from the menu.
    3. In this example, there is one quota and one screen out. Each one will have the URL link set to the web page that is shown when the quota or screen out is triggered. This example starts by setting the quota’s exit URL. Double-click on the quota to open it.
    1. Select the URL option and enter the quota full URL provided by the panel.
    1. Add the name of the variable that collects the participant ID. In step 1 we named this variable ID, so enter the name of the variable in curly brackets onto the end of the URL, e.g. {ID}. The curly brackets act as a placeholder for the participant ID. The data from the variable is inserted onto the end of the URL.
    1. Press OK to confirm the change.
    2. Double click on the screen out to open it.
    3. Select URL and enter the screen out URL provided by the panel.
    4. Add the name of the participant ID variable in curly brackets onto the end of the URL, e.g. {ID}.
    1. Press OK to confirm the change. Both the quota full and screen out exit links are now set up. If you have any additional quotas or screen outs, then repeat the steps above to apply the URL to each of them.

    Step 3: Setting up the complete link

    Now that the quota full and screen out exit links have been created, you can now set up the on submit exit URL, for those respondents that successfully complete the whole survey.

    1. Open the Questionnaire Properties menu.
    1. Click on the Submit tab from the left-hand menu.
    2. Select Web Page for the on submit option and enter in the complete exit link.
    1. On the end of the URL enter the name of the variable that contains the participant ID in curly brackets. In this example the variable is called ID, so add {ID} onto the end of the URL.
    1. Press OK to confirm the change, then save the survey and upload the changes to your Snap Online account.

    Step 4: Passing the participant ID into the survey

    Once you have set up all the exit links for the survey, you are ready to test them with the panel company. First, you need to create the entry URL that the panel can use to add the participant ID onto the end, before providing it to each participant.

    1. Login to your Snap Online account.
    2. Click on the survey to select it.
    3. Select the Collect tab
    4. Publish the survey, if you have not done so already, to create the survey URL.
    1. Then start the interviewing to make the survey live.
    1. Use the Copy button to copy the live URL for the survey.
    1. Paste this URL into a text editor such as Notepad.
    2. You can then seed the participant ID into the survey via the URL. This is added as ?<variable name> = . In this example our variable name is ID, so my URL would be: https://online1.snapsurveys.com/tqxm2r?ID=
    1. You can then pass this URL to the panel company. They will add each participant ID onto the end of the URL, before providing the participant with the link. For example, if the participant ID is ABC123, the link provided to that participant would be:
      • https://online1.snapsurveys.com/tqxm2r?ID=ABC123

    This now completes the setup of a panel survey. The ID of the participant will be passed into the survey via the seeding on the entry URL for the survey. This passes a participant ID into the ID variable created in the survey. This is then passed out to the exit link, with the seeding that is set up for the Complete, Quota Full or Screen Out URL.

    The post Setting up panel exit pages appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating reports that include automatic text https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-report-automatic-text/ Wed, 02 Feb 2022 15:32:25 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7206 Smart Reports can be re-run using the latest data to produce an up-to-date report. You can easily re-run reports and know that once you have set up the report the way you like it, it will be reproduced like that every time you run it. In Snap XMP, reports are built up using instructions. These […]

    The post Creating reports that include automatic text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Smart Reports can be re-run using the latest data to produce an up-to-date report. You can easily re-run reports and know that once you have set up the report the way you like it, it will be reproduced like that every time you run it.

    In Snap XMP, reports are built up using instructions. These instructions allow you to add text, graphics, and analyses to a report. When the report is run, the current response data is inserted into the analyses and text information.

    You can insert references in your instructions. When the report is run these references are replaced with data from the survey or responses.

    In Snap XMP you can insert table cell references. If you create a table, you can use references to the row labels, column labels and the table cells in the report text, notes on analyses or even in another table. This means that you can use any data that is in the table in your report, and it will automatically use the latest data.

    In Snap XMP Desktop, you can create a ranked table and order the columns from highest to lowest. This means that you can automatically place the highest and lowest values in your report without needing to edit them.

    This tutorial explains how to create a simple report showing satisfaction rankings. The report uses data from analyses in the report text and shows how to use ranked tables to headline important points. For example, you can automatically include the aspects your customers are least satisfied with.

    This tutorial uses the Course Evaluation survey which is distributed as a sample survey with Snap XMP Desktop.

    How table cell references work

    Cell references are a means of inserting automatically updated data in a report (or in the notes for an analysis). A cell reference is the position of the data in the specified table.

    The cell referred to can be:

    • A row label (describe by tablename RN label e.g., AN1 R1 label
    • A column label (describe by tablename CN label e.g., AN1 C1 label)
    • A data cell described by its row and column number (describe by tablename RNCN e.g., AN1 R1C1)
    • A statistic value described by its row and statistic number (where its statistic number is its position in the list of statistics, S1 being the top, given by tablename RNSN e.g., AN1 R1S1)

    where N is replaced by the row or column number.

    Once you have inserted the cell reference into the report, any filters applied to the whole report are applied to the table containing the referenced cell.

    You can use any analysis as the basis for the reference. For example, if you wish to insert a reference to data in a chart, view the chart as a table to find the cell reference then redisplay it as a chart.

    You can find out what the code for a given cell is by putting the cursor on it or clicking it. The cell reference information will be displayed in the status bar.

    Graphical user interface, table

Description automatically generated

    You can also find the cell reference details by double-clicking the cell and checking the information in the Override Analysis Value dialog.

    Step 1: Deciding what goes into your report

    When you create a Smart Report, it is important to plan your report. The simple report used in this worksheet will include:

    • a title
    • a sentence giving the number of people totally satisfied with course content (from the table AN4)
    • a sentence giving the topic that most needs improvement (using ordered gap analysis)
    • the gap analysis chart AN15

    Step 2: Creating the instructions

    The report will contain a title, an information line, and an analysis.

    Add the title

    1. Click Reports on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Reports window.
    2. Click New Report   to create a new report. This is created with a Tailor Analysis instruction.
    3. In the Report details, click New Instruction   then select Information from the menu to add a new Information instruction.
    4. In the Information window, enter the title for your report in the text pane. Leave the Title field blank (this is the title of the Instruction). Style your title text by selecting text and using the format buttons.
    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to save the instruction.

    Create the satisfaction reference

    1. Click Analyses on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Analyses window.
    2. Open the grid table AN4 to check which cells you need. The report uses the label of the first row, and the value in the fifth column of the first row.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    1. Close the table and the Analyses windows.
    2. Return to your report and add another Information instruction.
    3. Enter the text “The number of people who were totally satisfied with the ” then click the Insert button and select Cell Value Field from the menu. This opens the New Cell Value Field dialog.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Enter the reference AN4 R1label in the box and click OK. This will put the contents of the label for row 1 of analysis AN4 in your report. When it appears in the report, it will be in curly braces. Note that the Base row is row 0.
    2. Add the text ” was: ” and then insert another cell value of AN4 R1C5. Style the text and references.
    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to save the Information instruction.

    Insert the gap analysis table in your report

    1. In the Report details, click New Instruction   then select Execute from the menu to add a new Execute instruction.
    2. In the Execute dialog, select AN15 (the Gap Analysis chart) from the Execute list.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to add the Execute instruction to the report.
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save to save the report.

    Step 3: Testing your report

    It is important to check that your report looks the way you want it and is picking up the correct data.

    1. Click the Execute  button on the Report toolbar. This opens the Report Execution dialog with options to Check, Preview or run the report.
    2. It is a good idea to check and preview your report on screen before sending it to a printer. Click the Printer button to select to print to a pdf file or to paper.
    3. Click OK to close the printer window and then click OK to run the report. Your report will look something like this.
    Chart, box and whisker chart

Description automatically generated
    1. Check that the data that appears in the report is from the correct table cell. The chart includes the description, title and notes. You can stop those appearing by changing the Analysis Definition.
    2. Click Analyses on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the Analyses window.
    3. Open the chart AN15 and select Properties to open the Analysis Definition.
    4. Select the Report Styles tab and clear the Reports Include options: Description, Notes, Analysis Text, and Title.
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to save your changes.
    2. Click Save to save the analysis
    3. Click Execute on the Report toolbar to and run the report again. Your report will now look something like this.
    Chart, box and whisker chart

Description automatically generated

    Step 4: Putting in the best and worst values

    You can put the highest and lowest values in a report automatically. This step shows you how to put the area needing the most improvement in the summary line by using a sorted table.

    Create a sorted table

    1. Select AN15 in the Analyses window.
    2. Click Clone Analysis to make a copy of it.
    3. In the Analysis Definition window showing the cloned analysis, change the Type to Table and the Order to Mean. This sorts the columns in order by the mean value, so the highest value will always appear in the first column and the lowest in the last.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to display the table.
    2. The lowest value in this table is in the fourth column. You can reference the column label to show which area is most in need of improvement.
    Table

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save to save the table.

    Add the area needing most improvement to the report

    1. Open your report.
    2. Open the second Information instruction (instruction 3).
    3. Add the text “The area most in need of improvement is :”.
    4. Insert the cell reference AN19 C4label to insert the label of the fourth column.
    5. Click OK to save the changes.
    6. Click Execute  to save changes and run the report again. Your report will now look something like this:
    Chart, box and whisker chart

Description automatically generated

    When more responses come in, you can run the report again, and it will be updated with the new data. If the outcomes are different, that will automatically be carried through to the report.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Creating reports that include automatic text appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Including the number of filtered cases in a report instruction https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/including-number-filtered-cases-in-report-instruction/ Tue, 01 Feb 2022 11:06:20 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7188 Often a report is run using a filter to view a subset of the overall response data. Including the filter information and number of filtered cases gives the recipient of the report a clear description of the data they are viewing. In Snap XMP, you can include the filter and the number of filtered cases […]

    The post Including the number of filtered cases in a report instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Often a report is run using a filter to view a subset of the overall response data. Including the filter information and number of filtered cases gives the recipient of the report a clear description of the data they are viewing.

    In Snap XMP, you can include the filter and the number of filtered cases in a report instruction using a Survey field. When the filter is changed, the filter survey fields in the instruction will show the updates when the report is run.

    In this tutorial, the Summary report is used. The Summary report is supplied with Snap XMP Desktop and each questionnaire contains this report. This report can be customised as required in the questionnaire.

    Step 1: Inserting the survey field in your report

    1. Click Reports  on the Snap toolbar to open the Reports window.
    2. Select the Summary report and click  to make a copy of it. This will ensure that you can go back to the original if you make any mistakes.
    3. Close the copy and open the Summary report.
    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated
    1. Double-click the Information instruction to open it. The text may vary depending on the version of Snap or survey template used to create the questionnaire. The instruction shown is from a questionnaire created in Snap XMP Desktop using the Blank Template. This instruction already includes a sentence showing the number of filtered cases. The following instructions show how to add this sentence.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click in the text area where the text will start and type ‘A total of ‘
    2. Click the Insert button and select Survey Field from the options.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, table

Description automatically generated
    1. In the New Survey Field dialog, select Cases(Filtered) as the Field. In Modify case, select Normal as the case.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click OK to insert the field.
    2. Enter the remaining text ‘ cases fall into this category.’
    3. Click OK to save your changes to the instruction.
    4. Click Save to save the changes to the report.

    Step 2: Applying the filter

    1. Add the filter to the Filter field at the top of the report window. For example, using the question Q1. Are you a member of Activate Swimming Club?
    Text

Description automatically generated with medium confidence
    1. To create a report on all the members of the club, enter Q1=1 in the Filter field.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, Word, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click the Execute  button on the report toolbar to run the report.
      The data that you have referenced will be filtered, so that when you run the report, you will see the number of filtered cases.
    Graphical user interface, text

Description automatically generated
    1. When you are happy with the new version of the report, delete the cloned back-up report.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Including the number of filtered cases in a report instruction appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Tailored reports and analyses in shared surveys https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/tailored-reports-and-analyses-in-shared-surveys/ Mon, 31 Jan 2022 11:22:09 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=7157 In Snap XMP, you can create reports and analyses in your survey that change according to who is looking at them in Snap XMP Online. This is done by creating the reports and analyses with a context in Snap XMP Desktop. When you share the survey with an analyst or researcher in Snap XMP Online, […]

    The post Tailored reports and analyses in shared surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In Snap XMP, you can create reports and analyses in your survey that change according to who is looking at them in Snap XMP Online. This is done by creating the reports and analyses with a context in Snap XMP Desktop.

    When you share the survey with an analyst or researcher in Snap XMP Online, you can also set the context for that user. The report or analysis available to the shared user is tailored according to the context.

    The survey needs to include a single-response variable that can be used as the context. For example, this could be a location or a job function.

    The reports or analyses are created using information that changes according to the context, that is filtered according to the context or both. In Snap XMP Online, you can share the survey with another user with any context or filter values set on the survey.

    Step 1: Create context-sensitive reports and analyses in your survey

    You need to put context-sensitive information in your reports and analyses. If you want to set up the report in your own version of Crocodile Rock Cafe survey, the instructions are given below.

    This section describes briefly how to change the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey provided with Snap XMP to create the context sensitive report. It consists of the following stages

    • 1: Set up a derived variable to compare all data to the current context data
    • 2: Create a bar chart comparing the amount spent in the specified location with the amount spent elsewhere using the comparison variable
    • 3: Create a comments list filtered on context
    • 4: Create your report including the comparison bar chart and filtered comment list

    Set up a derived variable to compare all data to the current context data

    1. Click    to open the Variables window.
    2. Open Q0 and change its Name to Location to make it more obvious what it is. This is the context variable.
    3. Click   on the Variables window toolbar to add a new variable.
    4. Specify the Variable details:
      • Name: CComparison
      • Label: Compare context to all
      • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from Location, the existing location question).
      • Response: Multiple
    5. Double click in the first code label and click the Insert button. Select Variable Field from the menu.
    Graphical user interface

Description automatically generated
    1. Select Location as the Variable, and Context as the Aspect. This will give the selected location as the code label. Click OK to return to the variable definition.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Press Tab to move to the Values column. Enter Location=Location@context. The code used will be the code that equals the location specified by the context.
    2. Press Tab to move to the next Label field and enter Other sites. Then enter NOT(Location=Location@context) as the Value. This code will be used when the response does not equal the location specified by context.
    3. Press [Tab] to move to the next Label field and enter All sites. Then enter True as the Value.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Click  to save the variable.

    Create a bar chart comparing one restaurant to the others using the comparison variable

    1. Click Analysis Chart   to display the Analysis Definition dialog for a chart.
    2. Select the chart style Bar Counts from the drop-down list.
    3. Type CComparison (your derived variable) into the Analysis field.
    4. Check the Transpose box.
    5. Select Means & Significances from the Calculate list and enter Q5 (the amount spent) as the variable to use.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Select the Notes/Titles tab and click in the Title field.
    Graphical user interface, text, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Enter the title of your chart, using the Insert button to open the Variable field dialog and insert the Name aspect of Q5. Click OK and repeat to insert the Context aspect of Location in the title.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Clear the Chart Axis titles.
    2. Select the Base/Labels tab.
    3. Clear the Reports Include options for Description and Notes if set.
    4. Click Apply to update the chart while keeping the analysis definition displayed.
    Chart, bar chart

Description automatically generated
    1. There will be no data for the title and subject as no context has been set.
    2. Click Save  to save your chart.

    Add a comments list filtered on context

    1. Click  to create a list. The picture below shows a list consisting of the variable (Q9) with comments plus the displayed location.
      Apply a filter of Q9 ok and Location=Location@context to filter the comments according to the current location. Q9 ok tests that an answer has been supplied to Q9 to strip out empty comments. Location=Location@context filters the comments according to the selected location.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. Select the Base/Labels tab and clear the Reports Include options for Description and Notes if set.
    2. Click OK to create the new list. It will have no content as no context has been set.
    3. Click Save  to save your list.

    Create your report including the comparison bar chart and filtered comment list

    1. Click   on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar to open the reports window.
    2. Click   to create a new report and give it a label describing it.
    3. Click   on the report dialog and select Information to add a piece of text to your report.
    4. Enter the title for your report in the text pane. Leave the Title field blank.
    5. Click OK to add the Information instruction to the report.
    6. Click   on the report dialog and select Execute.
    7. Click  on the Execute dialog and select the comparison chart (AN14) from the list.
    8. Click OK to add the Execute instruction to the report.
    9. Click  on the report dialog and select Information to add text after the comparison chart.
    10. Enter some text describing the comments list. Use Insert to insert the Context Aspect of the Location variable to insert the label of the current location.
    11. Type AN18 empty in the N/A field. This tests if there is currently any data in the comments list (analysis AN18). If there is no data, the report will not include the instruction.
    12. Click OK to add the Information instruction to the report.
    13. Click  and select Execute from the drop-down menu.
    14. Select the comments list (AN18) from the list of analyses.
    15. Click OK to add the Execute instruction to the report.
    Graphical user interface, text, email

Description automatically generated
    1. Click Save   to save your report.

    Step 2: Sharing the survey with a context

    Other Snap XMP Online users are given permission to share a survey through the Shares tab in Snap XMP Online.

    1. Log in to Snap XMP Online to show Your work. If you are already using Snap XMP Online, click Home to return to Your work, where the Summary tab displays by default.
    2. Select the survey to share, then select the Shares tab, which lists the users who have shared access to the survey.
    Shares tab showing the users that share the selected survey
    1. Click the Add user button to enter the details of the user you want to share the survey with. The user must have a Snap XMP Online account.
    Graphical user interface, application

Description automatically generated
    1. In the Add user dialog enter the user’s email address that they use to access their Snap XMP Online account.
    2. Next set the Permissions for the user. Further information on the permissions is available at Sharing overview.
    3. Type the required context in the Context field (Location=1 in this example). Note that the context will not be checked here. It is only checked when it is used, and it is only used when the client logs in and looks at the analyses or reports.
    4. Set Enabled to Yes for the user to have access to the shared survey or survey template.
    5. Set Manage shares to No if you do not want the user to share the survey with other account holders or set to Yes if you want the user to be able to share the survey with other Snap XMP Online account users.
    6. When you have entered the user details, click Save to add the user. The user has access to the shared item. The Shares list includes the new user.
    7. Select the Show contexts/filters to view the context and filter columns.
    Graphical user interface, text, application, email

Description automatically generated
    1. The shared icon shows that the survey or survey template is shared.

    Step 3: Testing the context

    1. Log into Snap XMP Online using the shared user’s login details.
    2. Select the survey with the filter value you have just set up.
    3. In the Summary tab, click the Analyze link
    4. Click Reports or Tables & charts in the side menu then select a report or analysis.
    1. Confirm that the results show the context as you would expect. If you have made an error when applying the context, you will now see a message. Look at any other results to confirm that the context applies to all of them.
    2. Click Log out.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Tailored reports and analyses in shared surveys appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using routing in grid questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-routing-in-grid-questions/ Fri, 10 Dec 2021 12:57:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6985 The shorter the online survey, the more likely respondents will complete it. The length of your online survey depends on many factors. Ideally, the length of your online survey is based on the number of relevant questions asked and the optimal length that will convince someone to respond. With question routing, you can ask questions based on […]

    The post Using routing in grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The shorter the online survey, the more likely respondents will complete it. The length of your online survey depends on many factors. Ideally, the length of your online survey is based on the number of relevant questions asked and the optimal length that will convince someone to respond. With question routing, you can ask questions based on replies, or any combination of replies given earlier in the survey. 

    Routing allows you to select which is the next question in the questionnaire based on previous answers. There are three types of routing:

    • Conditionally Ask Question. The respondent sees the question when certain conditions are met. For example, if the respondent answers a previous questions giving a particular answer.
    • Goto On Answer. The respondent moves through the questionnaire depending which answer they select. It’s normally used to skip sections of a questionnaire according to the response to a single-response question.
    • Goto After Question. The respondent moves through the questionnaire after a question has been answered. It’s normally used to jump irrelevant sections of a questionnaire.

    This worksheet describes how to set up Conditionally Ask routing so that only the appropriate elements in a grid question are displayed based on responses from previous questions and also displaying question based on responses in a grid.

    Display a grid based on the response to a question

    In this example, a questionnaire starts with a multi-choice question asking which means of transport the respondent uses to go to work. Several sets of grid questions display depending upon the answer to the first question. For example, the grid asking about travelling to work by car only shows if the respondent answers Car (code 1). Routing only shows the grid when it is relevant.

    QuestionMC.PNG
    QuestionGrid.PNG
    1. Select the first row of the grid, (Q3.a) I choose to travel by car because….
    2. Click Routing Rules RoutingIcon.png to open the Routing Rules dialog for that question.
    RoutingRules1.PNG
    1. Click Add to create a routing rule.
    NewRouting.PNG
    1. Set the type to be Conditionally Ask Question and click OK. This opens the Routing Rules dialog.
    2. In the If field, enter Q1=1. This will display the first grid row if the respondent has selected code 1 (Car) in response to question 1.
    RoutingRules2.PNG
    1. Click OK. A small arrow is added to the start of the question to show that there is routing applied to it. You can double-click this arrow to open the Routing Rules details.
    QuestionGrid2a.png
    1. This Routing Rule need to be applied to all the rows in the grid. This can be done using in the Variable Properties. Select the grid question containing routing and click Variable Properties VariablePropsIcon.png to display the Variable Properties window. The routing condition is shown in the Not Asked property.
    2. Copy the Not Asked property then select all the grid rows and any associated titles, sub titles or instructions. Click Variable Properties VariablePropsIcon.png and paste the Not Asked property.
    VarPropsAllGrid.PNG

    Display a question based on the responses in a grid

    A further question (Q4) asks respondents why they do not find public transport convenient. It only makes sense to ask this question if the respondent has indicated that they do find public transport inconvenient.

    This means that you need to set routing on this section so it is only asked if they have selected the Strongly agree or Agree responses to the question …public transport is not convenient (Q3.b).

    1. Select question 4, and click Routing Rules RoutingIcon.png  to open the Routing Rules dialog.
    2. Click Add to create a new routing rule with the type set to Conditionally Ask Question and click OK.
    3. In the If field, enter Q3.b=(1,2). This will display question 4 if the respondent selects Strongly agree (code 1) or Agree (code 2) in response to question 3.b.
    1. Click Variable Properties VariablePropsIcon.png to display the Variable Properties window and copy the text in the Not Asked field (unless( q3.b=(1,2))).
    2. Select all the grid rows and any associated titles, sub titles or instructions. Click Variable Properties VariablePropsIcon.png and paste the Not Asked property. This page should now only appear if the respondent finds public transport inconvenient.

    Display specific rows in a grid based on the response to a question

    This example uses a multi-choice question for respondents to select the facilities they have used.

    FitnessQu1.png

    The survey then offers a rating scale for the facilities. Routing is applied that shows the row for each facility that the respondent has used.

    FitnessQu2.png
    1. Select the first line of the first grid section, (Q2.a) Rowing machine
    2. Click Routing Rules RoutingIcon.png  to open the Routing Rules dialog for that question.
    3. Click Add to create a new routing rule with the type set to Conditionally Ask Question and click OK.
    4. In the If field, enter Q1=1. This displays the first question of the grid if the respondent has selected code 1 (Rowing machine) in response to question 1.
    RoutingRules3.png
    1. Click OK. A small arrow is added to the start of the question to show that there is routing applied to it. You can double-click this arrow to open the Routing Rules dialog.
    2. Repeat this for each question in the grid, using the required code.
    3. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the questionnaire.
    4. Test the routing works by publishing the questionnaire and launching the preview.
    5. Select the facilities in the multi-choice question.
    FitnessQu1a.png
    1. Click Next and confirm that the correct elements of the grid appear.
    FitnessQu2a.png

    Further information on routing is available at Adding routing and Routing rule expressions.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Using routing in grid questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using scanning validation patterns https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-scanning-validation-patterns/ Tue, 07 Dec 2021 16:22:45 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6975 Patterns define the sequence of characters that are expected in the answer to an open response variable. This includes: general patterns such as date, telephone number and currency, and organisation specific patterns such as employee numbers or invoice references. Snap XMP Desktop has a range of pre-defined system patterns that can be used to validate […]

    The post Using scanning validation patterns appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Patterns define the sequence of characters that are expected in the answer to an open response variable. This includes: general patterns such as date, telephone number and currency, and organisation specific patterns such as employee numbers or invoice references. Snap XMP Desktop has a range of pre-defined system patterns that can be used to validate scanned responses. You can also create patterns specific to your organisation’s requirements.

    There are two types of scanning validation:

    • Spelling validation checks a response against a stored dictionary of words, and tries to match responses to words in the dictionary.
    • Pattern validation attempts to match a response against the expected pattern of characters. This is often used to validate responses such as dates, telephone number and zip or post codes.

    There are different versions of spelling and pattern validation for handwritten and printed characters.

    Scanning validation options

    Scanning Validation

    Application

    None

    The default setting. The scanning module attempts to identify the character or digit within the answer box. If the data cannot be interpreted, the data is left as unrecognised.

    Pattern

    A handwritten answer is expected that has a pattern applied to it. The pattern used will be the selected Source Pattern.

    Spelling

    The scanning module attempts to match the handwritten word scanned in from the questionnaire with a word found within the installed dictionary.

    Keyed

    The scanning module does not attempt to detect the responses and will prompt you to enter the replies by hand during the keying/cleaning stage.

    Printed

    The scanning module scans the data as a printed entry but does not use any of the pattern or spelling hints to improve its interpretation.

    Printed Pattern

    A printed answer is expected, such as a name or address pre-printed on to the questionnaire which adheres to the pattern specified in Source Pattern.

    Printed Spelling

    The scanning module attempts to match the printed word scanned in from the questionnaire with a word found within the dictionary

    This tutorial shows how to set the scanning validation pattern for a question and provides instructions on creating your own validation pattern.

    Apply a system pattern for scanning validation

    1. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select the question and click Variable Properties. This opens the Variable Properties dialog.
    3. In the Scanning Validation property select Pattern. This is the pattern for handwritten response.
    VarProps.PNG
    1. In Pattern, select the required pattern from the list of available patterns. The patterns in the list will include system patterns as well as your organisation’s patterns that are valid for the variable’s response type.

    Alternatively, you can also set up the scanning validation and pattern using the Variable Details window, which is opened from the Variables window.

    Set up your own validation pattern

    This section shows how to create a simple validation pattern. The example is a pattern for an ID of two letters followed by five digits.

    1. Select View | Patterns to open the Patterns dialog. (Prior to build 12.10 this was on the Tailor menu.)
    2. Select New in the Patterns dialog to display the Pattern Properties dialog.
    PatternsDlgWS.png
    1. Choose a name for the pattern and type it in to the Name box.
    2. Enter a Label giving more information. This will be displayed when the pattern is shown in the Patterns dialog.
    3. Select the response type that the pattern will be used with from the Usage drop-down list.
    PatternPropsDlgWS1.png
    1. In the Matches section, select New to create a match. This opens the Match Pattern dialog.
    2. In this pattern there are two letters followed by five digits. In Global Patterns, double click the pattern ‘letter’. This adds the pattern to the Match.
    MatchPattern2.PNG
    1. Click Repeat then select Exactly and click OK. The default number is 2.
    RepeatDlg.PNG
    1. In Global Patterns, double click digit to add the digits to the Match.
    2. Click Repeat then select Exactly and change the number to 5. Click OK.
    3. Click OK to save the Match and return to the Pattern Properties dialog.
    4. Click OK to save the pattern. This pattern can be used in scanning validation.
    PatternPropsDlgWS2.png

    Further Information

    You can find more details on the system patterns and creating your own patterns in Introduction to patterns.

    You can find more information on scanning validation in Checking the scanning design recommendations.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Using scanning validation patterns appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    How to customise check boxes using style mode https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/customise-check-boxes-using-style-mode/ Wed, 01 Dec 2021 14:32:18 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6940 There are two modes available in the Questionnaire window that can help you create questionnaires. These are: the Design mode where you can add and modify individual questions and the Style mode where you define the look of the question types used in the questionnaire. Style mode allows you to change the questions appearance and […]

    The post How to customise check boxes using style mode appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    There are two modes available in the Questionnaire window that can help you create questionnaires. These are: the Design mode where you can add and modify individual questions and the Style mode where you define the look of the question types used in the questionnaire. Style mode allows you to change the questions appearance and create a customised question style using your organisation’s branding such as font, colour scheme and background.

    In this tutorial, the style mode is used to show how to customise check boxes and radio buttons in the closed question styles including Multi Choice, Single Choice, Grid and Semantic Scale styles. In Snap XMP Desktop, the default style is a check box for multiple response questions and a radio button for single response questions. Snap XMP Desktop provides image files that you can use for check boxes and radio buttons. These are in pairs, comprising an empty and a checked/selected version of each graphic. You can:

    • use the defined pairs of Snap XMP Desktop box graphics
    • combine the Snap XMP Desktop box graphics into different pairs
    • use your own graphics

    The Snap XMP Desktop graphic box naming convention is used to define pairs of check boxes and radio buttons. If you create your own images, using the same naming convention will let you see them in the list of On and Off images when you browse for them. Groups of check boxes and radio buttons with the same name will be synchronized, if this option is selected.

    CheckedUnchecked
    Check boxcheck-Name-on
    check-Name-x (cross)
    check-Name-t (tick)
    check-Name-off
    Check box (Rounded square)checkRS-Name-on
    checkRS-Name-x
    checkRS-Name-t
    checkRS-Name-off
    Radio buttonradio-Name-on
    radio-Name-x
    radio-Name-t
    radio-Name-off

    Once the new question style is complete you can save the new style to use in other questionnaires or create a Survey Template based on the questionnaire.

    Step 1: Setting the box images

    In this tutorial, a Multi Choice question style is used and the boxes are set to a specific image in Style mode.

    1. In the Questionnaire window, click Style Mode StyleModeIcon.png on the Questionnaire toolbar.
    2. Select the Multi Choice question. Selected questions are highlighted in red in Style mode.
    3. In the Question style list, select All ‘Multi-Choice’ Styles. Any changes will be applied to all questions with a Multi Choice question style.
    Qu1a.png
    1. Select Boxes in the topics list then select Images in the adjacent list, as the type of box.
    AllStyleTbr1.png
    1. Click the Images button on the toolbar to open the Image Checkboxes dialog.
    AllStyleTbr2.png
    1. Check the Synchronise box to apply a set of four images that are defined using the Snap XMP Desktop graphic box naming convention.
    2. Click the Edit button by the Off (unselected) box. This opens the Image Properties dialog.
    ImageCheckboxes1.png
    1. Click Browse to select a new image for the boxes. Snap XMP Desktop checkbox images are stored in the sub-folder Styles\Checkboxes of your installation folder.
    2. Select the folder containing the image size you want then select the image style required.
    ImageProperties2.PNG
    1. Set a color in the Colourize Gif field if you want to match the box color to your branding.
    2. Click OK to use the selected style for checkboxes and radio buttons in all your multi-choice questions.
    3. Click OK again to return to the questionnaire. All the Multi Choice questions show the updated check box images.

    Step 2: Saving the new question style

    You can save any changes as a question style so they can be re-used.

    1. Make sure you are in Style mode StyleModeIcon.png and select the multi-choice question you have changed.
    2. Click Style Organizer StylePickerIcon.png on the Questionnaire toolbar. This opens the Style Organiser.
    3. The style of the selected question is highlighted and an image of the question is displayed in the Example pane.
    StyleOrg1.png
    1. Click Properties to open the Style Properties dialog
    2. Change the Name to describe the style.
    3. Click OK to save your style. The new style is now available for you to use elsewhere in the survey.
    StyleProperties1.png

    Further information can be found in the help on Changing the question boxes and Using Styles.

    Saving the questionnaire styles

    The questionnaire styles can be saved in a Style Template or the questionnaire can be used to create a Survey Template.

    To save the question styles as a Style Template:

    1. Click DesignModeIcon.png to change to the Design mode.
    2. Click EditionsIcon.png on the toolbar to open the Editions and Style Templates dialog.
    3. Click Save to save the style template. You can use these styles in a different questionnaire by loading the saved style template from the same dialog.
    EditAndStyl1.png

    Saving the questionnaire to create a Survey Template is described in the tutorial Creating a branded Survey Template.

    If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post How to customise check boxes using style mode appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Notifying the participant when a quota or screen out is exceeded https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/notifying-participant-quota-or-screen-out-exceeded/ Wed, 27 Oct 2021 14:10:29 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6698 You can decide what happens when a participant exceeds a quota or triggers a screen out. You can either: These can be set for the Setting a message Setting the web page URL When there are multiple quotas and an overall target quota, the participant will be shown the message of the first quota that […]

    The post Notifying the participant when a quota or screen out is exceeded appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can decide what happens when a participant exceeds a quota or triggers a screen out. You can either:

    • show a default page with a customised message
    • send them to a page of your choice

    These can be set for the

    • overall target quota in the Quota Control dialog
    • variable based quotas and screen outs in the Quota dialog and the Screen out dialog

    Setting a message

    1. Select View | Quotas and Screen Outs. This opens the Quota and Screen Outs window. (Prior to build 12.10 this was on the Tailor menu.)
    2. Open the quota or screen out as follows:
      • If you wish to set the message of a variable based quota, double-click the quota in the list to open it in the Quota dialog.
      • If you wish to set the message of a screen out, double-click the screen out in the list to open it in the Screen Out dialog.
      • If you wish to set the message of the overall target, click Tailoring TailoringIcon.PNG to open the Quota Control dialog.
    3. Select Message.
    1. If using a multi-lingual survey, select the language.
    2. Enter the customised message. This message displays in the default Snap Online web page when the quota exceeds the target or the screen out triggers.
    1. Click OK to save the changes.

    Setting the web page URL

    1. Select View | Quotas and Screen Outs. This opens the Quota and Screen Outs window. (Prior to build 12.10 this was on the Tailor menu.)
    2. Open the quota or screen out as follows:
      • If you wish to set the message of a variable based quota, double-click the quota in the list to open it in the Quota dialog.
      • If you wish to set the message of a screen out, double-click the screen out in the list to open it in the Screen Out dialog.
      • If you wish to set the message of the overall target, click Tailoring TailoringIcon.PNG to open the Quota Control dialog.
    3. Select URL.
    4. Enter the URL of the web page. This web page is displayed when the quota or screen out is exceeded.
    1. Click OK to save the changes.

    When there are multiple quotas and an overall target quota, the participant will be shown the message of the first quota that is exceeded.

    The post Notifying the participant when a quota or screen out is exceeded appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting up Screen Outs https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-up-screen-outs/ Wed, 27 Oct 2021 14:09:47 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6700 Screening questions are designed to either include or exclude participants from taking the survey. A common screening question excludes participants who work in the marketing industry. First, assess the characteristics that are required to give the desired sample for the survey. Then create a series of questions that select these participants. Define these as screening […]

    The post Setting up Screen Outs appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Screening questions are designed to either include or exclude participants from taking the survey. A common screening question excludes participants who work in the marketing industry.

    First, assess the characteristics that are required to give the desired sample for the survey. Then create a series of questions that select these participants. Define these as screening variables by creating a Screen Out for each question or variable.

    Creating a screen out based on a variable

    There are three steps in the process of creating a screen out:

    1. Identify or create the variable that is the basis for the screen out. This can be a question on the questionnaire or a derived variable if you need to set screen outs that are a combination of questions, e.g. Males under 25.
    2. Create the screen out.
    3. Enable the screen out.

    Identify the screening variable

    First, decide which question or combination of questions should be used as the basis of the screen out.

    This can be:

    • A single response question in the questionnaire; the screen out will be based directly on the question variable
    • A derived single response variable for screen outs based on a number of questions. For example, one based on age and gender.

    Place the screening question near the start of the questionnaire so the participant can be excluded as soon as possible. The participant will be notified early on and will not answer questions unnecessarily.

    Create the screen out

    1. Select View | Quotas and Screen Outs. This opens the Quota and Screen Outs window. (Prior to build 12.10 this was on the Tailor menu.)
    2. Click New Quota or Screen Out then select New Screen Out. This opens the Screen Out dialog.
    3. In Name, enter a name to identify the screen out.
    4. In Variable, select the variable that is the basis of the screen out. When you select the variable, all the answer codes display in the Details table. By default, each category is included and shown as In.
    5. Overall Target shows the overall target number of responses that are to be submitted for the survey. The quota control overall target is used as the read-only default. Selecting the Enforce target option, enables the Overall target and Required fields. Enabling the Enforce target option is only recommended when you are using screen outs only. When you have screen outs and quotas together they may interact. For example, if one of the quotas has codes that are over quota then the screen out can stop the survey on the overall target before the quotas are complete.
    6. Required is a read-only field that shows the number of responses left to meet the overall quota target.
    7. Select Out for the categories that screen out the participant. When the participant selects an answer in a category that is set to Out, they will be excluded from the survey. In the example shown, the survey excludes customers who are under 18. Customers who respond that they are under 18 will be excluded from the survey.
    1. Once interviewing has started the Count and % show the latest counts of screened-out participants for each category.
    2. When the screen out triggers, this directs the participant to a web page or shows a custom message. In multilingual surveys, select the language then enter the message for the selected language.
    1. Click OK to save the screen out. The Quota and Screen Outs window lists the new screen out.

    Enabling the screen out

    You can enable Quotas and Screen Outs individually or at the survey level.

    In the Quota Control dialog, select Enabled to allow all quotas and screen outs in the survey to run. Clear Enabled to disable all quotas and screen outs in the survey.

    In the Screen Out dialog, select Enabled to activate the selected screen out. Clear Enabled to disable the selected screen out.

    Screen outs vs routing

    A screen out looks similar to routing a question to the end of the questionnaire when a specific answer is selected. However, a screen out differs from routing:

    When the survey excludes a participant from the survey with a screening question, the participant exits the questionnaire without submitting their response. The response is not saved and does not count towards any quota target, including any overall target.

    With routing the participant skips to the end of the questionnaire where they can submit the response. The saved response counts towards any quota target, including any overall target.

    The post Setting up Screen Outs appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting up Quotas https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-up-quotas/ Wed, 27 Oct 2021 14:08:53 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6695 There are three steps in the process of creating a quota based on a variable: Identify the quota variable First, decide which question or combination of questions should be used as the basis of the quota. This can be: Place the quota question near the start of the questionnaire so the quota can be checked […]

    The post Setting up Quotas appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    There are three steps in the process of creating a quota based on a variable:

    1. Identify or create the variable to be used as a basis for the quota. This can be a question on the questionnaire or a derived variable if you need to set quotas that are a combination of questions, e.g. “Males under 25”.
    2. Decide the target quota for each possible variable answer. This can be set as a number or a percentage.
    3. Create and enable the quota.

    Identify the quota variable

    First, decide which question or combination of questions should be used as the basis of the quota.

    This can be:

    • A single response question in the questionnaire; the quota will be based directly on the question variable
    • A derived single response variable for quotas based on a number of questions. For example, one based on age and gender.

    Place the quota question near the start of the questionnaire so the quota can be checked as soon as possible. The participant will be notified early on and will not answer questions unnecessarily.

    Create the quota

    1. Select View | Quotas and Screen Outs. This opens the Quota and Screen Outs window.
    2. Click New Quota or Screen Out then select New Quota. This opens the Quota dialog.
    3. In Name, enter a name to identify the quota.
    4. In Variable, select the variable that is the basis of the quota.
    5. When the variable is selected, all the answer codes are shown as categories in the Details table. The target for each category can be entered as a number or percentage. Leaving the target blanks allows unlimited responses (until any overall target is exceeded). When saved this is shown as na (not applicable).
    1. The Overall field shows the overall target number of responses that are to be submitted for the survey. When you change the quota target for a category the overall target is also updated. This affects any other quotas and screen outs for this survey. The overall target can be updated by entering the target number, if required. Required is a read-only field that shows the number of responses left to meet the overall quota target.
    2. Once interviewing has started the Actual and % show the latest response counts and percentages.
    3. When the quota is exceeded you can set whether the participant is directed to a web page or shown a custom message. In multilingual surveys, select the language then enter the message for the selected language.
    1. Click OK to save the quota. The new quota is shown in the Quota and Screen Outs window.

    You can set up any number of independent quotas in this way. The first quota to be exceeded for any particular interview will stop the interview.

    Enabling quotas

    Quotas can be enabled individually or at the survey level.

    In the Quota Control dialog, select Enabled to allow all quotas and screen outs in the survey to run. Clear Enabled to disable all quotas and screen outs in the survey.

    In the Quota dialog, select Enabled to activate the selected quota. Clear Enabled to disable the selected quota.

    The post Setting up Quotas appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Setting an overall target https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/setting-an-overall-target/ Wed, 27 Oct 2021 14:04:01 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6714 The overall target is a quota that sets a limit on the total number of responses submitted for a survey. This stops responses being submitted once the target number has been reached. An overall target can be set when offering an incentive for each response submitted making sure costs are kept within budget. This quota […]

    The post Setting an overall target appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The overall target is a quota that sets a limit on the total number of responses submitted for a survey. This stops responses being submitted once the target number has been reached. An overall target can be set when offering an incentive for each response submitted making sure costs are kept within budget.

    This quota is not linked to any question or variable but can be combined with additional quotas and screen outs that set out further criteria for each response.

    Quota controls

    You can set the overall target quota in the Quota Control dialog.

    1. Select View | Quotas and Screen Outs. This opens the Quota and Screen Outs window. (Prior to build 12.10 this was on the Tailor menu.)
    2. Click Tailoring TailoringIcon.PNG. This opens the Quota Control dialog.
    3. In Target, enter the target number of responses required. When responses are received the Required number is updated to reflect the number of responses left to fill the quota.
    1. Set the URL or message that is shown to the participant when the overall target number of responses is exceeded.

    Changing the overall target

    In a quota based on a variable, the targets counts and percentages must add up to the overall target and 100%. When the overall target is changed the target counts and percentages in the quotas are automatically updated to reflect the change.

    An example of how the quota is changed is shown.

    1. An existing quota has target allocations of 25 responses or 25% of responses for each category.
    2. The overall target is changed in the Quota Controls from 100 to 302.
    3. When the quota is opened again the Target and % have been automatically updated to the best fit for the new overall target.

    The overall target can also be set when creating or editing a quota or screen out. Regardless of where the overall target is changed, the new target is used for all the quotas and screen outs in the survey.

    Changing the quota targets

    Usually when you create or edit a target, you know the targets for each category rather than the overall target. When each category target is changed in the Quota dialog the overall target is updated in line

    1. Select Tailor | Quotas and Screen Outs. This opens the Quota and Screen Outs window.
    2. Double-click a quota. This opens the Quota dialog.
    3. Change the target for one of the categories and the overall target updates to the new target total.
    1. Click OK to save the quota. A message is displayed warning that the change to the overall total affects all quotas and screen outs.

    If you change the overall total, the field changes color as a warning that the category targets and % need recalculating. When the target totals match the overall target the color is cleared from the field.

    The post Setting an overall target appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Introduction to Quotas and Screen Outs https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/introduction-to-quotas-and-screen-outs/ Wed, 27 Oct 2021 14:03:12 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6691 When running a survey you can limit the number of responses submitted using quotas and screen outs.  During each interview, the system will monitor responses to any quota and screen out questions and automatically close the interview if the participant falls into a category that has already reached its quota limit. Quotas can be set […]

    The post Introduction to Quotas and Screen Outs appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    When running a survey you can limit the number of responses submitted using quotas and screen outs.  During each interview, the system will monitor responses to any quota and screen out questions and automatically close the interview if the participant falls into a category that has already reached its quota limit.

    Quotas can be set up that:

    • limit the total number of responses submitted
    • allocate the total number or percentage of responses based on the answer to a question
    • allocate the total number or percentage of responses based on a derived variable

    A screen out allows you to select which participants can progress through the questionnaire based on their answers to the screen out questions. This does not limit the total responses submitted.

    You can set up multiple quotas and screen outs for each survey. However, the overall target number of responses applies to all quotas and screen outs.

    Survey design considerations

    There are a number of design considerations to note when creating the questionnaire.

    • The quota and screen outs are checked when the participant moves to the next page or submits the response. A page break should be set after each quota or screen out question.
    • The quota and screen out questions are mandatory in order to calculate the number of responses.
    • The quota and screen out variables must return a single response.
    • Make sure you do not use routing that skips any quota or screen out questions.
    • When a quota or screen out is based on a derived variable then all source questions are also mandatory and should not be skipped using routing.
    • Place the quota or screen out questions near the start of the questionnaire so they can be checked as soon as possible.
    • Mobile responses, collected using Interviewer, are not included in the screen outs or quota limits.

    Quotas and Screen Outs window

    The Quotas and Screen Outs window shows a list of all the quotas and screen outs that are based on a variable.

    QuotasScreenOutWindow2.PNG

    On the Snap XMP Desktop menu, select the Tailor menu then select Quotas and Screen Outs.

    This opens the Quotas and Screen Outs window where you can:

    • create quotas and screen outs
    • clone quotas and screen outs
    • delete quotas and screen outs
    • open the Quota Control dialog to set the overall quota targets and settings
    • view the quota or screen out properties
    • view the sources and dependencies

    Quota Control dialog

    The Quota Control dialog contains the overall quota targets and settings.

    In the Quotas and Screen Outs toolbar, click the Tailoring icon.

    This opens the Quota Control dialog where you can:

    QuotaControl.PNG

    The post Introduction to Quotas and Screen Outs appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Create a chart of positive responses to rating scale questions https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/create-chart-of-positive-responses-rating-scale/ Thu, 07 Oct 2021 13:36:17 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6656 Rating scale questions ask the participant to select a rating from a range of responses. These responses usually range from a negative to a positive rating or vice versa and often include 5 or more points. An analysis of the results can be hard to interpret if all the categories are charted. The responses can […]

    The post Create a chart of positive responses to rating scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Rating scale questions ask the participant to select a rating from a range of responses. These responses usually range from a negative to a positive rating or vice versa and often include 5 or more points. An analysis of the results can be hard to interpret if all the categories are charted. The responses can be grouped into a reduced number of categories such as positive, neutral and negative to simplify the chart and make it easier to interpret at a glance. This can be further simplified to show only positive or negative responses to the rating scale question.

    This worksheet shows how to:

    • categorise responses as positive, neutral or negative
    • create a horizontal bar chart using the new categories
    • exclude the neutral and negative categories, leaving only the positive category

    Step 1: Categorise responses as positive, neutral or negative

    In this example, participants rate aspects of service on a 5 point scale ranging from Very Good to Very Poor. Derived Variables are used to sort Very Good and Good responses into a new Positive category, OK responses into a new Neutral category, and Poor and Very Poor responses into a new Negative category.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Variables VariablesIcon.png  to open the Variables Window.
    2. Click New Variable  NewSurveyIcon.png  to add a new variable.
    3. Specify the Variable details as follows:
      • Name: VQ6a
      • Label: Quality of product (this will be displayed on the chart)
      • Type: Derived (the variable will derive its data from other existing variables)
      • Response: Single (each participant will only fall into one of the new codes)
    DerivedVar1.PNG
    1. Create the derived values for the Negative, Neutral and Positive ratings. For example, the Negative category is given by points 1 and 2 on the scale (Very Poor and Poor) and the Value is Q6a=(1,2).
    2. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the variable and close the Variable Details window.
    3. On the Variables Window toolbar, click Clone Variable to copy the derived variable you have just created. Change Q6a to Q6b throughout, and update the label.
    4. Click Save SaveIcon.png  .
    5. Repeat for the other questions in the grid.

    Step 2: Create a horizontal bar chart using the new categories

    Now you can use the new derived variables to create a stacked bar chart of positive, neutral, and negative results.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png to create a new chart.
    2. In the Style list, select Horizontal Stacked Bar Percent Transposed.
    3. In the Analysis field, enter the derived variables.
    4. Select the options Analysis Percents and Transpose.
    AnDefn1a.png
    1. Click Apply. Your chart shows the three derived categories.
    Chart1.PNG
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the chart.

    Step 3: Show only the positive ratings

    To create a chart showing only the positive responses, the negative and neutral values need to be excluded. You could also exclude the positive and neutral values to create a negative chart. This is achieved using the Chart Designer.

    1. In the Analysis Chart window, double-click the Negative bar to open the Chart Designer. It will open with Series selected on the left-hand side.
    2. Select Negative in the Series list and select Exclude Series in the options.
    ChartDesigner.PNG
    1. Select Neutral in the Series list and select Exclude Series in the options.
    2. Click OK to close the Chart Designer. Your chart now shows only the positive ratings.
    PositiveChart2.PNG

    The post Create a chart of positive responses to rating scale questions appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Change category colours in charts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/change-category-colours-in-charts/ Thu, 07 Oct 2021 09:28:19 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6645 Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting, helping to make the response data easier to understand. You can create chart styles that reflect your organization’s branding, bringing a consistent look to your analysis and reports. Snap XMP Desktop provides a large number of predefined chart styles that you can use as supplied or […]

    The post Change category colours in charts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Charts play an important part in analysis and reporting, helping to make the response data easier to understand. You can create chart styles that reflect your organization’s branding, bringing a consistent look to your analysis and reports. Snap XMP Desktop provides a large number of predefined chart styles that you can use as supplied or as the basis for a new style. Some of these chart styles change the layout, background and colours, whereas others change only the colours. The supplied chart styles that only change the colour scheme start with the word Color.

    This tutorial shows how to apply a new colour scheme to an existing chart, how to change the colour for individual chart categories, and how to save your custom chart style to use again.

    Step 1: Apply a predefined colour scheme

    In this example, a new colour scheme is applied to a horizontal bar chart of responses to a question grid.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png to create a new chart.
    2. In the Style list, select Horizontal Stacked Bar Percent Transposed.
    3. In the Analysis field, enter the grid questions.
    4. Select the options Analysis Percents and Transpose.
    AnalysisDefn1a.png
    1. Click Apply. The chart will look like this:
    AnalysisChart1a.png
    1. In Style, select a new Colour style from the list, for example Color – 5 Point Red to Green Labelled Stacked
    AnalysisDefn2a.png
    1. Click OK. Your chart will now look like this:
    AnalysisChart2.PNG

    This example uses a 5 point scale; however there are colour schemes specifically designed for horizontal bar charts with 3 or 7 points, on both a positive to negative, and a negative to positive scale. There are black and white styles designed specifically for print, and styles with colours replicating those found in various versions of Excel. Colour styles can be applied to any chart, not just horizontal bar charts.

    Step 2: Customise individual category colours

    Category colours for any type of chart can be easily changed. In this example, the same colour style, Color – 5 Point Red to Green Labelled Stacked, is applied to a 4 point scale, which also includes a ‘Don’t Know’ option. In this context, the ‘traffic light’ colour labelling would be misleading. Changing the Don’t Know category colour from green to grey can show that this category is not included in the ratings. The same steps can be followed to change category colours in any style of chart.

    1. Double-click the area of the chart you would like to change, in this case the Don’t Know category. This opens the Chart Designer.
    AnalysisChart3a.png
    1. The Chart Designer contains a number of options to change the appearance and content of your chart. Select Datapoint Defaults then select a new colour from the Fill section:
    ChartDesigner1.png
    1. Click OK to save the changes. The chart shows the new category colour.
    AnalysisChart4.PNG

    Step 3: Save a style to use again

    There are two options. You can either save the colour scheme, enabling you to apply the same colours to another chart in the future, or you can save the chart style including layout, background and colour scheme.

    1. Right-click anywhere in the chart area and select Save Style. This opens the Save Style As dialog.
    2. Choose a folder location and enter a file name for the chart style.
    3. In Style parts, select the parts of the custom style to include.
      • To save just the colour scheme, select Series and clear Layout and Background
      • To save the complete chart style, select Layout, Background and Series
    SaveAs1.png
    1. Click Save to finish. You can now browse to select your saved chart style or colour scheme in the Analysis Definition.

    The post Change category colours in charts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Summarise rating scale with Group Variables https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/summarise-rating-scale-with-group-variables/ Wed, 06 Oct 2021 16:58:15 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6629 Group variables are used to create a summary analysis of questions which share a common set of answer choices, making it easier to evaluate overall responses to questions in a grid, and make comparisons between separate question grids in your survey. This tutorial shows how to: This example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with […]

    The post Summarise rating scale with Group Variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Group variables are used to create a summary analysis of questions which share a common set of answer choices, making it easier to evaluate overall responses to questions in a grid, and make comparisons between separate question grids in your survey.

    This tutorial shows how to:

    • Build a horizontal bar chart of rating scale responses
    • Create an ‘Overall’ Group Variable to combine responses from all questions
    • Add the ‘Overall’ category to the Horizontal bar chart

    This example uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop. Alternatively, use any survey which includes one or more question grids.

    Step 1: Build a horizontal bar chart of rating scale responses

    Start by building a horizontal bar chart to summarise the responses to a typical question grid.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png to create a new chart.
    2. In the Style list, select Horizontal Stacked Bar Percent Transposed.
    3. In the Analysis field, enter the grid questions.
    4. Select the options Analysis Percents and Transpose.
    AnalysisDefn1a.png
    1. Click Apply. The chart will look like this:
    AnalysisChart1a.png
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the chart. Note the name of the chart as you will need to retrieve it in a later step.

    Step 2: Create an ‘Overall’ Group Variable to combine responses from all questions

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Variables AnalysisVariablesIcon.png  to open the Analysis Variables window.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png  and select New Group Variable.
    AddGroupVar.PNG
    1. In Name, enter GV1 as the Group Variable name.
    2. In Label, enter Overall as the description.
    3. In Source, enter the list of questions to be grouped into the source field.
    GroupVarDetails.PNG
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the group variable.

    Step 3: Add the ‘Overall’ category to the Horizontal bar chart

    Now you can add the group variable to your horizontal bar chart.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analyses AnalysesIcon.png  to retrieve the saved bar chart.
    2. On the Analysis chart toolbar, click Properties  VariablePropsIcon.png  to open the Analysis Definition details.
    3. In Analysis, type GV1 followed by a comma then the grid questions:
    OverallGV1a.png
    1. Click OK. Your chart now includes an extra category, Overall, showing the group variable.
    OverallChart.PNG

    What else could I do with group variables?

    Create a chart to summarise multiple grids

    If your survey contains more than one question grid, try repeating the steps above to create a group variable for each one (GV1, GV2, GV3 etc). Then, build a Horizontal bar chart including the group variables only.

    Create an overall satisfaction index

    Create a new group variable including questions contained in multiple question grids, for example type ‘Q8a to Q8d, Q9a to Q9d, Q10a to Q10d’ into the source field (if the grid questions are sequential, you could also type Q8a to Q10d). This will produce an overall score for all grid questions– perfect for a top level summary in your report.

    The post Summarise rating scale with Group Variables appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Analysing data with crosstabs https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/analysing-data-with-crosstabs/ Tue, 05 Oct 2021 13:46:54 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6602 You can find trends and patterns in your data by creating ordered crosstabs (cross tabulations) in Snap XMP Desktop. This is a quick way of analysing banded or coded variables. Crosstabs are also known as contingency tables (or pivot tables). This tutorial shows you how to produce and order crosstabs then convert them to charts. […]

    The post Analysing data with crosstabs appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    You can find trends and patterns in your data by creating ordered crosstabs (cross tabulations) in Snap XMP Desktop. This is a quick way of analysing banded or coded variables.

    Crosstabs are also known as contingency tables (or pivot tables). This tutorial shows you how to produce and order crosstabs then convert them to charts.

    A crosstab is a table where the analysis field defines the rows and the break field gives the columns. This can be reversed by selecting the Transpose option.

    AnalDefn1b.png

    The data in each cell shows the figure for the participants who fit into both the column and the row. The type and order of data displayed is given by the Show options.

    AnalDefn1c.png

    You can order the rows by:

    • the order the codes appear in the questionnaire, used for rating scales. This is the default order.
    • alphabetical order by label
    • popularity (sorted by quantity of responses)
    • statistics you have included

    Creating a simple crosstab

    This example shows how to break down responses by gender. It uses data in the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Table AnalysisTblIcon.png  to display the Analysis Definition dialog.
    2. Type Q11 into the Analysis field (the age variable)
    3. Press OK to build a simple table showing the ages of the participants.
    AnalyTbl2.PNG
    1. Click VariablePropsIcon.png  on the Analysis table toolbar to display the Analysis Definition dialog.
    2. Type Q12 into the Break field (the gender variable)
    3. Press Apply. The table now shows the values of Q11 as the row labels and the values of Q12 as the column labels across the top of the table.
    AnalyTbl3.PNG
    1. In the Analysis Definition dialog, select Break Percents, which shows each answer as a percentage of the column totals for the break variable (Q12).
    AnalDefn2a.png
    1. Click Apply to update the table. The percentages are shown below the counts.
    AnalyTbl4.PNG
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the table.

    Creating an ordered crosstab

    This example shows how to set out data so it’s easy to see which choices were most popular. The analysis shows which items were ordered (with a breakdown by age), and sorts them according to popularity.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Analysis Table AnalysisTblIcon.png  to display the Analysis Definition dialog.
    2. Type Q4 into the Analysis field (the food ordered)
    3. Type Q11 into the Break field (the age variable)
    4. Press OK. You will see a crosstab with the values of Q4 as the row labels on the left-hand side of the table and the values of Q11 as the column labels across the top of the table. The default row order is the order that the items were listed in the questionnaire. To make it easy to see which choice was the most popular, you can order the rows by the analysis value.
    AnalyTbl5.PNG
    1. Click VariablePropsIcon.png  on the table toolbar to open the Analysis Definition dialog again.
    AnalDefn3a.png
    1. In the Order by list, select Analysis Base then click Apply. Your table will update, with the rows sorted according to the number of responses. You can see that the French fries row has moved to the top.
    AnalyTbl6.PNG
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the table.

    You can easily display your data in chart form. Open the Analysis Definition dialog and change the Type to Chart. The example below shows it with a style of Horizontal Bar Counts. You can see that the items ordered have been sorted by the Analysis base, with the most popular at the top.

    Chart1.PNG

    Quickly building multiple crosstabs in a report

    You can create a report of separate crosstabs using the same break (for example, break all the responses down by age or gender or both) with a single instruction in a report. The example below breaks down the questions by age.

    1. Click ReportsIcon.png  to display the Reports window.
    2. Click NewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new report. Set the labels to a description of your report and select Skip Empty to omit any empty analyses.
    Report1.PNG
    1. Click NewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new instruction and select Table in the Instruction List to display a Report instruction dialog.
    2. Complete the fields in the Definition tab:
      1. Analysis: Q2,Q4,Q6a TO Q6e
      2. Break: Q11
      3. Set the Order by dropdown to Default. Ordering is not appropriate for rating scales.
      4. The instruction will generate one crosstab for each question that you put in the analysis field. Literal, date and quantity questions have been excluded.
    3. Click OK to save the instruction.
    4. Click RunIcon.png  on the Report window toolbar to open the Report execution dialog. Click Yes to save the report.
    5. Click Printer to choose a printer to print the report or choose to save the document to a PDF file or similar.
    6. Click OK to run the report and create the set of crosstabs.

    Producing crosstabs filtered by demographic

    You can also break down the data in your tables by using filters. This example shows how to produce a set of age tables for males and a set of age tables for females.

    1. Create a new report or duplicate the one you created in the previous step.
    2. Change the label of your new report to Analysis of all questions by age filtered by gender.
    3. Click NewSurveyIcon.png  to create a new instruction and select Table in the Instruction List to display a Report instruction dialog.
    4. Enter Q12 (gender) in the filter field.
    AnalDefn4a.png
    1. Click OK to save the instruction.
    2. Click RunIcon.png  to open the Report execution dialog. Click Yes to save the report.
    3. Click OK to run the report and create the set of crosstabs.
    4. You will have two versions of all the question tables, one for each gender in Q12.

    You can convert all the tables to charts by changing the instruction type and style.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Analysing data with crosstabs appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using YouTube videos in a questionnaire https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-youtube-videos/ Tue, 28 Sep 2021 09:40:30 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6534 In Snap XMP Desktop, a questionnaire can contain a link to a video on YouTube or another similar website. You can also insert media objects directly into a questionnaire. The easiest way to link to a YouTube video is to use the embed code provided on the YouTube site. This is a piece of HTML […]

    The post Using YouTube videos in a questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    In Snap XMP Desktop, a questionnaire can contain a link to a video on YouTube or another similar website. You can also insert media objects directly into a questionnaire.

    The easiest way to link to a YouTube video is to use the embed code provided on the YouTube site. This is a piece of HTML used to embed the link to your chosen video. This tutorial shows how to link to one of Snap Survey’s videos available on YouTube, explaining how to find the embed code and insert it into your questionnaire. Additionally, the tutorial shows how to insert your organisation’s video files directly into the questionnaire.

    You can insert media objects directly in your survey, but you must link to a YouTube video as it is not stored with the survey.

    If you insert video objects directly into your survey, you may have problems, as the people viewing the videos may have different video applications. This means that unless they have downloaded and installed the correct video player to see your video, they may not be able to view the video at all.

    If you are not dealing with confidential information, it is usually better to upload the video to a site such as YouTube, and then link to the uploaded video, rather than inserting the video directly. Even then there may be some problems, depending on the capabilities of the device, its browser and its installed video applications.

    Step 1: Getting the YouTube link

    Find the video that you wish to link to on the YouTube site. The example used in this tutorial is at https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=12JyM-byxfs&list=PLOh-638DOTITHo-KkavRW1INQhlE1fAdx.

    1. Click the Share button below the video.
    SnapYouTube1.png
    1. This displays a set of ways to share the video. Click the Embed button.
    Share1.png
    1. An area displays showing the HTML code you need to embed the video in your survey. Click Copy to copy the link text to the clipboard. This is used for creating the link described in step 2.
    CopyLink1.png

    Step 2: Inserting the YouTube link

    1. Click Questionnaire to open the Questionnaire window. Select the online edition(s).
    2. Place the cursor where the YouTube video will be inserted and click the Insert button.
    3. Select HTML Field from the list. This opens the New HTML Field dialog.
    4. Select the Custom HTML radio button.
    5. Paste the text you copied from the YouTube embed field into the HTML pane.
    CreateLink1.png
    1. Click OK to close the dialog. The inserted HTML code displays as a single tag in your survey.
    2. Publish your survey. The YouTube video is available to the participant when they complete the questionnaire. The look of the video link will vary depending on the browser you are using.

    Inserting your own video file

    To insert a video directly into the survey, you will need to have access to the video file. You can embed small video files directly in the survey where it will be stored with all the other survey information. If the video is large, it is better to put it somewhere else on the Internet (such as YouTube) and link to it in the same way that you linked to the YouTube video.

    1. Place the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the video. This can be in any question but the Title, Sub-title or Instruction question styles are the most suitable, as they do not require any response.
    2. Click the Insert button and select Media Field from the menu. This opens the New media field dialog.
    3. Click Browse to select the media file. The file must be available locally or on your organisation’s network. You can use most multimedia file types.
    MediaFld.PNG
    1. Set the width and height for the file to display. This needs to be large enough to display controls for users to play a multimedia file. You may need to publish and preview the survey to get an accurate size.
    2. Set autoplay to 1 to play the file automatically when the partiicpant opens the questionnaire page.
    3. When you are happy with the settings, click OK.A link for the video is shown in the questionnaire.
    4. Publish the questionnaire in preview to check that the video displays correctly. The look of the video controls will vary depending on the browser you are using.

    If you wish to change the size of the display or the properties of the media object after it is inserted, double click the media file icon. This opens the New media field dialog.

    Further information

    You can insert audio files into your survey in the same way. See: Adding multimedia.

    For information about inserting HTML links and code, see: Using HTML.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Using YouTube videos in a questionnaire appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Multi-Column Layouts https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/working-with-columns/ Wed, 22 Sep 2021 13:29:36 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6451 This tutorial explains how to create a questionnaire with a multi column layout when the participant is completing the survey. Step 1: Creating the survey Step 2: Setting the survey to multiple columns Note: You may notice that this adjustment and the upcoming Step 3 adjustments have little or no impact on the survey’s layout […]

    The post Multi-Column Layouts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial explains how to create a questionnaire with a multi column layout when the participant is completing the survey.

    Step 1: Creating the survey

    1. In Snap XMP Desktop, open the Survey Overview window.
    2. Click NewIcon.png to create a new survey. This opens a list of survey templates. Select the required template as the starting point for your survey. This example uses the Blank Template provided with Snap XMP Desktop. This creates a questionnaire with editions for PC/Laptop, Tablet, Phone and Paper.
    3. Click Next. This opens the New Online Survey dialog for online surveys or the New Survey dialog for offline surveys.
    4. Enter the survey name and title. For online surveys choose the folder location.
    5. Click OK. The new survey opens in the Questionnaire window, by default. The questionnaire has 4 editions: PC/Laptop, Tablet, Phone and Paper. You will need to check that the column layout you have set up works for the editions that are used.
    6. Add a title, sub-title and questions to the questionnaire.
    1. Click SaveIcon.png to save the changes.

    Step 2: Setting the survey to multiple columns

    1. Click Questionnaire properties QuestionnairePropsIcon.png to open the Questionnaire properties dialog.
    2. Select the Margins section, and set the Columns to 2.
    MarginProperties.PNG
    1. Click OK.

    Note: You may notice that this adjustment and the upcoming Step 3 adjustments have little or no impact on the survey’s layout in Design Mode. This is because the column layout is finalized when the survey is previewed, later in step 4.

    Step 3: Controlling the column layout

    1. When the questionnaire is running the Title and Sub-title variables are usually displayed across the full width of the page. Select the question and select the Columns topic then ensure that the Full Page option is enabled. (Note: The number to the right of the Columns selection is used in a separate feature to determine the column layout of the answer codes in a single or multi choice question.)
    1. Similarly, select the remaining questions in the survey and ensure that the Full Page option is not enabled.
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the changes.

    Step 4: Previewing the questionnaire

    1. Select File | Publish to open the Publish Questionnaire dialog.
    2. Set the Method to Preview Only.
    PublishPreviewDlg.PNG
    1. Click Publish to view the final column layout.
    SurveyColumns.PNG

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Multi-Column Layouts appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Customizing the Slider Control templates https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/customizing-the-slider-control-templates/ Tue, 21 Sep 2021 14:18:53 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6438 Snap XMP Desktop is provided with several templates for Slider Controls for use in your questionnaires. You can adapt these templates to reflect your organisation’s branding. Slider Controls are made up of several graphics, plus some instructions on how they match to a question. All the information required for a Slider Control template is contained […]

    The post Customizing the Slider Control templates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP Desktop is provided with several templates for Slider Controls for use in your questionnaires. You can adapt these templates to reflect your organisation’s branding.

    Slider Controls are made up of several graphics, plus some instructions on how they match to a question. All the information required for a Slider Control template is contained in a single file with an SLD extension. To make changes, you need to extract all the information, edit the graphics, and put them back into the Slider Control. This can be saved as a new Slider Control template.

    In this example the Slider Control template uses a five-step rating scale with code labels Very poor to Very good. This tutorial describes how to change the images used in the template and how to adapt the templates to show different rating scales.

    Extracting the Slider control template

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click Questionnaire QuestionnaireIcon.png to open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Click New Question NewSurveyIcon.png  to add a new question.
    3. Select the Single Choice question style and then press Tab until you have 10 codes.
    Question.PNG
    1. Select Show in the toolbar topics menu then select As Slider Control in the next dropdown list and select the Show box.
    QuestionAsSlider.PNG
    1. Click the Slider Control button to open the Slider Control wizard. Alternatively, you can double-click the grey area representing the slider.
    2. Select the template you wish to change in the Slider Control wizard dialog.
    SelectSlider.PNG
    1. Click the Extract button. This allows you to choose the folder where the files will be saved.
    2. Select the folder to store the images, or click Make New Folder to store them in a new folder then click OK. Files containing the extracted graphics are saved to the selected directory.

    Editing the extracted graphics

    Any changes can be made to the graphics. If you change the height of horizontal graphics or width of vertical bars, you will need to make changes to the slider buttons and the graphic positions as well. For simplicity, this tutorial only changes the length of a slider bar.

    1. Open your preferred graphics software used to edit the graphics.
    2. Open the graphic to edit. The names of horizontal slider graphics are prefixed by “Horz” and vertical ones by “Vert”.
    3. Save a copy of the graphic under a different name
    4. Make the required edits. In this case, double the length of the horizontal bar image.
    5. Save the edited bar graphic.
    6. Check if you need to change the graphic for the slider button to match the new slider. To edit the graphic to match, make a copy of the button image before you make the required changes.

    Using the new graphics in a Slider Control

    1. Return to the questionnaire.
    2. Double click the Slider control to open the Slider Control wizard, if it is not open.
    3. Select the template that you wish to change.
    4. Click Advanced. This opens the Points on slider page of the Slider Control wizard. The points on the five-point template have been duplicated to create a ten point style that matches the question. The Snap code label column shows the code labels used in the questionnaire.
    SliderWiz.PNG
    1. Click the  button by the top image. This opens the Insert Image dialog.
    2. Click Remove and then click OK to remove the image and display the code label instead.
    3. Repeat for all the other images. If you are not using images, make sure that you have a text label for each point, as it will be displayed when the respondent moves the slider to that point.
    4. The preview shows the slider displaying the code labels instead of images. Move the slider button the whole length of the bar to confirm that you have removed all the images.
    SliderWizPreview.PNG

    Using the new slider graphic

    1. Click Next to set the bar graphic.
    SliderWizBar.PNG
    1. Click Browse to find your edited graphic. The preview window changes to show the longer bar.
    2. If you have also changed the slider button graphic, click Next twice to go to the Slider page where you set the slider button graphic, and browse for a graphic.

    Lining up the code labels with the slider

    By default, the code labels are put in the space left for the graphic. They now look a little high compared to the slider.

    1. From the Slider page in the Slider Control wizard, click the Next button twice to move to set the position of the code labels.
    SliderWizCodes.PNG
    1. Set the vertical space to 10. The preview shows the new position of the code labels. Change the number again if the code labels need further adjustment.
    SliderWizPreview2.PNG
    1. Click Finish to save your changes in the survey. You can turn your new slider into a template by clicking Save As.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Customizing the Slider Control templates appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a custom subject selection page for group questionnaires https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-custom-subject-selection-page-for-group-questionnaires/ Fri, 17 Sep 2021 12:16:59 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6425 Group questionnaires are questionnaires that a participant is required to repeat a number of times, once per subject. Prior to completing a group questionnaire, the participant must login in order to load the subjects for the individual. Once a participant has logged into the questionnaire they will see a default page that shows the list of […]

    The post Creating a custom subject selection page for group questionnaires appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Group questionnaires are questionnaires that a participant is required to repeat a number of times, once per subject. Prior to completing a group questionnaire, the participant must login in order to load the subjects for the individual. Once a participant has logged into the questionnaire they will see a default page that shows the list of group subjects and status for the survey. The participant selects a group subject and the questionnaire starts for that subject. The subject selection page can be customised to include logos and further instructions.

    1. On the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar, click QuestionnaireIcon.png to open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Click Questionnaire Properties  QuestionnairePropsIcon.png  to open the Questionnaire Properties dialog.
    3. In Section, select Paradata.
    4. Check that the questionnaire is set up for logins by selecting Participant then select Display in questionnaire, if it is not already selected. This inserts a login question at the start of the questionnaire.
    LoginProp1.png
    1. In the Paradata settings, select Survey Index then select Display in questionnaire.
    SurveyIndexProps1.png
    1. Click OK to return to the questionnaire. The default Survey Index status line is added to the questionnaire, immediately below the login details.
    LoginSurveyIndex1.png
    1. Insert a page break before and after the Survey Index status line as it must be on a page of its own, immediately after the login page.
    LoginSurveyIndexWithPgBk.PNG
    1. The status line appears once for each course associated with a student. Edit the text as you wish, making sure you keep the {group subject} and {group status} fields. You can insert text, images and variables which have been seeded from the database into the status line.
    2. When the participant logs into the survey, the subject selection page is selected.
    SubjectSelection.PNG

    The post Creating a custom subject selection page for group questionnaires appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using clickable images as answer choices https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-clickable-images-as-answer-choices/ Thu, 09 Sep 2021 15:01:55 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6398 This tutorial shows you how to make a question interactive and more engaging by transforming question answers into clickable images. Snap XMP Desktop includes predefined images that you can use in your surveys, these are called Map Controls. Snap Surveys also provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use. This tutorial shows how […]

    The post Using clickable images as answer choices appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    This tutorial shows you how to make a question interactive and more engaging by transforming question answers into clickable images.

    Snap XMP Desktop includes predefined images that you can use in your surveys, these are called Map Controls. Snap Surveys also provides a range of rating scales that you can download and use. This tutorial shows how to add a map control to your survey.

    Step 1: Add a question to your survey

    This section shows how to add a single question as a Map Control, you can also use multiple-response questions.

    1. In the Survey Overview window, open your survey.
    2. Click New Question NewIcon.png and set the question style as Single Choice. This adds a new Single Choice question.
    1. Enter your questionnaire text, in this example “Overall, how satisfied are you with your visit to the mall?”
    2. And the text for the answers, Very Satisfied, Satisfied, Neither satisfied nor dissatisfied, Dissatisfied and Very dissatisfied.

    Step 2: Add the map control

    The question is converted to a Map Control using the Show toolbar topic. You can then set up your Map Control using the Map Control Editor.

    1. Select the question you want to convert to a Map Control
    2. Choose the Show topic and select As Map Control then click the Show checkbox.
    3. Double-click the grey area or click the Map control button on the toolbar to open the Map Control Editor.
    4. Select File | Load Map Control.
    5. For this example, double click the ‘Lrg 5 Point Emoji Pos to Neg.isf’ file.
    OpenImageFile.PNG
    1. Click the Preview tab at the base of the Map Control Editor.
    PreviewMC.PNG
    1. Click on each smiley face in turn to check it behaves as you would expect (you are able to see the code label in the hover text).
    2. Click OK to save the Map Control and return to the questionnaire.
    3. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the questionnaire.
    4. Once the questionnaire is ready you can publish it and preview in Snap XMP Desktop or Snap XMP Online to test the question behaves as required.

    Further resources

    Further information can be found at: Creating a Map for analysis using an existing style explains how to change the way areas appear when the user clicks on them and Creating interactive images with a Map control

    There is a reference guide to the Map Control Editor.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com.

    The post Using clickable images as answer choices appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adapting the Summary Report https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adapting-the-summary-report/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 14:46:22 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6305 The Summary Report is one of the standard reports provided with Snap XMP Desktop. This report generates a chart, table or list for each question in the questionnaire. The analyses used for each question: This worksheet describes how to adapt the Summary Report to reflect your organisation’s needs and branding. This worksheet covers how to: […]

    The post Adapting the Summary Report appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    The Summary Report is one of the standard reports provided with Snap XMP Desktop. This report generates a chart, table or list for each question in the questionnaire.

    The analyses used for each question:

    • Multiple and single response questions are displayed as horizontal bar charts
    • Literal (free text) responses are displayed as lists.
    • Quantities are displayed as statistics tables

    This worksheet describes how to adapt the Summary Report to reflect your organisation’s needs and branding. This worksheet covers how to:

    • Change the report description
    • Change the default headers and footers
    • Choose the content that appears in the report
    • Filter the response data
    • Add a weight to your data

    Step 1: Changing the report description

    1. Click Reports ReportsIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Reports window.
    2. In the list of reports, select the Summary report.
    3. Click Clone CloneSurveyIcon.png to make a copy of it. This ensures that you can go back to the original if you make any mistakes. The cloned report contains five instructions; the first three set the defaults and page layout of the report, an Information instruction giving the title and a brief description and a Summary Report instruction which displays the analysis charts, tables and lists.
    ReportSummary.PNG
    1. Double-click the Information instruction. This opens the Information dialog where you can edit the description. The default description uses survey fields to insert information automatically. The Insert button on the toolbar can be used to insert an image, variable fields, survey fields, date and time fields, HTML fields or cell values.
    2. Click OK to save your changes and return to the report details.
    3. Click Execute/Check report RunIcon.png on the report toolbar to check and run the report.

    Step 2: Changing the report headers and footers

    If you wish to have graphics in your header or footer, it is best to create them at the correct size before you start creating your report.

    You can place a running header or footer in your report by using a page layout instruction. This also allows you to put thumb text in your report. (This is text that runs vertically in the margin of your report.)

    1. Open your cloned summary report.
    2. Double-click the Page Layout instruction to open it.
    3. Select the Page Setup tab.
    4. Select Headers, Footers and Thumb Text. This enables the Header/Footer button.
    PageMargins.png
    1. Click Header/Footer to open the Headers/Footers dialog. It opens showing the default values.
    HeadersFooters.PNG

    Inserting header, footer and thumb text

    The header and footer each consist of three areas (left, centre and right). The thumb text runs from bottom to top in the margin and can include titles for different parts of your report. By default, it appears in the right margin of every page.

    Click inside the appropriate area and enter any free format text. Use the format toolbar to set the font name, size, style and color. The header and footer justification is fixed for each area. Select the Margin value to set the thumb text justification. Right edge places it on the right hand edge of every page; Left edge is the left edge of every page (suitable for single-sided reports). Outside edge alternates between the left and right starting on the right edge, Inside edge alternates starting on the left edge (suitable for double-sided reports).

    Inserting images and survey information

    In addition to free format text the header and footer and thumb text may also contain:

    • images (header and footer text only)
    • variable fields
    • survey fields
    • date and time of publication

    These are inserted using the Insert button

    • To add an image: Click Insert and select Image from the menu. Images can be graphics files with.jpg, .gif or .bmp format
    • To add a variable field: Click Insert and select Variable Field from the menu. Using the [Insert] button gives more flexibility in the way the text is displayed. Select a variable, aspect and case to insert from the lists in the New Variable Field dialog.
    • To a survey field: Select the survey field from the drop-down list in the top left corner in the toolbar, or click Insert and select Survey Field from the menu. Using the Insert button gives more flexibility in the way the text is displayed. Select a field property to insert from the list in the New Survey Field dialog.
    • To add the date/time: Click Insert and select Date/Time Field from the menu.

    When you have set up the headers, footers and thumb text, click OK to leave the Headers/Footers dialog. Click OK to close the Page Layout instruction.

    Step 3: Choosing the content of the report

    In the default Summary Report the Content field is blank and this setting includes all the variables that are visible in the questionnaire. You can choose which variables are in the report by listing them in the Content field. You can add any variable to your report except date and time variables. This includes derived variables and system variables known as paradata.

    You can enter:

    • A list of variable names, where the names are separated by commas (e.g. Q1, Q2, Q4, Q5).
    • A range of variables, where you have the first and last variables separated by the character ~ or the word TO.
    1. In the Summary report details, double click the Summary Report instruction. This opens the Summary Report instruction details dialog.
    2. In the Content field, enter the variables required or leave blank to show all the visible variables. This example will show questions Q0 to Q4, Q5 to Q12 and Q14. The analyses will always appear in the order they are in the questionnaire, rather than the order that you enter them in the Content field.
    SummaryRepInstn.PNG
    1. You can limit the contents of your analyses by setting the maximum number of bars in bar charts and items in lists. If you limit the number of codes, bars are shown for the codes with the most responses. You can choose whether to limit list entries to the earliest or most recent responses.
    2. Select Describe limits with the report to add a line to your report describing the limits you have set.
    3. Click OK to save your changes and return to the report details.
    4. Click Execute/Check report RunIcon.png on the report toolbar to check and run the report.

    Step 4: Changing your report data

    You can change the data in your summary report using filters and/or weights. If you add a filter to the whole report, the default Information instruction will include a reference to it. If you add a weight, you should edit the Information instruction to describe how your data has been weighted.

    Adding a filter to the whole report

    1. Open your cloned report.
    2. Add the filter to the Filter field at the top of the report window. For example, using the demographic question Q12. Are you male or female?
    3. Enter Q12=2 in the Filter field to create a report using only the data from women.
    ReportSummaryFilter.PNG

    Weighting your data

    1. Open the Summary Report instruction.
    2. Apply the weight to the report by entering it in the Weight field and click OK. For example, WT1 has been created to balance the numbers of men and women and then applied to the gender variable (Q12). This weights the data supplied by men and women.
    SummaryRepInstnWeight.PNG
    1. Add the information about the weight that you have applied to the Information instruction and save your changes.
    2. Click Execute/Check report RunIcon.png on the report toolbar to check and run the report.

    Further information

    If you would like to find out more about Snap reports, see the help section Introduction to Smart Reporting.

    For information about the report instructions see Adding report instructions.

    To find out about filtering your data, see Filter expressions.

    For more information about weighting your sample data, see Using weights.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Adapting the Summary Report appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Adding Google Analytics to your survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/adding-google-analytics-survey/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 09:42:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6137 Google Analytics is a web service provided by Google that provides tools to help track and report on your website traffic. This tutorial describes how to connect your survey to Google’s Analytics service. Please note that this tutorial assumes that you already have a Google Analytics account set up, and have an online survey that […]

    The post Adding Google Analytics to your survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Google Analytics is a web service provided by Google that provides tools to help track and report on your website traffic.

    This tutorial describes how to connect your survey to Google’s Analytics service. Please note that this tutorial assumes that you already have a Google Analytics account set up, and have an online survey that has already been created and added to your Snap Online account.

    Step 1: Create a new property in Google Analytics

    1. Login to your Google Analytics account
    2. Click Admin and create a new property
    3. Fill in the details and click OK
    4. Add a Web data stream
    5. Enter the URL for the survey, this can be found by doing the following:
      • Login to your Snap Online account
      • Click on the survey to open the Summary page
      • Select the Collect tab
      • Publish the survey, if it has not already been published online
      • Click Copy to clipboard to copy the survey URL and paste. Please note that the survey URL should not be changed after this.
    6. Enter a name for the data stream
    7. Select your measurements
    8. Click Create Stream
    9. This creates a Global Site Tag that can be added to your survey

    Step 2: Adding the Global Site Tag to your survey

    1. In Survey Overview select the online mode 5.OnlineSurveysIcon.png and open the online survey.
    2. The Global Site Tag needs to be inserted into a visible variable at the very top of the survey. We recommend using the Title variable. If it is not at the top click on it to select it then hold down CTRL on your keyboard and press the up arrow to move it to the top. Alternatively you could create a new Instruction style variable at the top of the survey.
    3. Click the variable then select Insert and HTML Field. This opens the New HTML Field dialog.
    1. In the New HTML Field dialog, select Custom HTML then paste the Global Site Tag from step 1 into the HTML text box:
    GlobalSiteTagHTML.png
    1. Click OK
    2. The HTML code is displayed in your Title, as shown below. Please note that this code will not be visible to participants.
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png to save the changes.
    2. Click Upload UploadIcon.png to pass the changes to the survey in Snap Online.
    3. Open the survey in Snap Online
    4. Click into the Collect tab
    5. Publish the latest version. If the survey is live you will need to pause interviewing first to do this.
    1. Use the live survey link to start the survey and submit a test. The preview will not work
    2. Check your Google Analytics account to see if it has registered. Please note that it might take a few minutes to update.

    The post Adding Google Analytics to your survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Using word clouds to display your results https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/using-word-clouds-to-display-results/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 09:37:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6289 Word clouds allow you to display words from your survey’s responses in a graphical representation. Snap XMP Desktop has a range of features that you can use to customise the appearance of the word cloud. These features include: This worksheet shows how to create a word cloud automatically from participants’ comments. It also describes how […]

    The post Using word clouds to display your results appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Word clouds allow you to display words from your survey’s responses in a graphical representation. Snap XMP Desktop has a range of features that you can use to customise the appearance of the word cloud.

    These features include:

    • selecting how many items are displayed
    • specify the size variation between different words
    • choose the colours used
    • decide whether to categorise literals as separate words or as complete responses
    • create clouds from open responses or from the labels of coded responses
    • automatically categorise open responses using a stop list to stop common words such as “and” or “the” being included in the word cloud

    This worksheet shows how to create a word cloud automatically from participants’ comments. It also describes how to change the number of items displayed in your word cloud and tells you how to remove words from a word cloud.

    This worksheet uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

    Step 1: Creating a word cloud from a literal question

    This step describes how to display comments as a word cloud by using auto coding.

    1. In Survey Overview, open the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey.
    2. Click Analysis Cloud  AnalysisCloudIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition window to create a cloud.
    3. In Analysis, enter Q9. This question asks the participant to give any comments about their visit.
    4. Click Apply to display the word cloud.
    WordCloud1.PNG

    Step 2: Changing the number of entries in your word cloud

    If you wish to have more items in your word cloud, change the code limit.

    1. In the Analysis Definition, select the Auto Coding tab. This tab shows how your data will be coded. These settings may be different, depending on the tailoring defaults set up. Unless you have patterns applied to literals, you would normally use Words for literals and Values for everything else. If you use Values for literals, the complete response is used rather than individual words.
    AnalyDefn.PNG
    1. Change the value in Limit codes to 20.
    2. Click Apply to see the change in your word cloud.
    WordCloud2.PNG

    Step 3: Tailoring your word cloud to hide unwanted words

    There may be some words collected in the responses that are not helpful or needed in your cloud. You can adjust which words are displayed for an individual cloud by creating a new variable that you can edit then analyse.

    1. Click Analysis Variables  AnalysisVariablesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Variables window showing the list of analysis variables. The dialog below shows two automatically created analysis variables, AV.Q9 and AV.Q9.a. In the name, AV shows that this is an auto category variable and the next part contains the variable name it comes from. The last part makes the variable unique. The dialog shows the variables created for the two word clouds for Q9.
    AnalyVar.PNG
    1. Select the variable AV.Q9.a and click Clone  CloneSurveyIcon.png  on the toolbar to make a copy of it. This is the variable used for the twenty code word cloud. (You can find out which variable was created automatically for an analysis by using the Sources and Dependents button  SourceDependIcon.PNG  on the Analysis Variables window toolbar.)
    2. The new variable should open automatically. Click Choose codes ChooseCodesIcon.PNG . This displays a new Include column.
    AutoCat1.PNG
    1. The first twenty items in the list will be used in a word cloud. Clear the Include box to remove “bit” from the word cloud.
    2. If you remove “bit” from the list of visible items, the item at number 21 will replace it. If you do not want this item to be used clear the Include box next to it.
    3. Clear Include for “1” and “24”. Any excluded words are added to the Stop words.
    4. Click Stop words to show the excluded words. Removing a word from the list will add it to the included list again. Click OK.
    StopWords2.PNG
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save your new variable.

    Step 4: Displaying your tailored word cloud

    You now need to edit your analysis to use your new variable.

    1. Open the Analysis definition for your word cloud.
    2. In Analysis, enter the  new auto category variable created in Step 3
    3. Click Apply to see the result. The words “1”, “24” and “bit” have been replaced.
    WordCloud3.PNG

    Displaying a multiple response variable as a word cloud

    This tutorial has shown you how to display comments as a word cloud. You can also display other types of questions as word clouds. For example, it’s easy to see which type of food is most popular at the cafe.

    WordCloud4.PNG

    If you would like to find out more about word clouds, see the topic Overview of word clouds. This covers creating clouds from any type of variable. To find out about changing the word cloud’s appearance, see the topic Word cloud appearance.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Using word clouds to display your results appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Creating a question bank in a SurveyPak https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/creating-a-question-bank-in-a-surveypak/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 09:35:27 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6272 SurveyPaks are a feature available in Snap XMP Desktop that can help you create surveys quickly and consistently. They consist of pre-designed questions which you can re-use. They are intended to make it easy for you to create surveys by providing standard information and questions. SurveyPaks may include The Reference window contains all the SurveyPaks. […]

    The post Creating a question bank in a SurveyPak appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    SurveyPaks are a feature available in Snap XMP Desktop that can help you create surveys quickly and consistently. They consist of pre-designed questions which you can re-use. They are intended to make it easy for you to create surveys by providing standard information and questions.

    SurveyPaks may include

    • titles and instructions
    • questions including code frames that can provide standard answers to multi-choice questions and questions in multiple languages
    • surveys or sections of surveys
    • survey templates

    The Reference window contains all the SurveyPaks. These are

    • Reference SurveyPak that provides a selection of pre-defined questions, questionnaires and survey templates that can be used in your own surveys. This SurveyPak cannot be edited.
    • User SurveyPak that provides standard topics where you can add your questions, surveys and survey templates. This SurveyPak can be edited.

    The Reference SurveyPak contains a number of demographic questions arranged in books. There are three questionnaires: Your Household, Your Employment and About You that use the demographic questions. The Templates topic contains the survey templates that are supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

    The Reference SurveyPak can be used to add individual questions, whole sections or one of the questionnaires to a survey. However, the questions in the Reference SurveyPak cannot be edited. You need to create your own SurveyPak or use the User SurveyPak provided.

    This tutorial shows how to use a question in a SurveyPak, create a new SurveyPak and add questions to it, including a translated question.

    Use a question from an existing SurveyPak

    1. In the Survey Overview window, select and open the required survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Click Reference ReferenceIcon.png on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar window. This opens the Reference window.
    3. The last used SurveyPak is displayed. This example uses the Reference SurveyPak. If this is not loaded, expand the list of recently used SurveyPaks or click Browse to find the Reference SurveyPak.
    4. Close all other windows except for the Questionnaire window.
    5. Select Window | Tile so that the two windows are arranged side by side on the screen.
    6. Double-click a topic to display its contents. Select the variable that you wish to use. The text is displayed in the bottom part of the window. If it is not visible, click the Show/Hide Preview button.
    7. Drag the variable from the SurveyPak into the questionnaire. As you drag the cursor over the questionnaire it changes from NoEntry.png  to one of these three alternatives:
      • MoveUp.png  insert the new item before this item
      • Add.png  replace this item with the new one
      • MoveDown.png  insert the new item after this one

    When you release the mouse button, the new variable drop in the position indicated by the cursor.

    Add question.PNG

    Create a new SurveyPak

    1. Select File|New|SurveyPak. This opens the New SurveyPak dialog.
    Creating a new SurveyPak
    1. By default, the new SurveyPak has a name based on the SurveyPak you opened most recently and is stored in the same directory. Click the Browse button to choose a new name and/or directory.
    2. Select the default language for your survey.
    3. Change the suggested name of the initial topic folder.
    4. Click OK.
    5. The Reference window opens and displays your new SurveyPak.

    Add a question to your SurveyPak

    1. Click Toggle Edit Mode  ToggleEditModeIcon.png on the Reference window toolbar. The toolbar changes allowing editing. Edit Mode appears on the title bar to show that you can edit the SurveyPak.
    2. Drag the variable(s) from the questionnaire window to the place where you would like to store it in the SurveyPak. These can be notes and questions.
    Add question to SP.PNG

    The SurveyPak window changes to show the new variable. The changes will be saved automatically. You can now use the variables in other surveys.

    Add a translated question to your SurveyPak

    If you have a survey in multiple languages, you can add the different versions of the question to your SurveyPak. You must first add the extra languages to your SurveyPak.

    1. Click Toggle Edit Mode  ToggleEditModeIcon.png on the Reference window toolbar to enter Edit Mode.
    2. Select Add Language from the language list. If the drop-down list is not visible, expand the Reference window by dragging the sides.
    AddLang.PNG
    1. This opens the Define Language dialog. Select the language you wish to add and specify the reading direction layout if necessary. Select this for a right to left layout or clear for left to right layout. For example, European languages are left to right. If you are adding a new version of an existing language (for example, the child’s version of an adult survey), type the language name as it appears in the questionnaire.
    AddLang2.PNG
    1. Click OK to return to the SurveyPak.
    2. Drag the item(s) from the questionnaire window to the SurveyPak. The question will be added to all the languages in the SurveyPak.
    3. Check your question has imported by selecting the language in the drop-down list. If there was not a translation for the question already in the questionnaire, you will see the words (Undefined in language).
    AddLang3.PNG
    1. You can edit the question by double-clicking it to open the Variable Properties dialog. You can change:
      • the Label (the name that appears in the SurveyPak
      • the Text (the question text)
      • the codes for multiple choice questions
    VarProps.PNG
    1. Click OK when you have made your edits.

    If you add the question to a survey, it will add the appropriate version of the question to the languages that are in the survey and the SurveyPak.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com.

    The post Creating a question bank in a SurveyPak appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Transferring data between a survey and a database https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/transferring-data-between-a-survey-and-a-database/ Fri, 16 Jul 2021 11:05:24 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6231 Snap XMP Desktop allows you to link your survey to a database. This allows you to seed the survey with data that is already in your database, or use email addresses in the database to send invitations to your participants. In addition, data received from the survey can be exported back into the database. To […]

    The post Transferring data between a survey and a database appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Snap XMP Desktop allows you to link your survey to a database. This allows you to seed the survey with data that is already in your database, or use email addresses in the database to send invitations to your participants. In addition, data received from the survey can be exported back into the database.

    To connect the survey to a database, you need a database field that contains a unique ID for each participant. This is used to identify a participant variable in the survey, so the data is put in the correct person’s record or response. Snap XMP Desktop can automatically identify many database types. However, some databases have specific requirements, such as password protection. For these, you need to specify how to connect the data link. You use Microsoft’s Data Link tool to do this.

    This tutorial describes how to create a link between a Snap survey and a SQL Server database, to seed your survey, or send updated data from your survey to your database. You can set this up to happen automatically by using a Hot Link.

    Setting up the Database Linkage Wizard

    1. In the Survey Overview window, open the required survey.
    2. Select File | Database Link to display the Database Links dialog.
    3. Click New to create a new database link. This opens the Database Linkage Wizard.
    4. In Linkage Type, select Import from Database.
    LinkageType.PNG
    1. Click Next. The next step requires a database file or to build a database link. For most types of database file, click Select Database File. If the database type is not listed as one of the defaults in the Select Database File dialog then click Build Data Link to create the connection. This example describes how to build a link to an SQL database.
    SelectDB.PNG

    Creating the data link for the SQL database

    1. Click Build Data Link. This opens the Data Link Properties dialog where you can create the data link
    2. Select the appropriate data type. For a link to an SQL Server database, select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server.
    DBProps.PNG
    1. Click Next. The Data Link Properties dialog moves to the Connection tab.
    2. Select the SQL server on your network from the dropdown list.
    3. Select the appropriate security type for the server.
    4. Select the SQL Server database file from the drop-down list, or type the name of the file.
    DBConn.PNG
    1. Click Test Connection to confirm that you can connect to your database.
    2. Click OK to return to the Database Linkage Wizard.

    Matching records between the survey and the database

    1. Select the table or sheet in your database containing the data you want. Click Next.
    DataLinkageWiz1.PNG
    1. Select how you will import data to the survey. You will need a unique id for each person in the database that can be matched with a participant (for example, a customer id or email address). This is called the link variable.
      • Join cases where the link variables match only imports data from the database if the id is already in the survey.
      • Join matching cases and append unmatched cases imports all data from the database. If the id is already in the survey, the appropriate data is added to that case. If it’s not, a new case is created.
      • Append unmatched cases creates new cases in the survey for the ids that are not already in the survey. It does not change the existing cases.
      • Append all cases creates new cases in the survey for every id in the database. It does not check if the id already exists in the survey.
    2. Select the field in the database that contains the unique id from the Database field dropdown list.
    DataLinkageWiz2.PNG
    1. Select the variable in the survey that contains the unique id from the Use Snap variable list. (You can also use the case number as the unique number for each case.)
    2. Click Next.

    Choosing the database fields to import

    After selecting the database, database table, and matching variable, you need to select the database fields to import. The Database Linkage Wizard dialog shows a list of database fields that you can import on the left, with variables in the current survey on the right.

    1. In each row, select the survey variable that maps to the database field. Snap XMP Desktop initially works out a suggested mapping. To change this mapping, select a variable from the list of available survey variables. Select blank if you do not wish to map the field.
    8.SeedingData2.PNG
    1. If you wish to import a field into your survey that does not already have a variable set up in your survey, select <Create Variable> from the dropdown list. The Name and Label automatically display the name of the database field. You can edit them if you wish. Set the response type and length to appropriate values and click OK.
    2. If you wish to import data into a multi-response variable, you may need to set up which codes in the database match to which variable codes in the survey. When you select the multi-response variable in the right hand column, a code mapping area appears. Select the appropriate code or define a new one as you can with variables.
    9.SeedingData3.PNG
    1. Click Next to display a summary of what the link does.
    2. Check the details are correct, and enter a Name for the database link.
    3. Click Finish. Snap shows the Database Links dialog including the new link.
    4. If you wish to alter any part of the link, click Modify. To delete a link, click Delete. To make a copy of the link, click Clone, and then modify the new link as required.
    5. Select the link and click Run to import the data. A brief report is displayed.

    Setting up an automatic Hot Link

    Making an import link into a hot link means that when you identify a new case by entering a unique value in the link variable, data from the external file is copied into the new case. This means that details such as name, address and email address could be loaded into the survey as soon as the case was identified.

    If it is an export link, the data entered in the survey is copied to the external file. If it is a new case, a new record is created. This allows you to keep a database up to date.

    1. Select File | Database Link to open the Database Linkage dialog.
    2. Select the database link.
    3. Click the Hot Link button. This opens the Hot Link dialog.
    4. Select Use As Hot Link, then select the appropriate option.
      • Automatic update: updates the matched variables of each case when the key link field is entered.
      • Manual update: update the matched variables when you click the refresh button SynchronizeIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar.
    HotLink.PNG
    1. Click OK. The Database Link dialog shows the amended link specified as a Hot Link.
    HotLink.PNG
    1. The link will update the survey when the database changes. Click Run to update the survey immediately.

    For instructions on linking to a database containing email addresses, see Setting up email invites for online surveys.

    For information on using a database link to share information between Snap surveys, see Importing data from another survey and Exporting data from another Snap survey. Further information on using Hot Links is at Using Hot Links.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Transferring data between a survey and a database appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Translating your survey https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/translating-your-survey/ Fri, 16 Jul 2021 11:01:23 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6218 There are several ways of translating surveys in Snap XMP Desktop. If you use standard questions, you can add them to a multi-lingual SurveyPak, and then re-use them in other surveys, either by adding them directly to a multi-lingual questionnaire, or using the automatic translation facility. This tutorial explains how to export a file to […]

    The post Translating your survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    There are several ways of translating surveys in Snap XMP Desktop.

    • You can write the translation yourself (create a new language edition, and type in the translation)
    • You can use an external translator (create a text file to be translated, and import the translated file)
    • You can use pre-translated questions (create all the language editions that you need, and add a question that already has translations)
    • Use Snap XMP Desktop to automatically translate all the questions it recognises using reference questions (open the reference window and then use the Translation Wizard).

    If you use standard questions, you can add them to a multi-lingual SurveyPak, and then re-use them in other surveys, either by adding them directly to a multi-lingual questionnaire, or using the automatic translation facility.

    This tutorial explains how to export a file to send to an external translator and re-import the translated text to create a bilingual survey. The example uses a translation from English to Spanish.

    Step 1: Exporting the original version of your survey

    These steps assume that you have created your questionnaire in one language before you start.

    1. In the Survey Overview window, click Questionnaire QuestionnaireIcon.png to open the survey in the Questionnaire window.
    2. Select File|Translation to display the Translation Wizard dialog.
    3. In Action, select Prepare External Translation.
    Translation1.PNG
    1. Click Next. In Export, select Reference file only to create a list of the phrases that need translating. If you already have translated some of the questions, export to a Reference with a matched translation. This creates two files, one with the list of text to be translated, and one with the list of texts that have been translated (with gaps for untranslated text).
    Translation2.PNG
    1. Make a note of the File name you use so you can find it later. Check the Omit repeated content box to leave out phrases that are used in multiple places (for example, ratings questions might all have the same possible answers).
    2. Click Start to generate your file. When the export has completed, you will be given a brief report. If you want to keep a copy of the report, click Send To to save it to a file.
    3. Click OK to close the window.

    Step 2: Sending the file to the translator

    You now have a text file that you can send to your translator. They need to produce a translated file that matches the file that the translation wizard has produced. It needs to have the same number of lines and the same instructions to the translation wizard. These should not be translated. It also needs to be a plain text file (not a Word document).

    The instructions are used to describe the question, and are all in capitals. For example, a section of the questionnaire appears in the file like this

    START
    NOTE 2 (ref:N2)
    About Yourself 
    NOTE 3 (ref:N3) 
    Please spend a few moments filling in this questionnaire. SUMMARY 
    Spend a few moments filling in questionnaire 
    NOTE 4 (ref:N4) 
    Please read each question carefully and tick a box to indicate your answer. 
    SUMMARY 
    Read each question carefully 
    QUESTION 5 (ref:Q1) 
    Are you male or female? 
    SUMMARY 
    Respondent gender 
    ANSWER 
    Male 
    Female 

    You would ask your translator to translate the phrases between the lines in capitals. Their translation would look something like this.

    START
    NOTE 2 (ref:N2)
    Sobre Usted
    NOTE 3 (ref:N3)
    Por favor, dedique unos instantes a rellenar este cuestionario.
    SUMMARY
    Dedique unos instantes a rellenar este cuestionario
    NOTE 4 (ref:N4)
    Por favor, lea detenidamente cada pregunta y marque una casilla para indicar su respuesta.
    SUMMARY
    Lea detenidamente cada pregunta
    QUESTION 5 (ref:Q1)
    ¿Es usted hombre o mujer?
    SUMMARY
    Género
    ANSWER
    Hombre
    Mujer
    

    The generated translation file starts with a set of notes for the translator

    • please translate between ‘START’ and ‘END’
    • please do not translate START, END, TOPIC, NOTE, QUESTION, SUMMARY, ANSWER, FOOTNOTE, LANGUAGE: , etc.
    • please do not add or remove lines
    • Un-translatable questions may be removed provided the declaration line is left (and only this line)

    {The declaration line is the line containing the reference name eg ‘(ref:V101)’}

    • Please only place comments or warnings about a question at the end of the declaration line, following the ‘(ref:Vn)’

    Step 3: Importing the new translated file

    Before importing the translation, check your translated text file to make sure it has the same number of lines as the original, and all the lines in capitals are the same as in the original file.

    For the import you will need both the original exported file and the translated file.

    1. Open the questionnaire in the Questionnaire design window. When you import the translated fileY this creates a new language edition of your questionnaire.
    QuestEng.PNG
    1. Select File|Translation to open the Translation Wizard dialog.
    2. Select Apply External Translation in the Action drop-down and click Next.
    Translation4.PNG
    1. Select the original language as the Reference Language. This is English in our English to Spanish example.
    Translation5.PNG
    1. Set the File name for the Reference Language to the file that you exported from the survey in Step 1.
    2. Select Add Language as the translation language. This adds a new language edition to your questionnaire. (If you already have the correct language in your questionnaire, just select it in the list.)
    DefineLang.PNG
    1. The Define Language dialog opens. Set the language name in the Name list and click OK.
    Translation6.PNG
    1. Set the File name for the Translation language to the translated text file.
    2. Click Start.
    3. When the translation import finishes, you will see a report window. This shows the report on a question with numerals, where the numbers are the same in both languages.If you want to keep a copy of the report, click Send To to save it to a file.
    4. Click OK to clear the window.
    5. The translated language is added to your questionnaire. Click on the new edition tab to display it. By default, a language question is inserted at the beginning of the questionnaire, allowing the respondent to select the language they would like to use. This language question can be edited as required.
    QuestEsp.PNG

    Further information

    If you would like to find out more about running a multi-lingual questionnaire, see Languages.

    For more information about running a survey in multiple languages, see the worksheet Creating a new language edition.

    If there is a topic you would like a tutorial on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Translating your survey appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Banding quantity variables for analysis https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/snapxmp/banding-quantity-variables-for-analysis/ Fri, 16 Jul 2021 10:50:38 +0000 https://www.snapsurveys.com/support-snapxmp/?post_type=epkb_post_type_1&p=6197 Quantity data provides a continuous set of values which makes it difficult to find out how values are distributed, as every response could be different. Grouping the quantity responses together into banded ranges provides a way of using charts and tables to analyse the quantity data. Usually the data is grouped into equal band intervals […]

    The post Banding quantity variables for analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>
    Quantity data provides a continuous set of values which makes it difficult to find out how values are distributed, as every response could be different. Grouping the quantity responses together into banded ranges provides a way of using charts and tables to analyse the quantity data. Usually the data is grouped into equal band intervals to see how the responses are distributed. Choosing how wide the bands are can help you see any important spikes or dips which might average out over a wide band.

    To do this, you need to find out what the minimum and maximum value responses are, and use this information to divide the range into equal bands. You can display the minimum and maximum values in a table of descriptive statistics. Once you have decided on the bands, you must sort the responses into those ranges, so they can be used in charts and tables. This is done by creating a derived variable.

    Step 1: Decide on the band ranges

    In order to split the quantity into bands of equal size, create a table to find the maximum and minimum values and the range. This tutorial uses the Crocodile Rock Cafe survey supplied with Snap XMP Desktop.

    1. Click Analysis table AnalysisTblIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition dialog to create a table.
    2. In Analysis, enter Q5, the question that asks for the “Amount spent”.
    3. In Break, select Statistics table.
    AnalStatsTbl.PNG
    1. Click the Descriptive Statistics tab to select the information that will be shown in the table.
    DescStats.PNG
    1. Use the < button to remove all entries from the Used column apart from the Minimum, Maximum and Range statistics. (You can select multiple entries to move at the same time.)
    2. Click OK to create your table.
    TableStats.PNG

    The table shows the top and bottom limits of the bands. For a coarse grain banding, you could split the data into bands of 1 – 21.33 (Low spend), 21.34 – 41.66 (Medium spend) and 41.67 – 62 (High spend). Deciding which band ranges to use can depend on your survey, such as the status of the survey or the intended audience of the analyses and reports that use the banded data. If the survey is live then you may wish to take into account that any new responses may contain data outside the current ranges and extend the bands. If the analysis is used in a report you may want to use whole numbers to make the chart easier to read, for example using 1 to 20 rather than 1-21.33.

    Step 2: Create the derived variable

    1. Click Variables VariablesIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Variables window.
    2. Click New Variable NewSurveyIcon.png  on the Variables toolbar to create a new variable.
    3. Enter a Name and Label to describe the variable
    4. Set the Type to Derived.
    5. Set the Response to Single.
    6. Click Toggle Definitions ToggleDefnIcon.PNG to display the variable definition.
    7. In Initial Value, enter Q5. This means that the data will be derived from the response in Q5.
    1. Click in the empty Code Label field. Enter the bands as shown, using the Tab key to move to the next field and to enter a new code.
    CodeList1.PNG
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save the new variable.

    Step 3: Analyse the quantity data using the bands

    1. Click Analysis Chart AnalysisChartIcon.png  on the Snap XMP Desktop toolbar. This opens the Analysis Definition dialog to create a chart.
    2. In Style, select Bar Percent Labelled. Set the analysis value to the name of your new variable, AmountSpent, and select the Transpose box.
    ChartAnal.PNG
    1. Click OK to display the bar chart. You can see that nearly all the responses are in the lowest band. For further detail, you will need to redefine your variable or create a new variable with narrower bands.
    BarChart1.PNG
    1. Open the new variable and update the label and values as shown. Click Clone Answer Code CloneSurveyIcon.png  to duplicate the code, if required.
    NarrowBandCodelist.PNG
    1. Click Save SaveIcon.png  to save your changes.
    2. If your chart is still open it will now have Out of Date on the title bar. Click Rebuild CountResponsesIcon.PNG  on the toolbar to update the chart.
    BarChart2.PNG

    Further analysis of the low end values

    The previous graph shows that most people spent less than twenty pounds in the shop, with the other bands being roughly equal.

    You could further analyse the low end spending in a separate graph by cloning the derived variable, AmountSpent and creating bands ranging from 1 to 20. The bar chart analysis is shown.

    BarChart3.PNG

    You can see from this that the most popular lower end spend is between one and five pounds.

    If there is a topic you would like a worksheet on, email to snapideas@snapsurveys.com

    The post Banding quantity variables for analysis appeared first on SnapSurveys.

    ]]>